Catalog Contactoare

W POWER AND AUXILIARY CONTACTORS
W MODULAR CONTACTORS
w MINIATUR POWER AND AUXILIARY CONTACTORS
w THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS
W THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS FOR MINIATUR POWER CONTACTORS
W MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCHES UP TO 100A
CONNECTING COMPETENCE.
E N E R G Y I N D U S T R Y B U I L D I N G S S A F E T Y D A T A C A B L E L I G H T
ALEA
GENERAL I NFORMATI ON
W GENERAL I NFORMATI ON
All dimensioned drawings are displayed within the confines of available space on the page and are only intended as a guide.
All circuit diagrams are schematic wiring diagrams which are intended to allow better understanding of the function, and
will need to be edited/added to during the course of project planning.
All images represent samples of the product and are intended for information purposes only.
Unless otherwise stipulated, the current version of the General Terms of Delivery issued by The Association of the Austrian Electrical
and Electronics Industries FEEI shall apply. No liability for errors in text, type or images; we reserve the right to make changes to techni-
cal specifications of the product range. The user information contained in this catalog reflect the opinion of the company at the time
of writing. The information contained in it was assembled on the basis of published norms, specialist industry presentations, specia-
list literature and in-house expertise. The content is for informational purposes only and has no validity in law.
W SCHRACK PRODUCT QUALI TY
We offer our customers a well sorted product range offering the highest levels of product availability. Our aim is ultra-
efficiency when it comes to customerspecific solutions. This is possible thanks to standardized work processes, modularisation
and the use of software aids.
W SCHRACK I SO-CERTI FI ZI ED
In recent times, testing procedures for ISO certification have shifted their focus very strongly on how organisations deal with
customers, and the associated customer processes. Some of the major areas which are inspected include:
General customer communication
Dealing with offers and tenders in a structured manner
Transparency in all areas of the company in direct or indirect contact with customers
The above is required in all tiers of management
ISO certification is by no means the norm. Our ISO certification 9001:2000 is both a reward as well as an obligation. The
obligation we have in accepting this certification is to ensure the documentation of our work processes and to continuously
improve such processes.
W WELCOME TO SCHRACK TECHNI K
We are a leading, sales-oriented brand company from Austria specialising in the areas of energy, data and lighting systems.
Our activities focus on products and solutions for energy optimisation, safety, data transfer and comfort. High-quality
products, technical expertise and one-to-one customer service are at the fore of what we do.
I NDEX
Page
1
w ALEA POWER AND AUXI LI ARY CONTACTORS
OVERVIEW................................................................................................................ Page 4
GENERAL INFORMATIONS.......................................................................................... Page 13
PRODUCTS AND ORDER NUMBERS ............................................................................ Page 18
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ...................................................................................... Page 33
DIMENSIONS ............................................................................................................ Page 100
SCHEMATICS ............................................................................................................ Page 112
w BZ MODULAR CONTACTORS
DIMENSIONS ............................................................................................................ Page 129
SCHEMATICS ............................................................................................................ Page 130
w LA MI NI ATUR POWER AND AUXI LI ARY CONTACTORS
DIMENSIONS ............................................................................................................ Page 139
SCHEMATICS ............................................................................................................ Page 140
w ALEA THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS
OVERVIEW................................................................................................................ Page 144
ACCESSORIES............................................................................................................ Page 156
CHARACTERISTIC CURVES .......................................................................................... Page 157
DIMENSIONS ............................................................................................................ Page 158
SCHEMATICS ............................................................................................................ Page 159
w LA THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS FOR MI NI ATUR POWER CONTACTORS
DIMENSIONS ............................................................................................................ Page 166
SCHEMATICS ............................................................................................................ Page 167
w ALEA MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCHES UP TO 100A
OVERVIEW................................................................................................................ Page 170
ACCESSORIES............................................................................................................ Page 188
CHARACTERISTIC CURVES .......................................................................................... Page 190
DIMENSIONS ............................................................................................................ Page 191
SCHEMATICS ............................................................................................................ Page 195
w INDEX
ALPHABETICAL INDEX ................................................................................................ Page 196
LIST OF ARTICLES ...................................................................................................... Page 198
ALEA POWER AND AUXI LI ARY CONTACTORS
Page
2
LSHD / LSHD-PLC
LSD0 / LSS0-PLC
TOP-TECHNIC
LSD2 / LSD3 / LSD6
TOP-TECHNIC
LSDD / LSSD-PLC
TOP-TECHNIC TOP-TECHNIC
LSDE / LSDG LSDH
ALEA POWER AND AUXI LI ARY CONTACTORS
Page
3
ALEA POWER AND
AUXI LI ARY CONTACTORS
w CONTENTS
OVERVIEW.............................................................................................................. Page 4
GENERAL INFORMATIONS ............................................................................ Page 13
PRODUCTS AND ORDER NUMBERS ........................................................ Page 18
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ...................................................................... Page 33
DIMENSIONS ........................................................................................................ Page 100
SCHEMATICS .......................................................................................................... Page 112
POWER AND AUXI LI ARY CONTACTORS
Page
4
SIZE 00 00 0 2
TYPE LSHD LSDD / LSSD
1)
LSD0 / LSS0 LSD2
CONTACTORS AND VACUUM CONTACTORS
TYPE / AC, DC OPERATION 06 07 09 12 09 12 17 25 32 40 50
AC-3
Ie/AC-3/400 V 6A 7A 9A 12A 9A 12A 17A 25A 32A 40A 50A
400 V 3A 3kW 4kW 5.5kW 4kW 5.5kW 7.5kW 11kW 15kW 18.5kW 22kW
230 V -- 2.2kW 3kW 3kW 3kW 3kW 4kW 5.5kW 7.5kW 11kW 15kW
500 V 2A 3.5kW 4.5kW 5.5kW 4.5kW 7.5kW 10kW 11kW 18.5kW 22kW 30kW
690 V 1A 4kW 5.5kW 5.5kW 5.5kW 7.5kW 11kW 11kW 18.5kW 22kW 22kW
1 000 V -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
AC-4 (FOR IA = 6 X IE)
400 V -- 3kW 4kW 4kW 4kW 5.5kW 7.5kW 7.5kW 15kW 18.5kW 22kW
400 V (200 000 operating cycles) -- 1.15kW 2kW 2kW 2kW 2.6kW 3.5kW 4.4kW 8.2kW 9.5kW 12.6kW
AC-1 (40 C, 690 V)
Ie 10A 18A 22A 22A 40A 40A 40A 40A 50A 60A 60A
ACCESSORIES FOR CONTACTORS
AUXILIARY CONTACTS front LSZDH.. LSZDH.../LSZDD.../LSZD0 LSZ0D... LSZ0D...
AND CONTACT BLOCKS LSZD0..
lateral -- -- LSZ0D7.., LSZ0D9.. LSZ0D7.., LSZ0D9..
TERMINAL COVERS -- -- -- LSZ2D...
SURGE SUPPRESSORS LSZH0... LSZD.... LSZ0.... LSZ2D....
OVERLOAD RELAYS (PROTECTION EQUIPMENT: OVERLOAD RELAYS)
LST, thermal, Class 10 -- LSTD.... 0.1 ... 12 A LST0.... 2.5 ... 25 A LST2.... 10 ... 50 A
MOTOR STARTER PROTECTORS (PROTECTION EQUIPMENT: MOTOR STARTER PROTECTORS)
TYPE BES -- BESD 0.16 ... 12 A Size 00 BES0 0.16 ... 25 A BES2 25 ... 50 A
BESD 0.16 ... 12 A Size 0
LINK MODULES LSZ -- LSZDD005, LSZDD006 LSZ0D002 (AC), LSZ0D004 (DC) LSZ2D004 (AC), LSZ2D005 (DC)
REVERSING CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES
COMPLETE UNITS TYPE LSW -- LSWD07.. LSWD09.. LSWD12.. -- LSW012.. LSW017.. LSW025.. LSW232.. LSW240.. LSW250..
400 V -- 3kW 4kW 5.5kW -- 5.5kW 7.5kW 12kW 15kW 18.5kW 22kW
WIRING SETS -- LSZDW001 LSZDW001 LSZ2W001
MECHANICAL INTERLOCKS -- in wiring set included LSZ0W002 LSZ0W002
CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES FOR WYE-DELTA STARTING
COMPLETE UNITS TYPE LSY -- LSYD17.. LSY032.. LSY25033
400 V -- 7.5kW 15kW 22kW
WIRING SETS -- LSZDW001 LSZ0Y001 LSZ2Y003
1) no auxillary contacts for PLC-use types possible
W CONTACTORS AND CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES 3-POLE OVERVIEW
LSHD / LSHD-PLC 1) LSDD / LSSD-PLC 1) LSD0 / LSS0-PLC LSD2
Page
5
3 6 10 12 14
LSD3 LSD6 LSDE LSDG LSDH
65 80 95 11 15
2)
19
2)
22 26 30 41 51 63/64 82/83
65A 80A 95A 115A 150A 185A 225A 265A 300A 400A 500A 630A 820A
30kW 37kW 45kW 55kW 75kW 90kW 110kW 132kW 160kW 200kW 250kW 335kW 450kW
18.5kW 22kW 22kW 37kW 45kW 55kW 55kW 75kW 90kW 132kW 160kW 200kW 260kW
45kW 55kW 55kW 110kW 132kW 160kW 200kW 250kW 250kW 400kW 400/500kW 600kW 800kW
30kW 37kW 37kW 75kW 90kW 90kW 90/315kW 132/355kW 132/400kW 250/560kW 250/710kW 600kW 800kW
15.1kW 17.9kW 22kW 29kW 38kW 45kW 54/78kW 66/93kW 71/112kW 84/140kW 98/161kW 168kW 191kW
100A 120A 120A 160A 185A 215A 275/330A 330A 330A 430/610A 610A 700A 910A
LSZ0D... LSZ0D... LSZ0D... LSZ0D... --
LSZ0D7.., LSZ3D8.., LSZ0D9.. LSZ0D7.., LSZ3D8.., LSZ0D9.. LSZ0D7.., LSZ3D8.., LSZ0D9.. LSZ0D7.., LSZ3D8.., LSZ0D9.. --
LSZ3D... LSZ6D... LSZED... LSZED... LSZHD...
LSZ2.... LSZ6.... LSZ6.... LSZ6.... included
LST3 25 ... 100 A -- -- -- --
BES3 63 ... 100 A -- -- -- --
LS3D003 (AC), LS3D004 (DC)
LSW365.. LSW380.. LSW395.. -- -- -- --
30kW 37kW 45kW -- -- -- --
LSZ3W001 -- -- -- --
LSZ0W002 -- -- -- --
-- -- -- -- --
-- -- -- -- --
-- -- -- -- --
2) without box-terminals
W CONTACTORS AND CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES 3-POLE OVERVIEW
LSD3 LSD6 LSDE LSDG LSDH
Page
6
W LSDD CONTACTORS, LSSD CONTACTORS FOR PLC-USE AND
LSHD AUXI LI ARY CONTACTORS OVERVI EW
W SI ZE 00 WI TH MOUNTABLE ACCESSORI ES
1. Contactor LSDD
2. Contactor LSSD and auxiliary contactors LSHD
8. 1-pole auxiliary contact block, cable entry from below
10. 4-pole auxiliary contact block (terminal designations
according to EN 50005 and EN 50012)
13. Solder pin adapter for contactors and auxiliary contactors
16. Surge suppressor
17. 3-phase feeder terminal
18. Link for paralleling (star jumper), 3-pole, without terminal
19. Link for paralleling, 3-pole, with terminal
For contactors LSDD
For LSSD contactors for PLC-use and
LSHD auxiliary contactors
The ALEA generation of controls is a complete, modular system family, logically designed right down to the last detail, from
the basic units to the accessories.
Page
7
W LSD0, LSD2, LSD3 AND LSS0 CONTACTORS FOR PLC-USE OVERVI EW
W SI ZES 0 TO 3 WI TH MOUNTABLE ACCESSORI ES
For sizes 0 to 3:
1. Contactor, size 0
10. Link for paralleling (star jumper), 3-pole, without
connection terminal
12. 2-pole auxiliary contact block, laterally mountable left or
right (terminal designations according to EN 50012)
13. Single-pole auxiliary contact (up to 4 can be snapped on)
14. Mechanical interlock, laterally mountable
16. Wiring modules on the top and bottom (reversing duty)
17. Surge suppressor (varistor, RC element, diode assembly),
can be mounted on the top or bottom (different for
size 0, 2 and 3)
Only for sizes 2 and 3:
22. Terminal cover for box terminals
Only for size 3:
23. Terminal cover for cable lugs and busbar connections
24. Auxiliary conductor terminal, 3-pole
Accessories identical for sizes 0 to 3
Accessories different according to size
Page
8
W LSD6, LSDE AND LSDG CONTACTORS OVERVI EW
W SI ZES 6 TO 12 WI TH ACCESSORI ES
1. LSD6, LSDE, LSDG contactors, sizes 6, 10 and 12
6. Single-pole auxiliary contact (up to 4 can be snapped on)
7. 2-pole auxiliary contact block, laterally mountable left or
right (terminal designations according to EN 50012)
(identical for sizes 0 to 12)
8. Surge suppressor (RC element), for plugging into top of
withdrawable coil
9. Terminal cover for cable lug and busbar connection,
different for sizes 6, 10 and 12
10. Terminal cover for box terminal, different for sizes 6, 10
and 12
11. Box terminal block, different for sizes 6, 10 and 12
Page
9
W LSD CONTACTORS OVERVI EW
W LSW CONTACTOR ASSEMBLI ES, LSD CONTACTORS SI ZE 6 WI TH ACCESSORI ES
1. LSD contactors, size 6
3. Wiring modules on the top and bottom
4. Link for paralleling (star jumper), 3-pole, with through
hole
and 12
7. Box terminal block, different for sizes 6, 10 and 12
Page
10
W LSDE AND LSDG CONTACTORS OVERVI EW
W LSW CONTACTOR ASSEMBLI ES, LSD CONTACTORS SI ZE 10 AND 12 WI TH ACCESSORI ES
1. LSD contactors, sizes 10 and 12 or LSD
3. Wiring modules on the top and bottom
4. Link for paralleling (star jumper), 3-pole, with through
hole
and 12
Page
11
W LSD CONTACTORS OVERVI EW
W LSD CONTACTORS SI ZES 6 TO 12 WI TH ACCESSORI ES
1. LSD6, LSDE, LSDG contactors, sizes 6, 10 and 12
3. Withdrawable coils for LSD contactors with conventional
operating mechanism
6. Surge suppressor (RC element), plug-mountable on
withdrawable coils
Identical for sizes 6 to 12
Different according to size
Page
12
The ALEA generation of controls is a complete, modular system family, logically designed right down to the last detail, from
the basic units to the accessories.
W AC AND DC OPERATI ON
IEC 60947, EN 60947 (VDE 0660)
The LSHD Auxiliary contactors are suitable for use in any climate. They are finger-safe according to EN 50274.
The LSHD Auxiliary contactors have screw or Cage Clamp terminals. Four contacts are available in the basic unit.
(Cage Clamp on request)
W AUXI LI ARY CONTACTORS SI ZE 00, WI TH ACCESSORI ES
1. Auxiliary contactor
2. Auxiliary contactor for PLC-use
8. 1-pole auxiliary contact block, cable entry from below
10. 4-pole auxiliary contact block (terminal designations according to EN 50005)
13. Solder pin adapter for aux contactor
16. Surge suppressor
W LSHD AUXI LI ARY CONTACTORS OVERVI EW
iliary
Page
13
W LSD CONTACTORS FOR SWI TCHI NG MOTORS, 3-POLE, 3 ... 250 kW
GENERAL I NFORMATI ONS
AC AND DC OPERATION
IEC 60947, EN 60947 (VDE 0660). The LSD contactors are climate-proof. They are finger-safe according to EN 50274. Size
size 00 contactors have an auxiliary contact integrated in the basic unit. The basic units of sizes 0 to 3 contain only the main
current paths. All basic units can be extended with auxiliary contacts and contact blocks.
CONNECTION METHODS
The LSD contactors are available with screw terminals (box terminals and connecting bars) or with Cage Clamp terminals.
The size 3 contactors have removable box terminals for the main conductor connections. This permits connection of ring
terminal lugs or busbars.
CONTACT RELIABILITY
If voltages 110 V and current 100 mA are to be switched, the auxiliary contacts of the LSD contactor or LSH auxiliary
contactor should be used as they guarantee a high level of contact reliability. These auxiliary contacts are suitable for solid-
state circuits with currents 1 mA at a voltage of 17 V.
SHORT-CIRCUIT PROTECTION OF THE CONTACTORS
Short-circuit protection of the contactors without overload relay, see Technical specifications. For short-circuit protection of
the contactors with overload relay, see "Thermal Overload Relays". To assemble fuseless motor feeders you must select
combinations of motor protection switches (MPS) and contactor.
MOTOR PROTECTION
LST thermal overload relays can be fitted to the LSD contactors for protection against overload. The overload relays must be
ordered separately.
RATINGS OF INDUCTION MOTORS
The quoted rating (in kW) refers to the output power on the motor shaft (according to the nameplate).
SURGE SUPPRESSION
LSD contactors can be retrofitted with RC elements, varistors, diodes or diode assemblies (assembly of diode and Zener diode
for short break times) for damping opening surges in the coil. The surge suppressors are plugged onto the front of size 00
contactors. Space is provided for them next to a snap-on auxiliary contact block. For sizes 0 to 3 contactors, varistors and
RC elements can be snapped on either on the top or directly below the coil terminals. Diode assemblies are available in 2
different versions on account of their polarity. Depending on the application they can be connected either only at the
bottom (assembly with MPS) or only at the top (assembly with overload relay). The plug-in direction of the diodes and diode
assemblies is specified by coding.
Exceptions:
LSZD0006, in this case the plug-in direction is marked with "+" and "-"
Auxiliary contactors are supplied either without surge suppression or with a varistor or diode connected as standard,
according to the version.
Note:
The OFF-delay times of the NO contacts and the ON-delay times of the NC contacts increase if the contactor coils are
damped against voltage peaks (noise suppression diode 6 to 10 times; diode assemblies 2 to 6 times, varistor +2 to 5 ms).
W LSD CONTACTORS, 3-POLE, SI ZES 00 TO 3, UP TO 45 kW
Page
14
The magnetic coil is switched directly on and off with the control supply voltage Us by way of terminals A1/A2.
MULTI-VOLTAGE RANGE FOR THE CONTROL SUPPLY VOLTAGE U
S
:
Several closely adjacent control supply voltages, available around the world, are covered by just one coil, for example
110-115-120-127 V UC or 220-230-240 V UC. In addition, allowance is also made for a coil operating range of 0.8 times
the lower (Us min) and 1.1 times the upper (Us max) rated control supply voltage within which the contactor switches
reliably and no thermal overloading occurs.
LSD contactors for switching motors
LSR contactors for AC-1 applications
UC OPERATION
The contactors can be operated with AC (40 to 60 Hz) as well as with DC.
WITHDRAWABLE COILS
For simple coil replacement, e.g. if the application is replaced, the magnetic coil can be pulled out upwards after the release
mechanism has been actuated and can be replaced by any other coil of the same size.
AUXILIARY CONTACT COMPLEMENT
The contactors can be fitted with up to 8 auxiliary contacts (identical auxiliary contact blocks from sizes 0 to 12). Of these,
no more than 4 are permitted to be NC contacts.
W LSD CONTACTORS, 3-POLE, SI ZES 6 TO 12, > 45 TO 250 kW
Page
15
W LSS, LSD CONTACTORS FOR SWI TCHI NG MOTORS, 3-POLE, 3 ... 250 kW
Various auxiliary contact blocks can be added to the contactor basic units depending on the application:
LSSD, LSDD CONTACTORS
Terminal designations according to EN 50012.
Size 00 contactors have an auxiliary contact integrated in the basic
unit.
Contactors with a NO contact as auxiliary contact with screw or Cage
Clamp terminals, can be expanded into contactors with 2, 4 and 5
auxiliary contacts according to EN 50012 using auxiliary contact blocks.
These auxiliary contact blocks cannot be combined with contactors
which have a NC contact in the basic unit as they are coded.
LSZD0501,510 single-auxiliary contact blocks with connection options
from below enable easy and clearly arranged wiring especially for the
installation of network access junctions. These auxiliary contact blocks
are offered only with screw terminals.
All the previously mentioned auxiliary contact variants can be snap-
fitted onto the front of the contactor. The auxiliary contact block has
a centrally positioned release lever for disassembly.
W AUXI LI ARY CONTACT BLOCKS
W SI ZE 00
LSD0 TO LSDG CONTACTORS, 1-POLE AUXILIARY CONTACTS
W SI ZES 0 TO 12
with 1 NO with 1 NC
LSZDD201,212,213,222 LSZDH540,531,522
LSZD0501,510
contactors
size 0 to 12
LSZ0D010
LSZ0D910
(early make)
LSZ0D001
LSZ0D901
(delayed)
The terminal designations of the single-pole auxiliary contacts
are comprised of sequence numbers (location identifiers) on
the contactor (1...4) and of function numbers on the auxiliary
contacts (.1/.2, .3/.4 or .5/.6, .7/.8).
The terminal designation of these individual auxiliary contacts
corresponds to EN 50005 and EN 50012.
Page
16
LSD0 TO LSDG CONTACTORS, 4-POLE AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCKS
W SI ZES 0 TO 12
A maximum of 4 auxiliary contacts can be attached; the auxiliary contact blocks used can be of any version. For reasons of
symmetry, when two 2-pole laterally mountable auxiliary contact blocks are used, one block must be attached on the right
and one on the left. More auxiliary contacts are permissible with size 2 under certain conditions (please ask). For 4-pole
contactors see LSR...
W SI ZES 0 AND 2
A maximum of 8 auxiliary contacts can be attached; please note the following:
Of these 8 auxiliary contacts, there must be no more than 4 NC contacts
Ensure the symmetry of laterally mounted auxiliary contact blocks
For 4-pole contactors see LSR...
W SI ZES 3 TO 12
contactors
size 0 to 12
LSZ0D131,122,113 LSZ0D140F.,122F.,131F.,104F.
The contactors themselves have no integrated auxiliary
conducting path.
The auxiliary contact variants are uniform for the
contactors of size 0 to 12.
One 4-pole or up to four single-pole auxiliary contact blocks
(screw or Cage Clamp terminals) can be snapped on. When
the contactors are switched on, the NC contacts are opened
first and then the NO contacts are closed.
If the installation space is limited in depth, 2-pole auxiliary
contact blocks (screw or Cage Clamp terminals) can be
attached laterally for use on the left or on the right (LSZ0D711,
LSZ3D811).
The auxiliary contact blocks attached to the front can be dis-
assembled with the help of a centrally arranged release lever;
the laterally attached auxiliary contact blocks are easy to
remove by pressing on the checkered surfaces.
The laterally attachable auxiliary contact blocks according to
EN 50012 can be used only when no 4-pole auxiliary contact
blocks are snapped onto the front. If single-pole auxiliary
contact blocks are used in addition, the location identifiers on
the contactor must be noted.
Page
17
W CONTACT RELI ABI LI TY
High contact stability at low voltages and currents, suitable for solid-state circuits with currents 1 mA at a voltage of 17 V.
W SURGE SUPPRESSI ON
RC elements, varistors, diodes or diode assemblies (combination of a diode and a Zener diode) can be plugged onto all
auxiliary contactors from the front for damping opening surges in the coil. The plug-in direction is determined by a coding
device.
Note:
The OFF-delay times of the NO contacts and the ON-delay times of the NC contacts increase if the contactor coils are damped
against voltage peaks (noise suppression diode 6 to 10 times; diode assemblies 2 to 6 times, varistor +2 to 5 ms).
W AUXI LI ARY CONTACT BLOCKS
The LSHD auxiliary contactors can be expanded by up to four contacts by the addition of mountable auxiliary contact blocks.
The auxiliary contact block can easily be snapped onto the front of the contactors. The auxiliary contact block has a centrally
positioned release lever for disassembly. All auxiliary contactors with 4 contacts according to EN 50011 can be extended with
auxiliary contact blocks to obtain auxiliary contactors with 5 or 8 contacts in accordance with EN 50005.
W LSHD AUXI LI ARY CONTACTORS GENERAL I NFORMATI ONS
Aux. contact blocks
EN 50 005,
4 or 1 contacts
Aux. contactors,
EN 50 011, 4 contacts
LSZDH540,531,522
LSZD0501,510
4NO; 3NO + 1NC;
2NO + 2NC
Page
18
DESCRI PTI ON COI L VOLTAGE FREQU/REMARK ORDER NO.
SIZE 00 TYPE LSDD
Contactor AC3:3KW/400V, 1NO AC24V 50HZ LSDD0710
Contactor AC3:3KW/400V, 1NC* AC24V 50HZ LSDD0720
Contactor AC3:3KW/400V, 1NO AC230V 50/60HZ LSDD0713
Contactor AC3:3KW/400V, 1NC* AC230V 50/60HZ LSDD0723
Contactor AC3:3KW/400V, 1NO DC24V LSDD0715
Contactor AC3:3KW/400V, 1NC* DC24V LSDD0725
Contactor AC3:4KW/400V, 1NO AC230V 50/60HZ LSDD0913
Contactor AC3:4KW/400V, 1NC* AC230V 50/60HZ LSDD0923
Contactor AC3:4KW/400V, 1NO DC24V LSDD0915
Contactor AC3:4KW/400V, 1NC* DC24V LSDD0925
Contactor AC3:5,5KW/400V, 1NO AC24V 50HZ LSDD1210
Contactor AC3:5,5KW/400V, 1NC* AC24V 50HZ LSDD1220
Contactor AC3:5,5KW/400V, 1NO AC110V 50HZ LSDD1212
Contactor AC3:5,5KW/400V, 1NC* AC110V 50HZ LSDD1222
Contactor AC3:5,5KW/400V, 1NO AC230V 50/60HZ LSDD1213
Contactor AC3:5,5KW/400V, 1NC* AC230V 50/60HZ LSDD1223
Contactor AC3:5,5KW/400V, 1NO DC24V LSDD1215
Contactor AC3:5,5KW/400V, 1NC* DC24V LSDD1225
SIZE 00 TYPE LSSD FOR PLC
Contactor AC3:3KW/400V, 1NO DC17-30V no further aux. contacts LSSD071G
Contactor AC3:3KW/400V, 1NC DC17-30V no further aux. contacts LSSD072G
Contactor AC3:4KW/400V, 1NO DC17-30V no further aux. contacts LSSD091G
Contactor AC3:4KW/400V, 1NC DC17-30V no further aux. contacts LSSD092G
Contactor AC3:5,5KW/400V, 1NO DC17-30V no further aux. contacts LSSD121G
Contactor AC3:5,5KW/400V, 1NC DC17-30V no further aux. contacts LSSD122G
* Only auxiliary contact block type LSZDH5.. and LSZD05.. possible
LSDD.... LSSD....-PLC
W LSD CONTACTORS FOR SWI TCHI NG MOTORS AC3 3POLE, SI ZE 00
W SCHRACK-I NFO
Auxiliary contact block types LSZD.... can be snapped on contac-
tors LSDD.... Contactors for PLC cannot be extended by further
auxiliary contacts. Suitable surge supressor types LSZD0001 to
LSZD0004.
Page
19
SIZE 0 TYPE LSD0
Contactor AC3:4KW/400V AC24V 50HZ LSD00930
Contactor AC3:4KW/400V DC24V LSD00935
Contactor AC3:4KW/400V AC230V 50/60HZ LSD00933
Contactor AC3:5,5KW/400V AC24V 50HZ LSD01230
Contactor AC3:5,5KW/400V DC24V LSD01235
Contactor AC3:5,5KW/400V AC230V 50/60HZ LSD01233
SIZE 0 TYPE LSS0 FOR PLC
Contactor AC3,5,5KW/400V* DC17-30V LSS0123H
Contactor AC3:7,5KW/400V* DC17-30V LSS0173H
Contactor AC3:11KW/400V* DC17-30V LSS0253H
* Max. 2 pcs. of auxiliary contact type LSZ0D0.. or LSZ0D9.. possible
LSD0....
WLSD CONTACTORS FOR SWI TCHI NG MOTORS AC3 3POLE, SI ZE 0
W SCHRACK-I NFO
Auxiliary contact and contact block types LSZ0D... can be snapped on. Suitable surge
supressor types LSZD0005, LSZD0006 and LSZ00001 to LSZ00003.
Page
20
LSD3....
SIZE 3 TYPE LSD3
Contactor AC3:30KW/400V, 2NO+2NC AC230V 50HZ LSD36553
Contactor AC3:45KW/400V, 2NO+2NC AC230V 50/60HZ LSD39553
LSD2....
SIZE 2 TYPE LSD2
W SCHRACK-I NFO
Auxiliary contact and contact block types LSZ0D... can be snapped on. Suitable surge
supressor types LSZ20001 for AC 230V.
W SCHRACK-I NFO
Auxiliary contact and contact block types LSZ0D... and LSZ3D... can be snapped on. Suitable
surge supressor types LSZ20001 for AC 230V.
Page
21
LSD6115F LSD6155F LSDE305F
WLSD CONTACTORS FOR SWI TCHI NG MOTORS AC3 3POLE, SI ZE 6/10/12
SIZE 6 TYPE LSD6
Contactor AC3:55KW/400V, 2NO+2NC (with box terminals) UC220-240V 40-60HZ LSD6115F
Contactor AC3:75KW/400V, 2NO+2NC UC220-240V 40-60HZ LSD6155F
Contactor AC3:90KW/400V, 2NO+2NC UC220-240V 40-60HZ LSD6195F
SIZE 10 TYPE LSDE
Contactor AC3:110KW/400V, 2NO+2NC UC220-240V 40-60HZ LSDE225F
SIZE 12 TYPE LSDG
Contactor AC3:200KW/400V, 2NO+2NC UC220-240V 40-60HZ LSDG415F
Contactor AC3:250KW/400V, 2NO+2NC UC220-240V 40-60HZ LSDG515F
LSDH....
WLSD VACUUM CONTACTORS AC3 3POLE, SI ZE 14
SIZE 14 TYPE LSDH
Contactor AC3:335KW/400V, 4NO+4NC UC200-240V 50HZ LSDH63G3
W SCHRACK-I NFO
LSD6115F fitted with box terminals
up to 70 mm
2
, all other types
without box terminals. Those box
terminals are deliverable on request.
Auxiliary contact and contact block
types LSZ0D... and LSZ3D... can be
snapped on. Suitable surge supres-
sor type LSZ60001.
W SCHRACK-I NFO
Contactors cannot be extended by further auxiliary contacts. Surge supressor by means of a
varistor circuit is included in the scope of supply.
Page
22
LSWD....
WLSW REVERSI NG CONTACTOR ASSEMBLI ES AC3, SI ZE 00/0/2/3
SIZE 00 TYPE LSWD
Reversing Assembly AC3, 3kW/400V 230V 50/60HZ LSWD0733
Reversing Assembly AC3, 4kW/400V 230V 50/60HZ LSWD0933
Reversing Assembly AC3, 5,5kW/400V 230V 50/60HZ LSWD1233
SIZE 0 TYPE LSW0
Reversing Assembly AC3, 5,5kW/400V 230V 50/60HZ LSW01233
Reversing Assembly AC3, 11kW/400V 230V 50/60HZ LSW02533
SIZE 2 TYPE LSW2
SIZE 3 TYPE LSW3
LSY03233
WLSY WYE-DELTA CONTACTOR ASSEMBLI ES AC3, SI ZE 00/0/2
SIZE 00 TYPE LSYD
WYE-Delta Assembly AC3, up to 7,5kW/400V 230V 50/60HZ LSYD1733
SIZE 0 TYPE LSY0
WYE-Delta Assembly AC3, up to 15kW/400V 230V 50/60HZ LSY03233
SIZE 2 TYPE LSY2
WYE-Delta Assembly AC3, up to 22kW/400V 230V 50/60HZ LSY25033
LSW0....
W SCHRACK-I NFO
For higher ratings or customer assembly see components listed
on pages onwards.
W SCHRACK-I NFO
For higher ratings or customer assembly see components listed on pages onwards.
Page
23
SIZE 00 TYPE LSRD
Contactor AC1:18A/690V AC24V 50/60HZ LSRD1840
Contactor AC1:18A/690V DC24V LSRD1845
Contactor AC1:22A/690V DC24V LSRD2245
SIZE 0 TYPE LSR0
Contactor AC1:35A/690V AC24V 50HZ LSR03540
Contactor AC1:35A/690V DC24V LSR03545
Contactor AC1:35A/690V AC230V 50/60HZ LSR03543
LSR0....
WLSR CONTACTORS FOR SWI TCHI NG AC1 LOADS 4POLE, SI ZE 00/0
SIZE 2 TYPE LSR2
SIZE 3 TYPE LSR3
LSR3....
WLSR CONTACTORS FOR SWI TCHI NG AC1 LOADS 4POLE, SI ZE 2/3
W SCHRACK-I NFO
Auxiliary contacts, contact blocks and surge supressors are identical to those for contactors
LSD of same size.
W SCHRACK-I NFO
Auxiliary contacts, contact blocks and surge supressors are identical to those for contactors
LSD of same size.
Page
24
CAPACITOR RATING 400V/INCLUDED AUXILIARY CONTACTS COI L VOLTAGE FREQU/REMARK ORDER NO.
SIZE 00
12,5 kVAr/1 NO + 1 NC AC230V 50/50Hz LSKD17B3
SIZE 0
25 kVAr/1 NO AC230V 50/50Hz LSK03213
SIZE 3
50 kVAr/1 NO AC230V 50/50Hz LSK36213
LSKD17B3
W LSK CAPACITOR SWI TCHI NG CONTACTORS
W SCHRACK-I NFO
Technical data according to IEC 60 947; EN 60 947 (VDE 0660)
The contactors are suitable for use in any climate
They are finger-safe according to EN 50274
W TECHNI CAL DATA
The LSK capacitor contactors are special version of the size 00-3 ALEA contactors. The capacitors are precharged by means of
the mounted leading NO contacts and resistors; only then do the main contacts close. This prevents disturbances in the net-
work and welding of the contactors. Only discharged capacitors are permitted to be switched on with capacitor contactors.
The auxiliary contact block which is snapped onto the capacitor contactor contains the three leading NO contacts and in the
case of size 00 one standard NC contact and in the case of size 0 and size 3 one standard NO contact, which is unassigned.
Size S00 also contains another unassigned NO contact in the basic unit. In addition, a 2-pole auxiliary contact block can be
mounted laterally on the LSK3 capacitor contactors (1 NO + 1 NC versions) type LSZ0D711. The fitting of auxiliary contacts for
LSKD and LSK0 is not expandable.
12,5 kVAr/1 NO AC220-240V 50Hz LA3K1813
12,5 kVAr/1 NC AC220-240V 50Hz LA3K1823
20 kVAr/ 0 AC220-240V 50Hz LA3K2433
25 kVAr/ 0 AC220-240V 50Hz LA3K3233
33,3 kVAr/ 0 AC220-240V 50Hz LA3K5033
50 kVAr/ 0 AC220-240V 50Hz LA3K6233
60 kVAr/ 0 AC220-240V 50Hz LA3K7433
75 kVAr/ 0 AC220-240V 50Hz LA3K9033
90 kVAr/ 0 AC220-240V 50Hz LA3K1133
LA3K181
WLA3K CAPACI TOR SWI TCHI NG CONTACTORS
W SCHRACK-I NFO
For use in detuned or non-detuned capacitor units.
Technical data according to EN 60 947-4-1; EN 60 947-5-1; VDE 0660
W TECHNI CAL DATA
Specification: The capacitor switching contactors K3-..K are suitable for switching low-inductive and lowloss capacitors in
capacitor banks (IEC70 & 831, VDE 0560) with and without reactors. Capacitor switching contactors are fitted with early
make contacts and damping resistors to reduce the value of the make current to <70 x Ie.
Operating conditions: Capacitor switching contactors are protected against contact welding for a prospective make
current of 200 x Ie. Fuse rating approx. 1,6 to 2,5 x Ie, type gL/gG.
Page
25
W SCHRACK-I NFO
Auxiliary contact types LSZD05.. and LSZDH5.. can be snapped
on. Contactors for PLC cannot be extended by further auxiliary
contacts. Suitable surge supressor types LSZD0001 to LSZD0004.
AUXILIARY CONTACTS FOR CAPACITY SWITCHING CONTACTORS LA3K
AUXILIARY CONTACT for LA3K18, 1NC, snap on front 6A/230VAC DIN EN 5005/50012 LA190135
AUXILIARY CONTACT for LA3K24...11, 1NO+1NC, side mounted 3A/230VAC DIN EN 5005 LA190134
AUXILIARY CONTACT for LA3K., 1NO, snap on front 3A/230VAC DIN EN 5005/50012 LA190100
AUXILIARY CONTACT for LA3K., 1NC, snap on front 3A/230VAC DIN EN 5005/50012 LA190101
WAUXI LI ARY CONTACTS FOR CAPACI TOR SWI TCHI NG CONTACTORS LA3K
SIZE 00 TYPE LSHD
Contactor AC15: 6A/230V, 4NO AC24V 50HZ LSHD0670
Contactor AC15: 6A/230V, 4NO DC24V LSHD0675
Contactor AC15: 6A/230V, 4NO AC230V 50/60HZ LSHD0673
Contactor AC15: 6A/230V, 3NO+1NC AC24V 50HZ LSHD0680
Contactor AC15: 6A/230V, 3NO+1NC DC24V LSHD0685
Contactor AC15: 6A/230V, 3NO+1NC AC230V 50/60HZ LSHD0683
Contactor AC15: 6A/230V, 2NO+2NC AC24V 50HZ LSHD0690
Contactor AC15: 6A/230V, 2NO+2NC DC24V LSHD0695
Contactor AC15: 6A/230V, 2NO+2NC AC230V 50/60HZ LSHD0693
SIZE 00 TYPE LSHD FOR PLC
Contactor, plug with RC, AC15: 6A/230V, 4NO DC17-30V no further aux. contacts LSHD067N
Contactor with diode assembly, AC15: 6A/230V, 4NO DC17-30V no further aux. contacts LSHD067G
Contactor*, AC15: 6A/230V, 3NO+1NC DC17-30V no further aux. contacts LSHD068N
Contactor with diode assembly, AC15: 6A/230V, 3NO+1NC DC17-30V no further aux. contacts LSHD068G
Contactor*, AC15: 6A/230V, 2NO+2NC DC17-30V no further aux. contacts LSHD069N
Contactor with diode assembly, AC15: 6A/230V, 2NO+2NC DC17-30V no further aux. contacts LSHD069G
* Varistors or surge supressor diodes can be plugged in
LSHD....
LA1901..
LSHD....-PLC
WLSHD AUXI LI ARY CONTACTORS AC15 4POLE, SI ZE 00
Page
26
DESCRI PTI ON FREQU/REMARK ORDER NO.
Auxiliary Contact Block for size 00, 1NO, cable entry from below DIN EN 50005 LSZD0510
Auxiliary Contact Block for size 00, 1NC, cable entry from below DIN EN 50005 LSZD0501
Auxiliary Contact Block for size 00, 1NC
1)
DIN EN 50012 LSZDD201
Auxiliary Contact Block for size 00, 1NO+2NC
1)
1)
1)
1)
Auxiliary contact blocks for use with contactors type LSDD.... or LSSD.... with one NO included, for contators type LSDD.... or LSSD.... with one NC included use auxiliary contact blocks type
LSZDH5.. (see item below)
LSZDD213 LSZD0510
W AUXI LI ARY CONTACTS AND CONTACT BLOCKS FOR LSDD OR LSSD, SI ZE 00
Auxiliary Contact Block for size 00, 1NO, cable entry from below DIN EN 50005 LSZD0510
Auxiliary Contact Block for size 00, 1NC, cable entry from below DIN EN 50005 LSZD0501
Auxiliary Contact Block for size 00, 4NO
2)
DIN EN 50005 LSZDH540
2)
2)
2)
Auxiliary contact blocks for use with contactors type LSDD.... or LSSD.... with one NC included, for contators type LSDD.... or LSSD.... with one NO included use auxiliary contact blocks type
LSZDD2.. (see item above)
LSZDH522 LSZD0510
W AUXILIARY CONTACTS AND CONTACT BLOCKS FOR LSDD, LSSD OR LSHD, SIZE 00
DESCRI PTI ON ORDER NO.
PARALLEL CONNECTOR
Parallel connector, 25mm
2
for size 00, 3pol. + terminal LSZDD003
2
for size 00, 4pol. + terminal LSZDD004
Parallel connector, star jumper for size 00, 3pol. (can be shortened by 1 pole) LSZDY002
FEED TERMINAL
Feed terminal, 6mm
2
for size 00, 3pol. + 3 terminals LSZDD001
LSZDY002 LSZDD003 LSZDD001
WPARALLEL CONNECTORS (STAR JUMPER) AND FEED TERMI NAL, SI ZE 00
Page
27
Wiring set for reversing contactor assemblies, size 00* LSZDW001
Wiring set for WYE-Delta contactor assemblies, size 00 LSZDY001
Connection clips for two contactors, size 00* LSZDW002
* Contains two connection clips and one mechanical interlock link
LSZDW002
W WIRING SETS*, MECHANICAL INTERLOCK AND CONNECTION CLIPS, SIZE 00
WYE-Delta timer, 20s (timedelay -20s) 24/240VAC 24 VDC 50/60Hz LSZD0101
WYE-Delta timer, 60s (timedelay -60s) 24/240VAC 24 VDC 50/60Hz LSZD0102
LSZD0102
W WYE-DELTA TI MERS
DESCRI PTI ON COI L VOLTAGE ORDER NO.
Connection link for contactor size 00 and
motor protection switch, size 00 AC-DC operated LSZDD005
Connection link for contactor size 00 and
motor protection switch, size 0 AC-DC operated LSZDD006
LSZDD005
W CONNECTION LINKS FOR CONTACTORS AND MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCHES,
SI ZE 00
W SCHRACK-I NFO
By using the interlock link, the overall width of the e.g. reversing assembly is not increased
(0 mm clearance between the contactors).
W SCHRACK-I NFO
Timers have a fixed dead intervall of 50 ms (between Wye- and Delta-state).
Page
28
Solder pin adapter for size 00 LSZDD002
LSZDD002
W SOLDER PI N ADAPTER, SI ZE 00
Varistor for size 00 AC24-48V; DC24-70V LSZD0001
Varistor for size 00 AC127-240V; DC150-250V LSZD0002
Surge supressor for size 00 AC127-240V; DC150-250V LSZD0003
Surge supressor diode for size 00 DC12-250V LSZD0004
LSZD0004
W SURGE SUPRESSORS (PLUG I N TYPE), SI ZE 00
Auxiliary Contact for size 0-12, 1NC DIN EN 50005/50012 LSZ0D001
Auxiliary Contact for size 0-12, 1NO DIN EN 50005/50012 LSZ0D010
Auxiliary Contact for size 0-12, 1NC-delayed DIN EN 50005/50012 LSZ0D901
Auxiliary Contact for size 0-12, 1NO-early make DIN EN 50005/50012 LSZ0D910
LSZ0D001 LSZ0D010
W AUXI LI ARY CONTACTS (SNAP ON FRONT), SI ZE 0-12
Page
29
Auxiliary Contact, sidemounted for size 0-12, 1NO+1NC, first position DIN EN 50012 LSZ0D711
Auxiliary Contact, sidemounted for size 3-12, 1NO+1NC, second position DIN EN 50012 LSZ3D811
LSZ0D711
W AUXI LI ARY CONTACT BLOCKS (SI DE MOUNTED), SI ZE 0-12
Auxiliary Contact Block for size 0-12, 1NO+3NC DIN EN 50012 LSZ0D113
Auxiliary Contact Block for size 0-12, 4NO DIN EN 50005 LSZ0D140F
Auxiliary Contact Block for size 0-12, 3NO+1NC DIN EN 50005 LSZ0D131F
Auxiliary Contact Block for size 0-12, 2NO+2NC DIN EN 50005 LSZ0D122F
Auxiliary Contact Block for size 0-12, 4NC DIN EN 50005 LSZ0D104F
LSZ0D122
W AUXI LI ARY CONTACT BLOCKS (SNAP ON FRONT), SI ZE 0-12
Mechanical interlock for contactors size 0-3 (including 2NC auxiliary contacts) LSZ0W002
Mechanical interlock for contactors size 6-12 LSZ6W001
LSZ0W002
W MECHANI CAL I NTERLOCKS, SI ZE 0-12
Page
30
Wiring set for reversing assemblies for size 0 LSZ0W001
Wiring set for reversing assemblies for size 2, including connection clips LSZ2W001
Wiring set for reversing assemblies for size 3, including connection clips LSZ3W001
Wiring set for reversing assemblies for size 6 LSZ6W002
Wiring set for reversing assemblies for size 10 LSZEW001
Wiring set for reversing assemblies for size 12 LSZGW001
W WI RI NG SETS FOR REVERSI NG CONTACTOR ASSEMBLI ES, SI ZE 0-12
Wiring set for YD-assemblies, size 0, including mech.interlock and connection clips LSZ0Y001
Wiring set for YD-assemblies, size 2-2-0 LSZ2Y004
Wiring set for YD-assemblies, size 2-2-2 LSZ2Y003
Mountingplate for YD-assemblies, size 2-2-0 LSZ2Y001
Mountingplate for YD-assemblies, size 2-2-2 LSZ2Y002
W WI RI NG SETS FOR YD-ASSEMBLI ES AND YD-ACCESSORI ES, SI ZE 0-3
Connection link for contactor size 0 and BES0 AC operating assemblies LSZ0D002
Connection link for contactor size 0 and BES0 DC operating assemblies LSZ0D004
LSZ0D002 LSZ2D004
W CONNECTION LINKS FOR CONTACTORS AND MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCHES,
SI ZE 0-3
Page
31
LSZ0Y002 LSZ6Y003
Surge supressor, diode assembly for size 0, top mounted DC24V LSZD0005
Surge supressor, diode assembly for size 0, bottom mounted DC24V (marked with + and ) LSZD0006
Varistor for size 0 AC24-48V; DC24-70V LSZ00001
Varistor for size 0 AC127-240V; DC150-250V LSZ00002
Surge supressor, RC for size 0 AC127-240V; DC150-250V LSZ00003
Surge supressor, RC for size 2-3 AC127-240V; DC150-250V LSZ20001
Surge supressor, RC for size 6-12 AC127-240V; DC150-250V LSZ60001
LSZ00002
W SURGE SUPRESSORS, SI ZE 0-12
PARALLEL CONNECTOR
2
for size 0, 3pol. + terminal LSZ0D003
Parallel connector, star jumper for size 0, 3pol.* LSZ0Y002
Parallel connector; 95mm
2
for size 2, 3pol.+terminal LSZ2D003
Parallel connector, star jumper for size 6, 3pol. (with bore diameter 10,5mm) LSZ6Y003
Parallel connector, star jumper for size 10, 12, 3pol. (with bore diameter 12,5mm) LSZEY003
FEED TERMINALS
Feed terminal, 25mm
2
for size 0, 3pol. + 3 terminals BEZ00116
Feed terminal, 50mm
2
for size 2, 3pol. + 3 terminals BEZ00216
Feed terminal, 95mm
2
for size 3, 1pol. + terminal LSZ3D001
LSZ2D003
WPARALLEL CONNECTORS (STAR JUMPER) AND FEED TERMI NALS, SI ZE 0-12
W SCHRACK-I NFO
Star jumper size 0-3 can be reduced by 1 pole*. For touch-protection of parallel connectors size 6 use LSZ6D002, for size
10 and size 12 use LSZED002.
W SCHRACK-I NFO
Up to size 3, these devices can be snapped in either at the top (assemblies with overload
relays) or at the bottom (assemblies with MPS) of the contactor. Sizes 6-12: snapping in is
only possible at the top of contactor.
BEZ00116
Page
32
Connection clip, for contactors 3/4pole, size 0 to 0 (contactors without interlock) LSZ0W003
Connection clip, for contactors 3/4pole, size 0 to 0 (interlocked contactors - clearance 10 mm) LSZ0W004
Connection clip, for contactors 4pole, size 2 to 2 (interlocked contactors - clearance 10 mm) LSZ2W002
Connection clip, for contactors 4pole, size 3 to 3 (interlocked contactors - clearance 10 mm) LSZ3W002
Connection clip, for contactors 3pole, size 2/3/6 to 2/3/6 (interlocked contactors - clearance 10 mm) LSZ2W003
Connection clip, for contactors 3/4pole, size 2/3 (contactors without interlock) LSZ2D001
LSZ2W003 LSZ2D001
W CONNECTION CLIPS FOR CONTACTORS, SI ZE 0-3
Mechanical latching block for size 0-2, remains "ON" if voltage fails 24VACDC LSZ00113
LSZ00113
W MECHANI CAL LATCHI NG BLOCK, SI ZE 0-2
Terminal Cover for size 2* (additional cover, to be fitted on the box terminals) LSZ2D002
Terminal Cover for size 3* (additional cover, to be fitted on the box terminals) LSZ3D002
Terminal Cover for size 6* for contactors with cable lug or busbar connection (38 mm) LSZ6D001
Terminal Cover - short version for size 6* for contactor assemblies (100 mm) LSZ6D002
Terminal Cover for size 10*/12* for contactors with cable lug or busbar connection (120 mm) LSZED001
Terminal Cover - short version for size 10*/12* for contactors with cable lug or busbar connection (42 mm) LSZED002
Terminal Cover for size 14* for contactors with cable lug or busbar connection LSZHD001
* Order 2 pcs. for one complete contactor, order 1 pc. just for one side (up side or bottom side) of contactor
LSZ6D001 LSZ6D002
W TERMI NAL COVERS, SI ZE 2-14
W SCHRACK-I NFO
2 pieces of clips are necessary for 1 contactor-assembly
(2 contactors).
W SCHRACK-I NFO
Contactors fitted with this latching block will remain ON in case of control-voltage failure
until the latching block is resetted by a 24 VAC DC impuls.
W SCHRACK-I NFO
Additional covers for contactors with box terminals size 6-12
on request.
Contactor Type LSS, LSD
Size 00 ... 12
Rated data of the auxiliary contacts
Acc. to IEC 60947-5-1/EN 60947-5-1 (VDE 0660 Part 200)
The data apply to integrated auxiliary contacts and contacts in the auxiliary
contact blocks for contactor sizes S00 to S12
1)
Rated insulation voltage U
i
(degree of pollution 3) V 690
For LSZ..... laterally mountable auxiliary contact blocks V max. 500
Continuous thermal current I
th
= A 10
Rated operational current I
e
/AC-12
AC load
e
/AC-15/AC-14
for rated operational voltage U
e
24 V A 6
110 V A 6
125 V A 6
220 V A 6
230 V A 6
380 V A 3
400 V A 3
500 V A 2
660 V
2)
A 1
690 V
2)
A 1
DC load
e
/DC-12
e
24 V A 10
60 V A 6
110 V A 3
125 V A 2
220 V A 1
440 V A 0.3
600 V
2)
A 0.15
e
/DC-13
e
24 V A 10
1)
60 V A 2
110 V A 1
125 V A 0.9
220 V A 0.3
440 V A 0,14
600 V
2)
A 0,1
Contact reliability at 17 V, 1 mA Frequency of contact faults < 10
-8
i.e. <1 fault per 100 million operating cycles
acc. to EN 60947-5-4
Endurance of the auxiliary contacts
It is assumed that the operating mechanisms are switched randomly, i.e.
not synchronized with the phase angle of the supply system.
The contact endurance is mainly dependent on the breaking current.
The characteristic curves apply to
Integrated auxiliary contacts for LSS/LSD
LSZ..... auxiliary contact blocks for contactor sizes S00 to S12.
1)
Attachable auxiliary contact blocks for size S00 and laterally mountable
auxiliary contact blocks for S0 to S12: 6 A.
2)
Up to 500 V switching capacity for laterally mountable auxiliary contact blocks.
TECHNI CAL SPECI FI CATI ONS
Legend:
I
a
= Breaking current
I
e
= Rated operational current
Page
33
W LSS, LSD CONTACTORS, 3-POLE, 3 ... 250 kW
ALEA controls are climate-proof and are suitable and tested for use worldwide.
If the devices are used in ambient conditions which deviate from common industrial conditions (EN60721-3-3 Stationary
Use, Weather-Protected), the manufacturer must be consulted about possible restrictions with regard to the reliability and
endurance of the device and possible protective measures.
Endurance of the main contacts
The characteristic curves show the contact endurance of the contactors when switching
resistive and inductive AC loads (AC-1/AC-3) depending on the breaking current and
rated operational voltage. It is assumed that the operating mechanisms are switched
randomly, i.e. not synchronized with the phase angle of the supply system.
The rated operational current Ie complies with utilization category AC-4 (breaking six times
the rated operational current) and is intended for a contact endurance of at least 200 000
operating cycles.
If a shorter endurance is sufficient, the rated operational current I
e
/AC-4 can be increased.
If the contacts are used for mixed operation, i.e. normal switching (breaking the rated
operational current according to utilization category AC-3) in combination with intermittent
inching (breaking several times the rated operational current according to utilization
category AC-4), the contact endurance can be calculated approximately from the following
equation:
Characters in the equation:
X Contact endurance for mixed operation in operating cycles
A Contact endurance for normal operation (I
a
= I
e
) in operating cycles
B Contact endurance for inching (I
a
= multiple of I
e
) in operating cycles
C Inching operations as a percentage of total switching operations
Diagram legend:
P
N
= Rated power for squirrel-cage motors at 400 V
I
a
= Breaking current
I
e
Page
34
Size 00
Size 0
Contactor type LSSD07,
LSDD07
3 kW
Contactor type LSSD09, LSSD12,
LSDD09, LSDD12
4 kW 5,5 kW
Contactor type
LSD009
LSS012
LSD012
LSS017
LSD017
LSS025
LSD025
Page
35
Endurance of the main contacts
Size 2
Diagram legend:
P
N
I
a
= Breaking current
I
e
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
The contactors with solid-state operating mechanism comply with the requirements for operation in industrial installations.
Interference immunity
- Burst (IEC 61000-4-4): 4 kW
- Surge (IEC 61000-4-5): 4 kW
- Electrostatic discharge, ESD (IEC 61000-4-2): 8/15 kW
- Electromagnetic field (IEC 61000-4-3): 10 V/m
Emitted interference
- Limited value class A according to EN 55011
Note: In connection with converters, the control cables should be installed seperatly from the load cables to the converter.
W LSD CONTACTORS, 3-POLE, 3 ... 250 kW
Size 3
Sizes 612
Contactor type LSD232 LSD240 LSD250
Contactor LSD611
type
LSD619 LSD615 LSDE22 LSDE26 LSDE30 LSDG41 LSDG51
Contactor type LSD365 LSD380 LSD395
Contactor Type LSSD, LSDD
Size 00
General data
Permissible mounting position AC and DC operation
The contactors are designed for
operation on a vertical mounting surface.
Upright mounting position: AC operation
Special version required.
DC operation Standard version
Mechanical endurance Basic unit Operating 30 million
cycles
Basic unit with snap-on auxiliary 10 million
contact block
Solid-state compatible auxiliary 5 million
contact block
Electrical endurance
1)
i
Rated impulse withstand voltage U
imp
kV 6
Safe isolation between the coil and the main contacts V 400
acc. to EN 60947-1, Appendix N
Ambient temperature During operation C -25 ... +60
During storage C -55 ... +80
Degree of protection acc. to EN 60947-1, Appendix C IP20, coil assembly IP40
Touch protection acc. to EN 50274 Finger-safe
Shock resistance rectangular pulse AC operation g/ms 7/5 and 4.2/10
DC operation g/ms 7/5 and 4.2/10
Shock resistance sine pulse AC operation g/ms 9.8/5 and 5.9/10
DC operation g/ms 9.8/5 and 5.9/10
Conductor cross-sections
2)
Short-circuit protection for contactors without overload relays
For short-circuit protection for contactors with overload relays see
Protection Equipment: Overload Relays
For short-circuit protection for fuseless load feeders see Load Feeders,
Motor Starters and Soft Starters: -> 3RA Fuseless Load Feeders.
Main circuit
Fuse links gL/gG LV HRC, DIAZED, NEOZED
- Acc. to IEC 60947-4-1/ Type of coordination "1" A 35
EN 60947-4-1 Type of coordination "2" A 20
Weld-free
3)
A 10
Miniature circuit breakers (up to 230 V) with C characteristic A 10
Short-circuit current 1 kA, type of coordination "1"
Auxiliary circuit
Fuse links gL/gG A 10
DIAZED, NEOZED (weld-free protection I
k
1 kA)
Miniature circuit breakers up to 230 V with C characteristic A 6
Short-circuit current I
k
< 400 A
1)
See first two pages of chapter Technical Specifications Endurance of the main contacts.
2)
See Conductor cross-sections pages onward.
3)
Test conditions according to IEC 60947-4-1.
Page
36
22, 5 22, 5 360
Contactor Type LSSD, LSDD
Size 00
Control
Magnetic coil operating range
AC operation 50 Hz 0.8 ... 1.1 x U
s
60 Hz 0.85 ... 1.1 x U
s
DC operation up to 50 C 0.8 ... 1.1 x U
s
up to 60 C 0.85 ... 1.1 x U
s
Power consumption of the magnetic coils coils (when coil is cold and 1.0 x U
s
)
AC operation, 50/60 Hz
Standard version Closing VA 27/24.3
P.f. 0.8/0.75
Closed VA 4.4/3.4
P.f. 0.27/0.27
AC operation, 50 Hz, USA/Canada Closing VA 26.4
P.f. for closing 0.81
Closed VA 4.7
P.f. for closed 0.26
AC operation, 60 Hz, USA/Canada Closing VA 31.7
P.f. for closing 0.77
Closed VA 5.1
P.f. for closed 0.27
DC operation Closing = Closed W 3.3
Permissible residual current of the electronics (with 0 signal)
AC operation < 3 mA x (230 V/U
s
)
DC operation < 10 mA x (24 V/U
s
)
Operating times
1)
Total break time = Opening delay + Arcing time
AC operation Closing delay ms 8 ... 35
at 0.8 ... 1.1 x U
s
Opening delay ms 4 ... 30
DC operation Closing delay ms 25 ... 100
at 0.85 ... 1.1 x U
s
Arcing time ms 10 ... 15
Operating times for 1.0 x U
s
1)
1)
The OFF-delay of the NO contact and the ON-delay of the NC contact are increased if the contactor
coils are attenuated against voltage peaks (noise suppression diode 6 to 10 times; diode assemblies 2 to 6 times,varistor +2 to 5 ms).
Page
37
1)
Industrial furnaces and electric heaters with resistance heating, etc. (increased power consumption on heating up has been taken into account).
2)
According to IEC 60947-4-1. For rated values for various start-up conditions see Protection Equipment: Thermal Overload Relays.
Contactor Type LSSD07, LSDD07 LSSD09, LSDD09 LSSD12, LSDD12
Size 00 00 00
Main circuit
AC capacity
Utilization category AC-1
Switching resistive loads
e
at 40 C up to 690 V A 18 22 22
at 60 C up to 690 V A 16 20 20
Rated power for AC loads
1)
230 V kW 6.3 7.5 7.5
P.f.= 0.95 (at 60 C) 400 V kW 11 13 13
500 V kW 13.8 17 17
690 V kW 19 22 22
Minimum conductor cross-section at 40 C mm 2.5 2.5 2.5
for loads with I
e
at 60 C mm 2.5 2.5 2.5
Utilization categories AC-2 and AC-3
Rated operational currents I
e
up to 400 V A 7 9 12
440 V A 7 9 11
500 V A 5 6.5 9
690 V A 4 5.2 6.3
Rated power for slipring or squirrelcage at 230 V kW 2.2 3 3
motors at 50 and 60 Hz 400 V kW 3 4 5.5
500 V kW 3.5 4.5 5.5
690 V kW 4 5.5 5.5
Thermal load capacity 10 s current
2)
A 56 72 96
Page
38
Size 00 00 00
Main circuit
AC capacity
Power loss per conducting path at I
e
/AC-3 W 0.42 0.7 1.24
Utilization category AC-4 (for I
a
= 6 x I
e
)
e
up to 400 V A 6.5 8.5 8.5
Rated power for squirrel-cage motors up to 400 V kW 3 4 4
with 50 Hz and 60 Hz
The following applies to a contact endurance of about 200000
operating cycles:
- rated operational currents I
e
up to 400 V A 2.6 4.1 4.1
690 V A 1.8 3.3 3.3
- rated power for squirrel-cage at 230 V kW 0.67 1.1 1.1
motors 400 V kW 1.15 2 2
with 50 Hz and 60 Hz 500 V kW 1.45 2 2
690 V kW 1.15 2.5 2.5
Utilization category AC-5a
Switching gas discharge lamps, inductive ballast
Per main current path at 230 V
Uncorrected,
rated power per lamp/rated operational current per lamp L 18 W/0.37 A Units 54 59 59
L 36 W/0.43 A Units 46 51 51
L 58 W/0.67 A Units 29 32 32
L 80 W/0.79 A Units 25 27 27
DUO switching (two-lamp) L 18 W/0.22 A Units 90 ( 2 x 90 lamps) 100 ( 2 x 100 lamps) 100 ( 2 x 100 lamps)
L 36 W/0.42 A Units 47 ( 2 x 47 lamps) 52 ( 2 x 52 lamps) 52 ( 2 x 52 lamps)
Switching gas discharge lamps with correction
Shunt compensation with inductive ballast,
rated power per lamp/capacitance/
rated operational current per lamp L 18 W/4.5 F/0.11 A Units 17 22 22
L 36 W/4.5 F/0.21 A Units 16 22 22
L 58 W/7.0 F/0.32 A Units 10 14 14
L 80 W/7.0 F/0.49 A Units 6 9 9
With solid-state ballast
1)
single lamp
L 18 W/6.8 F/0.10 A Units 49 63 63
L 36 W/6.8 F/0.18 A Units 27 35 35
L 58 W/10 F/0.29 A Units 16 23 23
L 80 W/10 F/0.43 A Units 11 14 14
1)
two-lamp
L 18 W/10 F/0.18 A Units 27 ( 2 x 27 lamps) 35 ( 2 x 35 lamps) 35 ( 2 x 35 lamps)
Utilization category AC-5b, switching incandescent lamps kW 1.3 1.7 1.7
Per main current path at 230/220 V
switching AC transformers
e
For inrush current n = 20 up to 400 V A 3.6 5.1 7.2
Rated power P
For inrush current n = 20 at 230 V kVA 1.4 2 2.9
400 V kVA 2.5 3.5 5
500 V kVA 3.3 4.6 6.2
690 V kVA 4.3 6 8.6
For inrush current n = 30 at 230 V kVA 1 1.3 2
400 V kVA 1.6 2.3 3.5
500 V kVA 2.2 3.1 4.6
690 V kVA 2.9 4 6
For deviating inrush current factors x, the power must be recalculated as follows:
P
x
= P
n 30
30/x
1)
Depending on the electronic ballast used, higher lamp numbers are also possible.
Page
39
Size 00 00 00
Main circuit
DC capacity
Utilization category DC-1
Switching resistive loads (L/R 1 ms)
Rated operational current Ie (at 60 C)
1 conducting path up to 24 V A 15 20
60 V A 15 20
110 V A 1.5 2.1
220 V A 0.6 0.8
440 V A 0.42 0.6
600 V A 0.42 0.6
2 conducting paths in series up to 24 V A 15 20
60 V A 15 20
110 V A 8.4 12
220 V A 1.2 1.6
440 V A 1.6 0.8
600 V A 0.5 0.7
60 V A 15 20
110 V A 15 20
220 V A 15 20
440 V A 0.9 1.3
600 V A 0.7 1
Utilization category DC-3 and DC-5
Shunt-wound and series-wound motors (L/R 15 ms)
60 V A 0.35 0.5
110 V A 0.1 0.15
220 V A
440 V A
600 V A
60 V A 3.5 5
110 V A 0.25 0.35
220 V A
440 V A
600 V A
60 V A 15 20
110 V A 15 20
220 V A 1.2 1.5
440 V A 0.14 0.2
600 V A 0.14 0.2
Switching frequency
Switching frequency z in operating cycles/hour
Contactors without overload relay No-load switching frequency AC h
-1
10000
No-load switching frequency DC h
-1
10000
Dependence of the switching Rated operation
frequency z on the operational current AC-1 (AC/DC) h
-1
1000
I and operational voltage U: AC-2 (AC/DC) h
-1
750
z = z
.
(I
e
/I )
.
(400 V/U)
1.5 .
1/h AC-3 (AC/DC) h
-1
750
AC-4 (AC/DC) h
-1
250
Contactors with overload relays (mean value) h
-1
15
Screw terminals Main and auxiliary conductors: Screw terminals
(1 or 2 conductors can be connected) Solid mm 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)
1)
; 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)
1)
acc. to IEC 60947; max. 2 x (1 ... 4)
For standard screwdriver size 2 and Finely stranded with end sleeve mm 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)
1)
; 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)
1)
Pozidriv 2 Solid or stranded, AWG 2 x (20 ... 16)
1)
; 2 x (18 ... 14)
1)
; 1 x 12
AWG cables
Terminal screw M3
- tightening torque Nm 0.8 ... 1.2 (7 ... 10.3 lb.in)
Cage Clamp terminals (on request) Main and auxiliary conductors; Cage Clamp terminals
(1 or 2 conductors can be connected) coil connections:
Solid mm 2 x (0.25 ... 2.5)
Finely stranded with end sleeve mm 2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)
Finely stranded without end sleeve mm 2 x (0.25 ... 2.5)
AWG cables, AWG 2 x (24 ... 14)
solid or stranded
1)
If two different conductor cross-sections are connected to one clamping point, both cross-sections must lie in the range specified. If identical cross-sections are used, this restriction does not
apply.
Page
40
Contactor Type LSS012 LSS017 LSS025
LSD009 LSD012 LSD017 LSD025
Size 0 0 0 0
General data
Permissible mounting position
The contactors are designed for AC and DC operation
operation on a vertical mounting
surface.
Standard version
DC operation Special version required
Mechanical endurance Basic unit Operating 10 million
cycles
Basic unit with snap-on 10 million
auxiliary contact block
1)
i
imp
kV 6
(acc. to EN 60947-1, Appendix N)
Mirror contacts
A mirror contact is an auxiliary NC LSD0...., LSS0.... Yes, acc. to EN 60947-4-1, Appendix F
contact that cannot be closed (removable auxiliary contact block)
simultaneously with a NO main contact.
LSD0...., LSS0.... Acc. to SUVA requirements on request
(permanent auxiliary contact block)
Permissible ambient temperature During operation C -25 ... +60
Shock resistance rectangular pulse AC operation g/ms 8.2/5 and 4.9/10
DC operation g/ms 10/5 and 7.5/10
Shock resistance sine pulse AC operation g/ms 12.5/5 and 7.8/10
DC operation g/ms 15/5 and 10/10
2)
Main circuit For short-circuit protection for contactors with thermal overload relays see Protection
Fuse links gL/gG Equipment: Thermal Overload Relays
LV HRC, DIAZED, NEOZED For short-circuit protection for fuseless load feeders see Load Feeders
- acc. to IEC 60947-4-1/ Type of coordination "1" A 25 35
EN 60947-4-1 Type of coordination "2"
Weld-free
3)
A 10 16
Miniature circuit breakers with C characteristic A 25 32
(short-circuit current 3 kA, type of coordination "1")
Auxiliary circuit
DIAZED, NEOZED
(weld-free protection at I
k
1 kA)
Miniature circuit breaker with C characteristic A 10
(short-circuit current I
k
< 400 A)
1)
2)
3)
22, 5 22, 5 360
Page
41
1)
2)
Contactor Type LSS0, LSD0
Size 0
Control
Magnetic coil operating range AC/DC 0.8 ... 1.1 x U
s
Power consumption of the magnetic coils (when coil is cold and 1.0 x U
s
)
AC operation, 50 Hz, Closing VA 61
standard version P.f. 0.82
Closed VA 7.8
P.f. 0.24
AC operation, 50/60 Hz, Closing VA 64/63
standard version P.f. 0.72/0.74
Closed VA 8.4/6.8
P.f. 0.24/0.28
AC operation, 50 Hz, USA/Canada Closing VA 61
P.f. 0.82
Closed VA 7.8
P.f. 0.24
AC operation, 60 Hz, USA/Canada Closing VA 69
P.f. 0.76
Closed VA 7.5
P.f. 0.28
AC operation mA < 6 mA x (230 V/Us)
DC operation mA < 16 mA x (24 V/Us)
Operating times for 0.8 ... 1.1 x U
s
1)
Opening delay ms 13.5 ... 15.5
Arcing time ms 10
s
1)
Opening delay ms 14 ... 15.5
1)
The OFF-delay of the NO contact and the ON-delay of the NC contact are
increased if the contactor coils are attenuated against voltage peaks
(varistor +2 ms to 5 ms, diode assembly: 2 to 6 times).
Size 0 0 0 0
Main circuit
AC capacity
e
at 40 C up to 690 V A 40
at 60 C up to 690 V A 35
1)
230 V kW 13.3
P.f. = 0.95 (at 60 C) 400 V kW 23
500 V kW 29
690 V kW 40
Minimum conductor cross-section for at 40 C mm 10
loads with I
e
at 60 C mm 10
Utilization category AC-2 and AC-3
e
up to 400 V A 9 12 17 25
440 V A 9 12 17 22
500 V A 6.5 12 17 18
690 V A 5.2 9 13 13
Rated power for slipring or squirrelcage at 110 V kW 1.1 1.5 2.2 3
motors at 50 Hz and 60 Hz 230 V kW 3 3 4 5.5
400 V kW 4 5.5 7.5 11
500 V kW 4.5 7.5 10 11
660 V / 690 V kW 5.5 7.5 11 11
2)
A 80 110 150 200
e
/AC-3 W 0.4 0.5 0.9 1.6
Page
42
1)
For Ie/AC-1 = 35 A (60 C) and the corresponding minimum conductor cross-section 10 mm
2
.
2)
Size 0 0 0 0
Main circuit
AC capacity
a
= 6 x I
e
)
e
up to 400 V A 8.5 12.5 15.5 15.5
Rated power for squirrel-cage motors with at 400 V kW 4 5.5 7.5 7.5
50 Hz and 60 Hz
The following applies to a contact endurance of about 200000 operating cycles:
e
up to 400 V A 4.1 5.5 7.7 9
690 V A 3.3 5.5 7.7 9
Rated power for squirrel-cage motors with at 110 V kW 0.5 0.73 1 1.2
50 Hz and 60 Hz 230 V kW 1.1 1.5 2 2.5
400 V kW 2 2.6 3.5 4.4
500 V kW 2 3.3 4.6 5.6
690 V kW 2.5 4.6 6 7.7
1)
Rated power per lamp/rated operational current per lamp
Uncorrected L 18 W/0.37 A Units 108
L 36 W/0.43 A Units 93
L 58 W/0.67 A Units 59
L 80 W/0.79 A Units 50
DUO switching (two-lamp) L 18 W/0.22 A Units 181 ( 2 x 181 lamps)
L 36 W/0.42 A Units 95 ( 2 x 95 lamps)
L 58 W/0.63 A Units 63 ( 2 x 63 lamps)
L 80 W/0.87 A Units 45 ( 2 x 45 lamps)
Rated power per lamp/capacitance/rated operational current per lamp
Shunt compensation with inductive ballast L 18 W/4.5 F/0.11 A Units 37 41 61
L 36 W/4.5 F/0.21 A Units 30 30 51
L 58 W/7.0 F/0.32 A Units 20 20 33
L 80 W/7.0 F/0.49 A Units 13 13 22
2)
single lamp L 18 W/6.8 F/0.10 A Units 105 119 175
L 36 W/6.8 F/0.18 A Units 58 66 97
L 58 W/10 F/0.29 A Units 36 41 60
L 80 W/10 F/0.43 A Units 24 27 40
2)
two-lamp L 18 W/10 F/0.18 A Units 58 ( 2 x 58 lamps) 66 ( 2 x 66 l.) 97 ( 2 x 97 l.)
L 36 W/10 F/0.35 A Units 30 ( 2 x 30 lamps) 34 ( 2 x 34 l.) 50 ( 2 x 50 l.)
Utilization category AC-5b, switching incandescent lamps
Per main current path at 230/220 V kW 2.8 3.2 4.7
e
For inrush current n = 20 up to 400 V A 11.4 20.2
For inrush current n = 30 up to 400 V A 7.6 13.5
Rating P
For inrush current n = 20 at 230 V kVA 4.5 8
400 V kVA 7.9 13.9
500 V kVA 9.9 15.5
690 V kVA 13.6 15.5
For inrush current n = 30 at 230 V kVA 3 5.4
400 V kVA 5.2 9.3
500 V kVA 6.6 11.7
690 V kVA 9.1 15.5
P
x
= P
n30
.
30/x
Utilization category AC-6b,
switching low-inductance (low-loss, metallized dielectric) AC capacitors
e
up to 400 V A 5.8 10.8
Rated power for single capacitors or at 230 V kvar 2.5 4
banks of capacitors (minimum inductance 400 V kvar 4 7.5
of 6 H between capacitors connected in 500 V kvar 4 7.5
parallel) at 50 Hz, 60 Hz and 690 V kvar 4 7.5
Page
43
Size 0 0 0 0
Main circuit
DC capacity
Switching resistive loads (L/R 1ms)
e
(at 60 C)
1 conducting path up to 24 V A 35
60 V A 20
110 V A 4.5
220 V A 1
440 V A 0.4
600 V A 0.25
2 conducting paths in series up to 24 V A 35
60 V A 35
110 V A 35
220 V A 5
440 V A 1
600 V A 0.8
60 V A 35
110 V A 35
220 V A 35
440 V A 2.9
600 V A 1.4
60 V A 5
110 V A 2.5
220 V A 1
440 V A 0.09
600 V A 0.06
60 V A 35
110 V A 15
220 V A 3
440 V A 0.27
600 V A 0.16
60 V A 35
110 V A 35
220 V A 10
440 V A 0.6
600 V A 0.6
Switching frequency
Contactors without overload relays No-load switching h
-1
5000
frequency AC
Dependence of the switching frequency z No-load switching h
-1
1500
on the operational current I and operational frequency DC
voltage U:
z = z
.
(I
e
/I)
.
(400 V/U)
1.5 .
1/h AC-1 (AC/DC) h
-1
1000
AC-2 (AC/DC) h
-1
1000 750
AC-3 (AC/DC) h
-1
1000 750
AC-4 (AC/DC) h
-1
300 250
Contactors with Thermal overload relays (mean value) h
-1
15
Page
44
Contactor Type LSD232 LSD240 LSD250
Size 2 2 2
General data
surface.
For DC operation and 22.5 inclination towards the front,
operating range 0.85 ... 1.1 x U
s
DC operation
Mechanical endurance Basic units Operating 10 million
cycles
contact block
2)
i
imp
kV 6
Degree of protection acc. to EN 60947-1, Appendix C IP20 (terminal compartment IP00),
AC coil assembly IP40,
DC coil assembly IP30
Touch protection acc. to EN 50274 finger-safe
Shock resistance
Rectangular pulse AC and DC operation g/ms 10/5 and 5/10
Sine pulse AC and DC operation g/ms 15/5 and 8/10
3)
2)
3)
Size 0 0 0 0
Screw terminals Main conductors Screw terminals
(1 or 2 conductors can be connected) Conductor cross-section
Solid mm 2 x (1 ... 2.5)
1)
; 2 x (2.5 ... 6)
1)
acc. to IEC 60947; max. 1 x 10
Finely stranded with end sleeve mm 2 x (1 ... 2.5)
1)
; 2 x (2.5 ... 6)
1)
AWG cables, solid AWG 2 x (16 ... 12)
AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG 2 x (14 ... 10)
AWG cables, stranded AWG 1 x 8
Terminal screws M4 (Pozidriv size 2)
- tightening torque Nm 2 ... 2.5 (18 ... 22 lb.in)
Auxiliary conductors
Conductor cross-section
Solid mm 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)
1)
; 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)
1)
0.75) acc. to IEC 60947; max. 2 x (0.75 ... 4)
1)
; 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)
1)
Solid or stranded AWG (2 x) AWG 2 x (20 ... 16)
1)
; 2 x (18 ... 14)
1)
; 1 x 12
Terminal screws M3
Cage Clamp terminals (on request) Auxiliary conductors Cage Clamp terminals
1)
If two different conductor cross-sections are connected to one clamping point,
both cross-sections must lie in the range specified. If identical crosssections are used,
this restriction does not apply.
22, 5 22, 5 360
Page
45
Size 2 2 2
For short-circuit protection for contactors with thermal overload relays see
protection equipment: Thermal overload relays
For short-circuit protection for fuseless load feeders see
protection equipment: Motor protection switches
Main circuit
Fuse links, gL/gG
LV HRC, DIAZED, NEOZED
Acc. to IEC 60947-4-1/ Type of coordination "1" A 125 125 160
EN 60947-4-1 Type of coordination "2" A 63 63 80
Weld-free
1)
A 16 16 50
Auxiliary circuit
DIAZED, NEOZED (weld-free protection at I
k
1 kA)
Miniature circuit breakers with C characteristic (short-circuit current I
k
400 A) A 10
Control
s
s
)
AC operation, 50 Hz, standard version Closing VA 104 145
P.f. 0.78 0.79
Closed VA 9.7 12.5
P.f. 0.42 0.36
AC operation, 50/60 Hz, standard version Closing VA 127/113 170/155
P.f. 0.73/0.69 0.76/0.72
Closed VA 11.3/9.5 15/11.8
P.f. 0.41/0.42 0.35/0.38
AC operation, 50 Hz, USA/Canada Closing VA 108 150
P.f. 0.76 0.77
Closed VA 9.6 12.5
P.f. 0.42 0.35
P.f. 0.7 0.71
Closed VA 10.1 12.6
P.f. 0.42 0.37
DC operation Closing = Closed W 13.3 13.3
AC operation mA <12 mA x (230 V/U
s
) <18 mA x (230 V/U
s
)
DC operation mA <38 mA x (24 V/U
s
) <38 mA x (24 V/U
s
)
s
2)
(Total break time = Opening delay + Arcing time)
AC operation Closing delay ms 11 ... 30 10 ... 24
Opening delay ms 7 ... 10 7 ... 10
DC operation Closing delay ms 50 ... 95 60 ... 100
Opening delay ms 20 ... 30 20 ... 25
Arcing time ms 10 10
s
2
Opening delay ms 7 ... 10 7 ... 10
Opening delay ms 20 ... 30 20 ... 25
1)
2)
The OFF-delay of the NO contact and the ON-delay of the NC contact are increased if the contactor coils are attenuated against voltage peaks (varistor +2 ms to 5 ms, diode assembly:
2 to 6 times).
Page
46
Size 2 2 2
Main circuit
AC capacity
e
at 40 C up to 690 V A 50 60 60
at 60 C up to 690 V A 45 55 55
1)
230 V kW 18 22 22
P.f. = 0.95 (at 60 C) 400 V kW 31 38 38
500 V kW 39 46 46
690 V kW 54 66 66
Minimum conductor cross-section for at 40 C mm 16 16 16
loads with I
e
at 60 C mm 10 16 16
e
up to 500 V A 32 40 50
690 V A 20 24 24
Rated power for slipring 230 V kW 7.5 11 15
or squirrel-cage motors 400 V kW 15 18.5 22
at 50 and 60 Hz 500 V kW 18.5 22 30
690 V kW 18.5 22 22
2)
A 320 400 400
e
/AC-3 W 1.8 2.6 5
a
= 6 x I
e
)
e
up to 400 V A 29 35 41
Rated power for squirrel-cage motors at 400 V kW 15 18.5 22
e
up to 400 V A 15.6 18.5 24
690 V A 15.6 18.5 24
Rated power for squirrel-cage motors 230 V kW 4.7 5.4 7.3
with 50 Hz and 60 Hz 400 V kW 8.2 9.5 12.6
500 V kW 9.8 11.8 15.8
690 V kW 13 15.5 21.8
Uncorrected,
rated power per lamp/rated operational current per lamp L 18 W/0.37 A Units 135 162 162
L 36 W/0.43 A Units 116 139 139
L 58 W/0.67 A Units 74 89 89
L 80 W/0.79 A Units 63 75 75
DUO switching (two-lamp) L 18 W/0.22 A Units 227 ( 2 x 227 lamps) 272 ( 2 x 272 lamps) 272 ( 2 x 272 lamps)
rated power per lamp/capacitance/rated operational current per lamp
L 18 W/4.5 F/0.11 A Units 78 98 123
L 36 W/4.5 F/0.21 A Units 78 98 123
L 58 W/7 F/0.32 A Units 50 63 79
L 80 W/7 F/0.49 A Units 50 63 73
3)
single lamp L 18 W/6.8 F/0.10 A Units 224 280 350
L 36 W/6.8 F/0.18 A Units 124 155 194
L 58 W/10 F/0.29 A Units 77 96 120
L 80 W/10 F/0.43 A Units 52 65 81
3)
two-lamp L 18 W/10 F/0.18 A Units 124 ( 2 x 124 lamps) 155 ( 2 x 155 lamps) 194 ( 2 x 194 lamps)
1)
2)
3)
Page
47
Size 2 2 2
Main circuit
AC capacity
Utilization category AC-5b kW 6.0 7.6 9.5
Switching incandescent lamps
Per main current path at 230/220 V
e
For inrush current n = 20 up to 400 V A 31 36.5 43.2
Rating P
For inrush current n = 20 at 230 V kVA 12.3 14.5 17.2
400 V kVA 21.5 25.3 29.9
500 V kVA 26.8 31.6 37.4
690 V kVA 23.9 28.7 28.7
For inrush current n = 30 230 V kVA 8.2 9.7 11.5
400 V kVA 14.3 16.8 20
500 V kVA 17.9 21 24.9
690 V kVA 23.9 28.7 28.7
For deviating inrush current factors x, the power must be recalculated as follows.
P
x
= P
n30
.
30/x
Utilization category AC-6b
Switching low-inductance (low-loss, metallized dielectric) AC capacitors
Ambient temperature 40 C
e
up to 400 V A 29 36 36
Rated power for single capacitors or at 230 V kvar 12 15 15
banks of capacitors (minimum inductance 400 V kvar 20 25 25
of 20 H between capacitors connected 525 V kvar 25 33 33
in parallel) at 50 Hz, 60 Hz and 690 V kvar 20 25 25
DC capacity
Switching resistive loads (L/R < 1ms)
e
(at 60 C)
1 conducting path up to 24 V A 45 55 55
60 V A 20 23 23
110 V A 4.5 4.5 4.5
220 V A 1 1 1
440 V A 0.4 0.4 0.4
600 V A 0.25 0.25 0.25
2 conducting paths in series up to 24 V A 45 55 55
60 V A 45 45 45
110 V A 25 25 25
220 V A 5 5 5
440 V A 1 1 1
600 V A 0.8 0.8 0.8
60 V A 45 55 55
110 V A 45 55 55
220 V A 45 45 45
440 V A 2.9 2.9 2.9
600 V A 1.4 1.4 1.4
Shunt-wound and series-wound motors (L/R 15ms)
e
(at 60 C)
60 V A 6 6 6
110 V A 2.5 2.5 2.5
220 V A 1 1 1
440 V A 0.1 0.1 0.1
600 V A 0.06 0.06 0.06
60 V A 45 45 45
110 V A 25 25 25
220 V A 5 5 5
440 V A 0.27 0.27 0.27
600 V A 0.16 0.16 0.16
60 V A 45 55 55
110 V A 45 55 55
220 V A 25 25 25
440 V A 0.6 0.6 0.6
600 V A 0.35 0.35 0.35
Page
48
Size 2 2 2
Switching frequency
Contactors without overload relays No-load switching frequency AC h
-1
5000 5000 5000
-1
1500 1500 1500
Dependence of the switching frequency AC-1 (AC/DC) h
-1
1200 1200 1000
z on the operational current I AC-2 (AC/DC) h
-1
750 600 400
and operational voltage U: AC-3 (AC/DC) h
-1
1000 1000 800
z = z
.
(I
e
/I)
.
(400 V/U)
1.5 .
1/h AC-4 (AC/DC) h
-1
250 300 300
-1
15 15 15
Contactor Type LSD2..
Size 2
Screw terminals Main conductors: Screw terminals
(1 or 2 conductors can be connected) with box terminal
Front clamping point Finely stranded with end sleeve mm 0.75 ... 25
connected Finely stranded without end sleeve mm 0.75 ... 25
Stranded mm 0.75 ... 35
Solid mm 0.75 ... 16
Ribbon cable conductors mm 6 x 9 x 0.8
(number x width x thickness)
AWG cables, AWG 18 ... 2
solid or stranded
Rear clamping point Finely stranded with end sleeve mm 0.75 ... 25
connected Finely stranded without end sleeve mm 0.75 ... 25
Solid mm 0.75 ... 16
AWG cables, AWG 18 ... 2
solid or stranded
Both clamping points Finely stranded with end sleeve mm 2 x (0.75 ... 16)
connected Finely stranded without end sleeve mm 2 x (0.75 ... 16)
Stranded mm 2 x (0.75 ... 25)
Solid mm 2 x (0.75 ... 16)
Ribbon cable conductors mm 2 x (6 x 9 x 0.8)
solid or stranded
Terminal screw M6 (Pozidriv size 2)
- tightening torque Nm 3 ... 4.5 (27 ... 40 lb.in)
Auxiliary conductors:
Solid mm 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)
1)
; 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)
1)
acc. to IEC 60947; max. 2 x (0.75 ... 4)
1)
; 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)
1)
1)
; 2 x (18 ... 14)
1)
; 1 x 12
Terminal screw M3
Cage Clamp terminals (on request) Auxiliary conductors: Cage Clamp terminals
(1 or 2 conductors can be connected)
Solid mm 2 x (0.25 ... 2.5)
AWG cables, 2 x (24 ... 14)
solid or stranded
1)
If two different conductor cross-sections are connected to one clamping point, both cross-sections must lie in the range specified. If identical crosssections are used, this restriction does not
apply.
Page
49
Size 3 3 3
General data
surface.
For DC operation and 22.5 inclination towards the front,
operating range 0.85 ... 1.1 x U
s
DC operation
cycles
contact block
1)
i
imp
kV 6
Degree of protection acc. to EN 60947-1, Appendix C IP20 (terminal compartment IP00),
AC coil assembly IP40,
DC coil assembly IP30
Touch protection acc. to EN 50274 finger-safe
Shock resistance
Rectangular pulse AC and DC operation g/ms 6.8/5 and 4/10
Sine pulse AC and DC operation g/ms 10.6/5 and 6.2/10
2)
For short-circuit protection for contactors with overload relays see
Protection Equipment: Overload Relays
For short-circuit protection for fuseless load feeders see load feeders
Main circuit
Fuse links gL/gG
EN 60947-4-1 Type of coordination "2" A 125 160
Weld-free
3)
A 63 100
Auxiliary circuit
DIAZED, NEOZED (weld-free protection at I
k
1 kA)
Miniature circuit breakers with C characteristic (short-circuit current I
k
< 400 A) A 10
1)
2)
3)
22, 5 22, 5 360
Page
50
Size 3 3 3
Control
s
s
)
AC operation, 50 Hz, Closing VA 218 270
standard version P.f. 0.61 0.68
Closed VA 21 22
P.f. 0.26 0.27
AC operation, 50/60 Hz, Closing VA 247/211 298/274
standard version P.f. 0.62/0.57 0.7/0.62
Closed VA 25/18 27/20
P.f. 0.27/0.3 0.29/0.31
P.f. 0.61 0.68
Closed VA 21 22
P.f. 0.26 0.27
P.f. 0.55 0.52
Closed VA 20 21
P.f. 0.28 0.29
DC operation Closing = Closed W 15 15
AC operation < 25 mA x (230 V/U
s
)
DC operation < 43 mA x (24 V/U
s
)
s
1)
Opening delay ms 10 ... 19 10 ... 25
Opening delay ms 14 ... 20 14 ... 20
Arcing time ms 10 ... 15 10 ... 15
s
1)
Opening delay ms 11 ... 18 11 ... 23
Opening delay ms 16 ... 20 16 ... 20
Main circuit
AC capacity
e
at 40 C up to 690 V A 100 120 120
1000 V A 50 60 70
at 60 C up to 690 V A 90 100 100
1000 V A 40 50 60
Rated output of AC loads
2)
at 230 V kW 34 38 38
P.f. = 0.95 (at 60 C) 400 V kW 59 66 66
500 V kW 74 82 82
690 V kW 102 114 114
1000 V kW 66 82 98
Minimum conductor cross-section for At 40 C mm 35 50 50
loads with II
e
At 60 C mm 35 35 35
Utilization categories AC-2 and AC-3
e
up to 500 V A 65 80 95
690 V A 47 58 58
1000 V A 25 30 30
Rated power for slipring at 230 V kW 18.5 22 22
or squirrel-cage motors 400 V kW 30 37 45
at 50 and 60 Hz 500 V kW 37 45 55
690 V kW 45 55 55
1000 V kW 30 37 37
3)
A 600 760 760
e
/AC-3 W 4.6 7.7 10.8
1)
The OFF-delay of the NO contact and the ON-delay of the NC contact are increased if the contactor coils are attenuated against voltage peaks (varistor +2 ms to 5 ms, diode assembly:
2 to 6 times).
2)
3)
Page
51
Size 3 3 3
Main circuit
AC capacity
a
= 6 x I
e
)
e
up to 400 V A 55 66 80
Rated power for squirrel-cage motors at 400 V kW 30 37 45
e
up to 400 V A 28 34 42
690 V A 28 34 42
1000 V A 20 23 23
- rated power for squirrel-cage at 230 V kW 8.7 10.4 12
motors with 50 Hz and 60 Hz 400 V kW 15.1 17.9 22
500 V kW 18.4 22.4 27
690 V kW 25.4 30.9 38
1000 V A 22 30 30
Uncorrected,
rated power per lamp/rated operational current per lamp L 18 W/0.37 A Units 270 324
L 36 W/0.43 A Units 232 279
L 58 W/0.67 A Units 149 179
L 80 W/0.79 A Units 126 151
DUO switching (two-lamp) L 18 W/0.21 A Units 454 ( 2 x 454 lamps) 545 ( 2 x 545 lamps)
L 36 W/0.42 A Units 238 ( 2 x 238 lamps) 285 ( 2 x 285 lamps)
rated power per lamp/capacitance/rated operational current per lamp
L 18 W/4.5 F/0.11 A Units 160 197 234
L 36 W/4.5 F/0.21 A Units 160 197 234
L 58 W/7 F/0.32 A Units 103 127 150
L 80 W/7 F/0.49 A Units 103 126 146
With solid-state ballast1) single lamp L 18 W/6.8 F/0.10 A Units 455 560 665
L 36 W/6.8 F/0.18 A Units 253 311 369
L 58 W/10 F/0.29 A Units 156 193 229
L 80 W/10 F/0.43 A Units 105 130 154
With solid-state ballast1) two-lamp L 18 W/10 F/0.18 A Units 253 ( 2 x 253 lamps) 311 ( 2 x 311 lamps) 369 ( 2 x 369 lamps)
Switching incandescent lamps
Per main current path at 230/220 V kW 12.3 15.2 18.1
1)
Page
52
Size 3 3 3
Main circuit
AC capacity
e
(60 C)
For inrush current n = 20 up to 400 V A 63.5 80 84.4
up to 690 V A 47 58 58
up to 690 V A 42.3 56.3 56.3
Rating P
For inrush current n = 20 230 V kVA 25.3 31.9 33.6
400 V kVA 43.9 55.4 58
500 V kVA 54.9 69.3 73.1
690 V kVA 56.2 69.3 69.3
For inrush current n = 30 230 V kV 16.8 22.4 22.4
400 V kVA 29.3 39 39
500 V kVA 36.6 48.7 48.7
690 V kVA 50.3 67.3 67.3
For deviating inrush current factors x, the power must be recalculated as follows.
P
x
= P
n30
.
30/x
Rated operational currents Ie (60 C) up to 400 V A 57 72
Rated power for single capacitors or at 230 V kvar 24 29
banks of capacitors (minimum inductance 400 V kvar 40 50
of 6 H between capacitors connected 525 V kvar 50 65
in parallel) at 50 Hz, 60 Hz and 690 V kvar 40 50
DC capacity
Switching resistive load (L/R 1 ms)
Rated operational current Ie (60 C)
60 V A 23 60 60
110 V A 4.5 9 9
220 V A 1 2 2
440 V A 0.4 0.6 0.6
600 V A 0.26 0.4 0.4
60 V A 90 100 100
110 V A 90 100 100
220 V A 5 10 10
440 V A 1 1.8 1.8
600 V A 0.8 1 1
60 V A 90 100 100
110 V A 90 100 100
220 V A 70 80 80
440 V A 2.9 1.8 4.5
600 V A 1.4 1 2.6
Rated operational current Ie (60 C)
60 V A 6 6.5 6.5
110 V A 2.5 2.5 2.5
220 V A 1 1 1
440 V A 0.15 0.15 0.15
600 V A 0.06 0.06 0.06
60 V A 90 100 100
110 V A 90 100 100
220 V A 7 7 7
440 V A 0.42 0.42 0.42
600 V A 0.16 0.16 0.16
60 V A 90 100 100
110 V A 90 100 100
220 V A 35 35 35
440 V A 0.8 0.8 0.8
600 V A 0.35 0.35 0.35
Page
53
Size 3 3 3
Main circuit
Switching frequency
Contactors without overload relays No-load switching frequency AC h
-1
5000 5000 5000
-1
1000 1000 1000
Dependence of the switching frequency AC-1 (AC/DC) h
-1
1000 900 900
z on the operational current I AC-2 (AC/DC) h
-1
400 400 350
and operational voltage U: AC-3 (AC/DC) h
-1
1000 1000 850
z = z
.
(I
e
/I)
.
(400 V/U)
1.5 .
1/h AC-4 (AC/DC) h
-1
300 300 250
-1
15 15 15
Contactor Type LSD3..
Size 3
connected Finely stranded without end sleeve mm 4 ... 50
Solid mm 4 ... 70
AWG cables, AWG 10 ... 2/0
solid or stranded
Solid mm 10 ... 70
solid or stranded
Both clamping points Finely stranded with end sleeve mm 2 x (2.5 ... 35)
connected Finely stranded without end sleeve mm 2 x (4 ... 35)
Stranded mm 2 x (2.5 ... 16)
Solid mm 2 x (4 ... 50)
AWG cables, AWG 2 x (10 ... 1/0)
solid or stranded
Terminal screw M6 (hex. socket, A/F 4)
- tightening torque Nm 4 ... 6 (36 ... 53 lb.in)
Connection for drilled copper bars
1)
Max. width mm 10
Without box terminal with Finely stranded with cable lug mm 10 ... 503)
cable lugs
2)
Stranded with cable lug mm 10 ... 703)
(1 or 2 conductors can be connected) AWG cables, AWG 7 ... 1/0
solid or stranded
Solid mm 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)
4)
; 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)
4)
0.75) acc. to IEC 60947; max. 2 x (0.75 ... 4)
4)
; 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)
4)
4)
; 2 x (18 ... 14)
4)
; 1 x 12
solid or stranded
Terminal screw M3
Cage Clamp terminals (on request) Auxiliary conductors: Cage Clamp terminals
solid or stranded
1
) If bars larger than 12 x 10 mm are connected, a terminal cover is needed to comply with the phase clearance (on request).
2
) If conductors larger than 25 mm
2
are connected, a terminal cover is needed to comply with the phase clearance (on request).
3
) Only with crimped cable lugs according to DIN 46234. Cable lug max. 20 mm wide.
4
) If two different conductor cross-sections are connected to one clamping point, both cross-sections must lie in the range specified. If identical cross-sections are used, this restriction does not
apply.
Page
54
Size 6 6 6
General data
The contactors are designed for operation on a vertical mounting surface.
Mechanical endurance Operating 10 million
cycles
1)
i
imp
kV 8
Mirror contacts Yes, acc. to EN 60947-4-1, Appendix F
A mirror contact is an auxiliary NC contact that cannot be closed
Permissible ambient temperature During operation C -25 ... +60/+55 with AS-Interface
Degree of protection acc. to EN 60947-1, Appendix C IP00/open, coil assembly IP20
Touch protection acc. to EN 50274 Finger-safe with cover
Shock resistance Rectangular pulse g/ms 8.5/5 and 4.2/10
Sine pulse g/ms 13.4/5 and 6.5/10
2)
3)
Short-circuit protection
Main circuit For short-circuit protection for contactors with overload relays see
Fuse links, gL/gG Protection Equipment: Overload Relays
Weld-free
4)
A 80 160
Auxiliary circuit
DIAZED, NEOZED
k
1 kA)
Or miniature circuit breakers with C characteristic (Ik < 400 A)
1)
2)
3)
See second page of chapter Technical Specifications Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC).
4)
22, 5 22, 5
90 90
Page
55
Contactor Type LSD6.
Size 6
Control
Operating range of the solenoid AC/DC (UC) 0.8 x U
s
min ... 1.1 x U
s
max
Power consumption of the solenoid
when coil is cool and rated range U
s
min ... U
s
max)
Conventional operating mechanism
- AC operation Closing at U
s
min VA/p.f. 250/0.9
Closing at U
s
max VA/p.f. 300/0.9
Closed at U
s
min VA/p.f. 4.8/0.8
Closed at U
s
max VA/p.f. 5.8/0.8
- DC operation Closing at U
s
min W 300
Closing at U
s
max W 360
Closed at U
s
min W 4.3
Closed at U
s
max W 5.2
PLC control input (EN 61131-2/type 2) 24 V DC/ 30 mA power consumption,
(operating range 17 ... 30 V DC)
Operating times (Total break time = Opening delay + Arcing time)
- with 0.8 x U
s
min ... 1.1 x U
s
max Closing delay ms 20 ... 95
- with U
s
min ... U
s
max Closing delay ms 25 ... 50
Page
56
Size 6 6 6
Main circuit
AC capacity
e
at 40 C up to 690 V A 160 185 215
at 60 C up to 690 V A 140 160 185
at 60 C up to 1000 V A 80 90 100
1)
at 230 V kW 53 60 70
P.f. = 0.95 (at 60 C) 400 V kW 92 105 121
500 V kW 115 131 152
690 V kW 159 181 210
1000 V kW 131 148 165
Minimum conductor cross-section for At 40 C mm 70 95 95
loads with Ie At 60 C mm 50 70 95
e
up to 500 V A 115 150 185
690 V A 115 150 170
1000 V A 53 65 65
Rated power of slipring at 230 V kW 37 50 61
or squirrel-cage motors at 50 and 60 Hz 400 V kW 64 84 104
500 V kW 81 105 132
690 V kW 113 146 167
1000 V kW 75 90 90
Thermal load capacity 10 s current2) A 1100 1300 1480
Power loss per main current path at I
e
/AC-3/500 V W 7 9 13
a
= 6 x I
e)
e
up to 400 V A 97 132 160
Rated power for squirrel-cage at 400 V kW 55 75 90
motors with 50 Hz and 60 Hz
e
up to 500 V A 54 68 81
690 V A 48 57 65
1000 V A 34 38 42
- rated power for squirrel-cage motors at 230 V kW 16 20 25
with 50 Hz and 60 Hz 400 V kW 29 38 45
500 V kW 37 47 57
690 V kW 48 55 65
1000 V kW 49 55 60
e
For inrush current n = 20 up to 690 V A 115 148 148
Rating P
For inrush current n = 20 at 230 V kVA 45 58 58
400 V kVA 79 102 102
500 V kVA 99 128 128
690 V kVA 137 176 176
1000 V kVA 80 98 117
400 V kVA 62 68 68
500 V kVA 77 85 85
690 V kVA 107 118 118
1000 V kVA 80 98 117
P
x
= P
n 30
.
30/x
e
up to 500 V A 105 125 145
Rated power for single capacitors or at 230 V kvar 42 50 58
banks of capacitors (minimum 400 V kvar 72 86 100
inductance of 6 H between capacitors 500 V kvar 90 108 125
connected in parallel) at 50 Hz, 60 Hz 690 V kvar 72 86 100
1)
2)
According to IEC 60947-4-1.
Page
57
Size 6 6 6
Main circuit
DC capacity
e
(at 60 C)
60 V A 160
110 V A 18
220 V A 3.4
440 V A 0.8
600 V A 0.5
60 V A 160
110 V A 160
220 V A 20
440 V A 3.2
600 V A 1.6
60 V A 160
110 V A 160
220 V A 160
440 V A 11.5
600 V A 4
e
(at 60 C)
60 V A 7.5
110 V A 2.5
220 V A 0.6
440 V A 0.17
600 V A 0.12
60 V A 160
110 V A 160
220 V A 2.5
440 V A 0.65
600 V A 0.37
60 V A 160
110 V A 160
220 V A 160
440 V A 1.4
600 V A 0.75
Switching frequency
Contactors without overload relays No-load switching frequency h
-1
2000 2000
Dependence of the switching AC-1 h
-1
800 800
frequency z' on the operational AC-2 h
-1
400 300
current I and operational voltage U: AC-3 h
-1
1000 750
z = z (I
e
/I) (400 V/U)
1.5
1/h AC-4 h
-1
130 130
Page
58
Contactor Type LSD6
Size 6
Conductor cross-sections of main conductors
without box terminal/busbar connection
(box terminals on request)
Finely stranded with cable lug
1)
mm 16 ... 95
Stranded with cable lug
1)
mm 25 ... 120
AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG 4 ... 250 kcmil
Connecting bar (max. width) mm 17
Terminal screw M8 x 25 (A/F 13)
- Tightening torque Nm 10 ... 14 (89 ... 124 lb.in)
Solid mm 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)
2)
; 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)
2)
0.75) acc. to IEC 60947;
max. 2 x (0.75 ... 4)
2)
; 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)
2)
Terminal screw M3 (PZ 2)
Cage Clamp terminals Auxiliary conductors: Cage Clamp terminals
(on request) Solid mm 2 x (0.25 ... 2.5)
AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG 2 x (24...14)
1)
When connecting cable lugs according to DIN 46235, use LSZ6 D001 terminal cover for conductor cross-sections from 95 mm to ensure phase spacing.
2)
apply.
Page
59
Contactor Type LSDE22 LSDE26 LSDE30
Size 10 10 10
General data
surface.
cycles
1)
i
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp kV 8
2)
3)
Main circuit
Fuse links, gL/gG
- acc. to IEC 60947-4-1/ Type of coordination "1" A 500
EN 60947-4-1 Type of coordination "2" A 400
Weld-free
4)
A 250
Auxiliary circuit
DIAZED, NEOZED
k
1 kA)
Or miniature circuit breakers with C characteristic
k
< 400 A)
1)
2)
3)
4)
22, 5 22, 5
90 90
Page
60
Size 10 10 10
Control
s
min ... 1.1 x U
s
max
(when coil is cool and rated range U
s min
... U
s max
)
s min
VA/p.f. 490/0.9
Closing at U
s max
VA/p.f. 590/0.9
Closed at U
s min
VA/p.f. 5.6/0.9
Closed at U
s max
VA/p.f. 6.7/0.9
s min
W 540
Closing at U
s max
W 650
Closed at U
s min
W 6.1
Closed at U
s max
W 7.4
PLC control input (EN 61131-2/type 2) (on request) 24 V DC/ 30 mA power consumption, (operating range 17 ... 30 V DC)
Operating times (Total break time = Opening delay + Arcing time)
- with 0.8 x U
s min
... 1.1 x U
s max
Closing delay ms 30 ... 95
- for U
s min
... U
s max
Page
61
Size 10 10 10
Main circuit
AC capacity
e
at 40 C up to 690 V A 275 330
at 60 C up to 690 V A 250 300
at 60 C up to 1000 V A 100 150
1)
at 230 V kW 94 113
P.f. = 0.95 (at 60 C) 400 V kW 164 197
500 V kW 205 246
690 V kW 283 340
1000 V kW 164 246
Minimum conductor cross-section for at 40 C mm
2
150 185
loads with I
e
at 60 C mm
2
120 185
e
up to 500 V A 225 265 300
690 V A 225 265 280
1000 V A 68 95 95
Rated power of slipring at 230 V kW 73 85 97
or squirrel-cage motors at 50 and 60 Hz 400 V kW 128 151 171
500 V kW 160 189 215
690 V kW 223 265 280
1000 V kW 90 132 132
2)
A 1800 2400 2400
e
/AC-3/500 V W 17 18 22
a
= 6 x I
e)
e
up to 400 V A 195 230 280
Rated power for squirrel-cage at 400 V kW 110 132 160
e
up to 500 V A 96 117 125
690 V A 85 105 115
1000 V A 42 57 57
- rated power for squirrel-cage motors at 230 V kW 30 37 40
with 50 Hz and 60 Hz 400 V kW 54 66 71
500 V kW 67 82 87
690 V kW 82 102 112
1000 V kW 59 80 80
e
Rating power P
400 V kVA 157 183 189
500 V kVA 196 229 236
690 V kVA 271 317 326
1000 V kVA 117 164 164
400 V kVA 105 126 126
500 V kVA 130 158 158
690 V kVA 180 217 217
1000 V kVA 117 164 164
P
x
= P
n 30
.
30/x
e
up to 500 V A 183 200
banks of capacitors (minimum 400 V kvar 127 152
inductance of 6 H between capacitors 500 V kvar 159 191
connected in parallel) at 50 Hz, 60 Hz 690 V kvar 127 152
1)
2)
Page
62
Size 10 10 10
Main circuit
DC capacity
e
(at 60 C)
60 V A 200 300
110 V A 18 33
220 V A 3.4 3.8
440 V A 0.8 0.9
600 V A 0.5 0.6
60 V A 200 300
110 V A 200 300
220 V A 20 300
440 V A 3.2 4
600 V A 1.6 2
60 V A 200 300
110 V A 200 300
220 V A 200 300
440 V A 11.5 11
600 V A 4 5.2
e
(at 60 C)
60 V A 7.5 11
110 V A 2.5 3
220 V A 0.6 0.6
440 V A 0.17 0.18
600 V A 0.12 0.125
60 V A 200 300
110 V A 200 300
220 V A 2.5 2.5
440 V A 0.65 0.65
600 V A 0.37 0.37
60 V A 200 300
110 V A 200 300
220 V A 200 300
440 V A 1.4 1.4
600 V A 0.75 0.75
Switching frequency
-1
2000 2000 2000
-1
800 800 750
-1
250 300 250
-1
500 700 500
z = z (I
e
/I) (400 V/U)
1.5 .
1/h AC-4 h
-1
130 130 130
Page
63
Contactor Type LSDE.
Size 10
Screw terminals Main conductors:
1)
mm 50 ... 240
1)
mm 70 ... 240
AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG 2/0 ... 500 kcmil
Solid mm 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)
2)
; 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)
2)
0.75) acc. to IEC 60947;
max. 2 x (0.75 ... 4)
2)
; 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)
2)
1)
When connecting cable lugs according to DIN46234 for conductor cross-sections of 185 mm and more and according to DIN46235 for conductor cross-sections of 240 mm and more, the
LSZED001 terminal cover must be used to keep the phase clearance.
2)
apply.
Page
64
Contactor Type LSDG41 LSDG51
Size 12 12
General data
surface.
cycles
1)
i
imp
kV 8
2)
3)
Main circuit
Fuse links, gL/gG
Weld-free
3)
A 250 315
Auxiliary circuit
DIAZED, NEOZED
k
1 kA)
or miniature circuit breakers with C characteristic
k
< 400 A)
1)
2)
3)
4)
22, 5 22, 5
90 90
Page
65
Size 12 12
Control
s
min ... 1.1 x U
s
max
(when coil is cool and rated range U
s min
... U
s max
)
s min
VA/p.f. 700/0.9
Closing at U
s max
VA/p.f. 830/0.9
Closed at U
s min
VA/p.f. 7.6/0.9
Closed at U
s max
VA/p.f. 9.2/0.9
s min
W 770
Closing at U
s max
W 920
Closed at U
s min
W 8.5
Closed at U
s max
W 10
PLC control input (EN 61131-2/type 2) (on request) 24 V DC/ 30 mA power consumption, (operating range 17 ... 30 V DC)
Operating times
- with 0.8 x U
s min
... 1.1 x U
s max
- for U
s min
... U
s max
Page
66
Size 12 12
Main circuit
AC capacity
e
at 40 C up to 690 V A 430 610
at 60 C up to 690 V A 400 550
at 60 C up to 1000 V A 200 200
1)
at 230 V kW 151 208
P.f. = 0.95 (at 60 C) 400 V kW 263 362
500 V kW 329 452
690 V kW 454 624
1000 V kW 329 329
Minimum conductor cross-section for at 40 C mm
2
2 x 150 2 x 185
loads with I
e
at 60 C mm
2
240 2 x 185
e
up to 500 V A 400 500
690 V A 400 450
1000 V A 180 180
Rated power of slipring at 230 V kW 132 164
or squirrel-cage motors at 50 and 60 Hz 400 V kW 231 291
500 V kW 291 363
690 V kW 400 453
1000 V kW 250 250
2)
A 3200 4000
e
/AC-3/500 V W 35 55
a
= 6 x I
e)
e
up to 400 V A 350 430
Rated power for squirrel-cage at 400 V kW 200 250
e
up to 500 V A 150 175
690 V A 135 150
1000 V A 80 80
- rated power for squirrel-cage motors at 230 V kW 48 56
with 50 Hz and 60 Hz 400 V kW 85 98
500 V kW 105 123
690 V kW 133 148
1000 V kW 113 113
e
For inrush current n = 20 up to 690 V A 377 404
For inrush current n = 30 up to 690 V A 251 270
Rating power P
For inrush current n = 20 at 230 V kVA 150 161
400 V kVA 261 280
500 V kVA 326 350
690 V kVA 450 483
1000 V kVA 311 311
For inrush current n = 30 at 230 V kVA 100 107
400 V kVA 173 187
500 V kVA 217 234
690 V kVA 300 323
1000 V kVA 311 311
P
x
= P
n 30
.
30/x
e
up to 500 V A 287 407
banks of capacitors (minimum 400 V kvar 199 282
inductance of 6 H between capacitors 500 V kvar 248 352
connected in parallel) at 50 Hz, 60 Hz 690 V kvar 199 282
1)
2)
Page
67
Size 12 12
Main circuit
DC capacity
e
(at 60 C)
60 V A 330
110 V A 33
220 V A 3.8
440 V A 0.9
600 V A 0.6
60 V A 400
110 V A 400
220 V A 400
440 V A 4
600 V A 2
60 V A 400
110 V A 400
220 V A 400
440 V A 11
600 V A 5.2
e
(at 60 C)
60 V A 11
110 V A 3
220 V A 0.6
440 V A 0.18
600 V A 0.125
60 V A 400
110 V A 400
220 V A 2.5
440 V A 0.65
600 V A 0.37
60 V A 400
110 V A 400
220 V A 400
440 V A 1.4
600 V A 0.75
Switching frequency
-1
2000 2000
-1
700 500
-1
200 170
-1
500 420
z = z (I
e
/I) (400 V/U)
1.5
1/h AC-4 h
-1
130 130
Page
68
Contactor Type LSDG.
Size 12
Screw terminals Main conductors:
1)
mm 50 ... 240
1)
mm 70 ... 240
AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG 2/0 ... 500 kcmil
Solid mm 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)
2)
; 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)
2)
0.75) acc. to IEC 60947;
max. 2 x (0.75 ... 4)
2)
; 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)
2)
1)
When connecting cable lugs according to DIN46234 for conductor cross-sections of 185 mm and more and according to DIN46235 for conductor cross-sections of 240 mm and more, the
LSZED001 terminal cover must be used to keep the phase clearance.
2)
apply.
Page
69
Contactor Type LSSD07 LSSD09 LSSD12 LSS012 LSS017 LSS025
LSDD07 LSDD09 LSDD12 LSD009 LSD012 LSD017 LSD025
Size 00 00 00 0 0 0 0
CSA and UL rated data
Rated insulation voltage V AC 600 600
Uninterrupted current, at 40 C Open and enclosed A 20 35
Maximum horsepower ratings
(CSA and UL approved values)
Rated power for induction motors at 200 V hp 1.5 2 3 2 3 5 7.5
at 60 Hz 230 V hp 2 3 3 3 3 5 7.5
460 V hp 3 5 7.5 5 7.5 10 15
575 V hp 5 7.5 10 7.5 10 15 20
Short-circuit protection at 600 V kA 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
(contactor or overload relay) CLASS RK5 fuse A 60 60 60 70 70 70 100
Circuit breakers with overload A 50 50 50 70 70 70 100
protection acc. to UL 489
Combination motor controllers type E acc. to UL 508
At 480 V Type -- -- -- BES0
A -- -- -- 8 10 16 22
kA -- -- -- 65 65 65 65
At 600 V Type -- -- -- BES0
A -- -- -- 8 10 12.5 12.5
kA -- -- -- 25 25 25 25
NEMA/EEMAC ratings
NEMA/EEMAC size hp -- 0 -- 1
Uninterrupted current Open A -- 18 -- 27
Enclosed A -- 18 -- 27
Rated power for induction motors at 200 V hp -- 3 -- 7.5
at 60 Hz 230 V hp -- 3 -- 7.5
460 V hp -- 5 -- 10
575 V hp -- 5 -- 10
Thermal Overload relays Type LSTD LST0
Setting range A 0.11 ... 12 1.8 ... 25
Contactor Type LSD232 LSD240 LSD250 LSD365 LSD380 LSD395
Size 2 2 2 3 3 3
Uninterrupted current, at 40 C Open and enclosed A 45 55 50 90 105 105
Rated power for induction motors at 200 V hp 10 10 15 20 25 30
at 60 Hz 230 V hp 10 15 15 25 30 30
460 V hp 25 30 40 50 60 75
575 V hp 30 40 50 60 75 100
Short-circuit protection at 600 V kA 5 5 5 10 10 10
(contactor or overload relay) CLASS RK5 fuse A 125 150 200 250 300 350
Circuit breakers with overload A 125 150 200 250 300 400
Combination motor controllers type E acc. to UL 508
At 480 V Type BES2 BES3
A 32 40 50 63 75 100
kA 65 65 65 65 65 65
At 600 V Type BES3 BES3
A 32 40 50 63 75 75
kA 25 25 25 30 30 30
NEMA/EEMAC ratings
NEMA/EEMAC size hp -- 2 -- 3
Uninterrupted current Open A -- 45 -- 90
Enclosed A -- 45 -- 90
Rated power at 200 V hp -- 10 -- 25
for induction motors with 60 Hz 230 V hp -- 15 -- 30
460 V hp -- 25 -- 50
575 V hp -- 25 -- 50
Thermal Overload relays Type LST2 LST3
Setting range A 5.5 ... 50 18 ... 100
Page
70
Size 12 12
Rated insulation voltage V AC 600
Uninterrupted current, at 40 C Open and enclosed A 400 540
Rated power for induction motors at 200 V hp 125 150
at 60 Hz 230 V hp 150 200
460 V hp 300 400
575 V hp 400 500
Short-circuit protection at 600 V kA 18 30
CLASS L fuse A 1000 1200
Circuit breakers with overload A 900 900
NEMA/EEMAC ratings
NEMA/EEMAC size hp -- 6
Uninterrupted current Open A -- 600
Enclosed A -- 540
Rated power for induction motors at 200 V hp -- 150
with 60 Hz 230 V hp -- 200
460 V hp -- 400
575 V hp -- 400
Contactor Type LSD611 LSD615 LSD619 LSDE22 LSDE26 LSDE30
Size 6 6 6 10 10 10
Uninterrupted current, at 40 C Open and enclosed A 140 195 195 250 330 330
Rated power for induction motors at 200 V hp 40 50 60 60 75 100
at 60 Hz 230 V hp 50 60 75 75 100 125
460 V hp 100 125 150 150 200 250
575 V hp 125 150 200 200 250 300
Short-circuit protection at 600 V kA 10 10 10 10 18 18
CLASS RK5/L fuse A 450 500 500 700 800 800
Circuit breakers with overload A 350 450 500 500 700 800
NEMA/EEMAC ratings
NEMA/EEMAC size hp -- 4 -- -- -- 5
Uninterrupted current Open A -- 150 -- -- -- 300
Enclosed A -- 135 -- -- -- 270
Rated power for induction motors at 200 V hp -- 40 -- -- -- 75
with 60 Hz 230 V hp -- 50 -- -- -- 100
460 V hp -- 100 -- -- -- 200
575 V hp -- 100 -- -- -- 200
Contactor Size 00 0 ... 12
Screw terminals and Screw terminals and Screw terminals and
Cage Clamp terminals Cage Clamp terminals Cage Clamp terminals
Integrated or 1- and 4-pole Laterally
snap-on snap-on mountable
auxiliary contact block auxiliary contact block auxiliary contact block
CSA and UL rated data for the auxiliary contacts
Rated voltage V AC 600 600 600
Switching capacity A 600, Q 600 A 600, Q 600 A 300, Q 300
Uninterrupted current
at 240 V AC A 10 10 10
Page
71
W LSDH VACUUM CONTACTORS, 3-POLE, 335 ... 450 kW OVERVI EW
IEC 60947-4-1, EN 60947-4-1 (VDE 0660 Part 102)
The LSDH contactors are climate-proof. They are finger-safe according to EN 50274. Terminal covers may have to be
fitted onto the connecting bars, depending on the configuration with other devices (see chapter Products and order
numbers terminal covers).
W FUNCTI ON
W MAI N CONTACTS
Contact erosion indication with LSDH 6/8 vacuum contactors
The contact erosion of the vacuum interrupters can be checked during operation with the help of 3 white double slides
on the contactor base. If the distance indicated by one of the double slides is < 0.5 mm while the contactor is in the closed
position, the vacuum interrupter must be replaced. To ensure maximum reliability, it is recommended to replace all 3
vacuum interrupters.
W AUXI LI ARY CONTACTS
Contact reliability
The auxiliary contacts are suitable for solid-state circuits
With currents 1 mA
And voltages from 17 V.
Control circuit
Protection of coils against overvoltages:
AC operation
Fitted with varistors as standard
DC operation
Retrofitting options:
With varistors
If LSDH 6/8 is to be used for DC operation, an additional reversing contactor is required; this is included in the scope of
supply in the same packaging as the vacuum contactor.
W ELECTROMAGNETI C COMPATI BI LI TY (EMC)
LSDH 6/8 contactors for AC operation are fitted with an electronically controlled solenoid operating mechanism with a
high interference immunity.
Contactor Rated control Overvoltage Degree of Overvoltage
type supply type severity strength
voltage U
s
(IEC 60801) (IEC 60801)
LSDH6. 110 ... 132 V Burst 3 2 kV
LSDHB. Surge 4 6 kV
200 ... 277 V Burst 4 4 kV
Surge 4 5 kV
380 ... 600 V Burst 4 4 kV
Surge 4 6 kV
Note:
During operation in installations in which the emitted interference limits cannot be observed, e.g. when used for output
contactors in converters, LSDH6/8 contactors without a main conductor path circuit are recommended (see description
next page).
Page
72
W APPLI CATI ON
The standard LSDH6. and LSDHB. contactors with electronically controlled contactor mechanism, have high resistance to
electromagnetic interference.
Causes for such interference can be, for example:
Frequency converters which are operated nearby can cause periodic overvoltages at the control level of the contactors.
High-energy pulses cause by switching operations and atmospheric discharges can cause interference on the control
cables.
To reduce interference voltages caused by frequency converters, the manufacturer recommends the use of e.g. input
filters, output filters, grounding or shielding in the installation.
Further measures that should be applied for overvoltage damping:
Feeding the contactors using control transformer according to EN 60204 - rather than directly from the network
Use of surge arresters, if required
W CONNECTI ON
Control circuit
The rectifier bridge is connected to varistors for protection against overvoltages. The built-in rectifier bridge affords
sufficient protection for the coils.
Main circuit
As standard LSDH. contactors with integrated RC varistors.
W PROTECTI ON OF THE MAI N CURRENT PATHS
An integrated RC varistor connection for the main current paths of the contactors dampens the switching overvoltage
rises to safe values. This prevents multiple restriking. The operator of an installation can therefore rest assured that the
motor winding cannot be damaged by switching overvoltages with steep voltage rises.
Important note:
The overvoltage damping circuit is not required if LSDH 6/8 contactors are used in circuits with DC choppers, frequency
converters or speed-variable operating mechanisms, for example. It could be damaged by the voltage peaks and
harmonics which are generated. This may cause phase-to-phase short-circuits in the contactors.
Solution:
Order special contactor version without overvoltage damping. (on request)
W LSDH VACUUM CONTACTORS, 3-POLE, 335 ... 450 kW OVERVI EW
Page
73
W LSDH VACUUM CONTACTORS, 3-POLE, 335 ... 450 kW
Contactor Type LSDH6 and LSDH8
Rated data of the auxiliary contacts Acc. to IEC 60947-5-1 (VDE 0660 Part 200)
i
V 690
(degree of pollution 3)
Continuous thermal current A 10
I
th
=Rated operational current I
e
/AC-12
AC load
e
/AC-15/AC-14
e
24 V A 10
110 V A 10
125 V A 10
220 V A 6
230 V A 5.6
380 V A 4
400 V A 3.6
500 V A 2.5
660 V A 2.5
690 V A 2.3
DC load
e
/DC-12
e
24 V A 10
60 V A 10
110 V A 3.2
125 V A 2.5
220 V A 0.9
440 V A 0.33
600 V A 0.22
e
/DC-13
e
24 V A 10
60 V A 5
110 V A 1.14
125 V A 0.98
220 V A 0.48
440 V A 0.13
600 V A 0.07
CSA and UL rated data for the auxiliary contacts
Rated voltage V AC, 600
max.
Switching capacity A 600, P 600
Page
74
The contact endurance for utilization category AC-12 or AC-15/AC-14 depends mainly on
the breaking current. It is assumed that the operating mechanisms are switched randomly,
i.e. not synchronized with the phase angle of the supply system.
LSDH6 and LSDH8 contactors at 230 V AC
LSDH6 and LSDH8 contactors
Legend for the diagrams:
P
N
I
a
= Breaking current
I
e
Contact erosion indication with LSDH6 and LSDH8 vacuum contactors
The contact erosion of the vacuum interrupters can be checked during operation with the help of 3 white double slides on the contactor base.
If the distance indicated by one of the double slides is < 0.5 mm while the contactor is in the closed position, the vacuum interrupter must be replaced. To ensure maximum reliability, it is rec-
ommended to replace all 3 vacuum interrupters.
4
3
2
10
8
6
4
3
2
10
8
6
4
3
2
10
7
6
5
10 2 3 4 6 8 10 2 3 4 6 8 10 2 3 4 6 8 10 2
-2 -1 0 1
( A ) I
a
O
p
e
r
a
t
i
n
g

LSDH6 LSDH8
Page
75
Contactor Type LSDH6 LSDH8
Size 14 14
General data
Permissible mounting position, AC operation and DC operation
installation instructions
1) 2)
surface.
cycles
Electrical endurance Operating
3)
cycles
i
(degree of pollution 3) kV 1
imp
kV 8
Safe isolation between the coil and the main contacts kV 1
Shock resistance
Rectangular pulse AC operation g/ms 8.1/5 and 4.7/10 9.5/5 and 5.7/10
DC operation g/ms 9/5 and 5.7/10 8.6/5 and 5.1/10
Sine pulse AC operation g/ms 12.8/5 and 7.4/10 13.5/5 and 7.8/10
DC operation g/ms 14.4/5 and 9.1/10 13.5/5 and 7.8/10
Conductor cross-sections See Conductor Cross-Sections page 78
4)
Main circuit
Fuse links, gL/gG
Weld-free
5)
A 400 500
Auxiliary circuit
k
1kA)
Or miniature circuit breakers with C characteristic (I
k
< 400 A) A 10
1)
To easily replace the laterally mounted auxiliary switches it is recommended to maintain a minimum distance of 30 mm between the contactors.
2)
If mounted at a 90 angle (conducting paths are horizontally above each other), the switching frequency is reduced by 80 % compared with the normal values.
3)
See page before Endurance of the auxiliary contacts.
4)
See first page of chapter Technical Specifications LSDH vacuum contactors Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC).
5)
22, 5 22, 5
90 90
Page
76
Size 14 14
Control
Magnetic coil operating range 0.8 x U
s
min ... 1.1 x U
s
max
s
)
AC operation, U
s
max - Closing VA/p.f. 1850/1 950/0.98
- Closed VA/p.f. 49/0.15 30.6/0.31
AC operation, Us min - Closing VA/p.f. 1200/1 600/0.98
- Closed VA/p.f. 13.5/0.47 12.9/0.43
DC economy circuit1) - Closing at 24 V W 1010 960
- Closed W 28 20.6
Operating times at 0,8 ... 1.1 x U
s
(Values apply to cold and warm coil)
AC operation - Closing delay ms 70 ... 120 (22 ... 65)
2)
80 ... 120
- Opening delay ms 70 ... 100 70 ... 80
DC economy circuit - Closing delay ms 76 ... 110 86 ... 280
- Opening delay ms 50 19 ... 25
Arcing time ms 10 ... 15 10
Operating times at 1.0 x U
s
AC operation - Closing delay ms 80 ... 100 (30 ... 45)
2)
85 ... 100
- Opening delay ms 70 ... 100 70
DC economy circuit - Closing delay ms 80 ... 90 90 ... 125
- Opening delay ms 50 19 ... 25
Minimum command duration Standard ms 120 120
for closing Reduced make-time ms 90 --
Minimum interval time between two ON commands ms 100 300
1)
At 24 V DC; for further voltages, deviations of up to 10 % are possible.
2)
Values in brackets apply to contactors with reduced operating times.
Page
77
Size 14 14
Main circuit
AC capacity
e
at 40 C up to 690 V A 700 910
at 55 C up to 690 V A 630 850
at 55 C up to 1000 V A 450 800
Rated power for AC loads 230 V kW 240 323
with p.f. = 0.95 at 55C 400 V kW 415 558
500 V kW 545 735
690 V kW 720 970
1000 V kW 780 1385
Minimum conductor cross-sections for loads at 40C mm 2 x 240 I
e
800 A: 2 x 60 x 5 (Cu busbars)
with Ie at 55C mm 2 x 185 I
e
< 800 A: 2 x 240
e
up to 690 V A 630 820
1000 V A 435 580
Rated power for slipring or squirrel-cage at 230 V kW 200 260
motors at 50 Hz and 60 Hz 400 V kW 347 450
500 V kW 434 600
690 V kW 600 800
1000 V kW 600 800
a
= 6 x I
e
)
Rated operational current Ie up to 690 V A 610 690
Rated power for squirrel-cage motors with 50 at 400 V kW 355 400
Hz and 60 Hz
e
up to 690 V A 300 360
1000 V A 210 250
Rated power for squirrel-cage motors at 230 V kW 97 110
with 50 Hz and 60 Hz 400 V kW 168 191
500 V
1)
kW 210 250
690 V
1)
kW 278 335
1000 V
1)
A 290 350
e
up to 400 V
For inrush current n = 20 A 513 675
For inrush current n = 30 A 342 450
Rating P
For inrush current n = 20 230 V kVA 195 256
400 V kVA 338 445
500 V kVA 444 584
690 V kVA 586 771
1000 V kVA 752 1003
For inrush current n = 30
2)
230 V kVA 130 171
400 V kVA 226 297
500 V kVA 296 389
690 V kVA 390 514
1000 V kVA 592 778
Utilization category AC-6b,
switching low-inductance (low-loss, metallized dielectric)
AC capacitors
e
up to 400 V A 433
Rated power for single capacitors at 230 V kvar 175
at 50 and 60 Hz 400 V kvar 300
500 V kvar 400
690 V kvar 300
Rated power for banks of capacitors (minimum at 230 V kvar 145
inductance is 6 H between capacitors connected 400 V kvar 250
in parallel) at 50 and 60 Hz 500 V kvar 333
690 V kvar 250
1)
Max. permissible rated operational current I
e
/AC-4 = I
e
/AC-3 up to 500 V, for reduced contact endurance and reduced switching frequency.
2)
For deviating inrush current factors x, the power must be recalculated as follows: P
x
= P
n30
.
30/x.
Page
78
Size 14 14
Main circuit
AC capacity
Short-time current carrying capacity (5 ... 30 s)
CLASS 5 and 10 A 630 820
CLASS 15 A 630 662
CLASS 20 A 536 572
CLASS 25 A 479 531
CLASS 30 A 441 500
Thermal current-carrying capacity 10-s-current
1)
A 5040 7000
e
/AC-3 /690 V W 45 70
Switching frequency
Contactors without overload relays No-load switching frequency AC 1/h 2000 1000
No-load switching frequency DC 1/h 1000 1000
AC-1 1/h 700 700
AC-2 1/h 200 200
AC-3 1/h 500 500
AC-4 1/h 150 150
Contactors with overload relays (mean value) 1/h 15 15
Busbar connections
- finely stranded with cable lug mm 50 ... 240 50 ... 240
- stranded with cable lug mm 70 ... 240 50 ... 240
- solid or stranded AWG 2/0 ... 500 MCM 2/0 ... 500 MCM
- connecting bar (max. width) mm 50 60 (Ue 690 V)
50 (Ue > 690 V)
Terminal screw M10 x 30 M12 x 40
- tightening torque Nm 14 ... 24 (124 ... 210 lb.in) 20 ... 35 (177 ... 310 lb.in)
With box terminal (on request)
- connectable copper bars
- width mm 15 ... 25 15 ... 38
- max. thickness mm 1 x 26 or 2 x 11 1 x 46 or 2 x 18
- terminal screw A/F 6 (hexagon socket) A/F 8 (hexagon socket)
- tightening torque Nm 25 ... 40 (221 ... 354 lb.in) 35 ... 50 (266 ... 443 lb.in)
Solid mm 2 x (0.5 ... 1)
2)
/2 x (1 ... 2.5)
2)
Finely stranded with end sleeve mm 2 x (0.5 ... 1)
2)
/2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)
2)
Pin-end connector to DIN 46231 mm 2 x (1 ... 1.5)
Solid or stranded AWG 2 x (18 ... 12)
Tightening torque Nm 0.8 ... 1.4 (7 ... 12 lb.in)
Uninterrupted current Open and enclosed A 630 820
Rated power for induction motors at at 200 V hp 231 290
60 Hz
230 V hp 266 350
460 V hp 530 700
575 V hp 664 860
NEMA/EEMAC ratings
SIZE hp 6 7
Uninterrupted current Open A 600 820
Enclosed A 540 810
Rated power for induction motors at at 200 V hp 150 --
60 Hz 230 V hp 200 300
460 V hp 400 600
575 V hp 400 600
1)
2)
If two different conductor cross-sections are connected to one clamping point, both cross-sections must lie in the range specified. If identical crosssections are used, this restriction does not
apply.
Page
79
W LSR CONTACTORS FOR SWITCHING RESISTIVE LOADS OVERVI EW
W AC OPERATI ON
EN60947-4-1 (VDE0660 Part102).The contactors are suitable for use in any climate. They are finger-safe according to
EN50274. The accessories for the 3-pole ALEA contactors can also be used for the 4-pole versions.
W FUNCTI ON
Isolating systems with ungrounded or poorly grounded neutral conductors
System transfers when alternative AC power supplies are used
As contactors, e.g.for variable-speed operating mechanisms which only have to carry current and not switch
W I NTEGRATI ON
W MOUNTABLE AUXI LI ARY CONTACTS
Size 00
4 auxiliary contacts (according to EN50005)
Size 0
Maximum 2 auxiliary contacts (either laterally mounted or snapped onto the top).
Size 23
Maximum 4 auxiliary contacts (either laterally mounted or snapped onto the top)
W CONTACTOR ASSEMBLY WI TH MECHANI CAL I NTERLOCK
The 4-pole LSR contactors with 4NO contacts as the main contacts are suitable for making contactor assemblies with a
mechanical interlock, e.g.for system transfers.
Size 00
Contactor assemblies can be constructed from two LSRD contactors in conjunction with mechanical interlocks and two
connecting clips (Order No.: LSZDW002).
Size 0
When constructing 4-pole contactor assemblies from two LSR0 contactors, the fourth pole of the left contactor must
always be moved to the left side. If the laterally mountable LSZ0W002 mechanical interlock is used, the contactor
assembly is connected with LSZ0W004 (2 pcs.).
Sizes 2 and 3
Contactor assemblies can be constructed from two LSR2 or two LSR3 contactors in conjunction with the laterally mount-
able LSZ0W002 mechanical interlock and the LSZ2W002 for size 2 or LSZ3W002 for size 3.
Page
80
W LSR CONTACTORS FOR SWITCHING RESISTIVE LOADS (AC-1)
4-POLE, 4 NO, 18 ... 140 A
Contactor Type LSRD18 LSRD22 LSR035 LSR040 LSR260 LSR311 LSR314
Size 00 0 2 3 3
General data
1)
Mechanical endurance Operating 30 million 10 million
cycles
Electrical endurance at I
e
/AC-1 Operating Approx. 0.5 million
cycles
i
V 690
Permissible ambient temperature During operation C 25 ... +60
During storage C 55 ... +80
Degree of protection Device Operating IP20 IP20
Acc. to EN 60947-1, Appendix C Connection range cycles IP00
Short-circuit protection of contactors without thermal overload relays
Main circuit
Fuse links, Type of coordination 1
1)
A 35 63 160 250 250
gL/gG operational class Type of coordination 2
1)
A 20 25/35 63 125 160
LV HRC, DIAZED,
NEOZED
- acc. to IEC 60947-4-1/ Weld-free A 10 16 50 63 100
EN 60947-4-1
Control
AC at 50 Hz 0.8 ... 1.1 x U
s
AC at 60 Hz 0.85 ...1.1 x U
s
DC at 50 C 0.8 ... 1.1 x U
s
DC at 60 C 0.85 ... 1.1 x U
s
AC/DC 0.8 ... 1.1 x U
s
Power consumption of the magnetic coils
(when coil is cold and 1.0 x U
s
)
AC operation, 50 Hz Closing VA 61 145 270
P.f. VA 0.82 0.79 0.68
Closed VA 7.8 12.5 22
P.f. VA 0.24 0.36 0.27
AC operation, 50/60 Hz Closing VA 26.5/24.3 64/63 170/155 298/274
P.f. 0.79/0.75 0.82/0.74 0.76/0.72 0.72/0.62
Closed VA 4.4/3.4 8.4/6.8 15/11.8 27/20
P.f. 0.27/0.27 0.24/0.28 0.35/0.38 0.29/0.31
DC operation Closing W 3.3 5.6 13.3 15
= Closed
s
2)
DC operation Closing delay ms 25 ... 100 30 ... 90 50 ... 110 110 ... 200
Opening delay ms 7 ... 10 13 ... 40 15 ... 30 14 ... 20
AC operation Closing delay ms 8 ... 35 6 ... 30 4 ... 35 20 ... 50
Opening delay ms 4 ... 30 13 ... 25 10 ... 30 10 ... 25
Arcing time ms 10 ... 15 10 ... 15 10 ... 15 10 ... 15
Main circuit
AC capacity
Utilization category AC-1, switching resistive loads
e
at 40 C, up to 690 V A 18 22 35 40 60 110 140
at 60 C, up to 690 V A 16 20 30 35 55 100 120
Rated power for AC loads at 230 V kW 7 8.5 12.5 15 23 42 53
P.f. = 0.95 (at 40 C) 400 V kW 12 14.5 22 26 39 72 92
Minimum conductor cross-section at 40 C mm 2.5 2.5 10 10 16 50 50
for loads with I
e
at 60 C mm 2.5 2.5 10 10 16 50 50
e
at 60C, up to 400 V A 9 12 17 25 26 -- --
Rated power of slipring at 230 V kW 3 3 4 5.5 5.5 -- --
or squirrel-cage motors 400 V kW 4 5.5 7.5 11 11 -- --
at 50 Hz and 60 Hz
1)
In accordance with the corresponding 3-pole LSD contactors.
2)
With size S00, DC operation: Operating times at 0.85 ... 1.1 x U
s
.
Page
81
4-POLE, 4 NO, 18 ... 140 A
Contactor Type LSRD18 LSRD22 LSR035 LSR040
Size 00 0
Main circuit
DC capacity
Utilization category DC-1, switching resistive loads (L/R 1 ms)
e
(at 40 C)
60 V A 18 22 20
110 V A 2.1 2.1 4.5
220 V A 0.8 0.8 1
440 V A 0.6 0.6 0.4
60 V A 18 22 35
110 V A 12 12 35
220 V A 1.6 1.6 5
440 V A 0.8 0.8 1
60 V A 18 22 35
110 V A 18 22 35
220 V A 18 22 35
440 V A 1.3 1.3 2.9
60 V A 18 22 35
110 V A 18 22 35
220 V A 18 22 35
440 V A 1.3 1.3 2.9
Utilization category DC-3/DC-5
e
(at 40 C)
60 V A 0.5 0.5 5
110 V A 0.15 0.15 2.5
220 V A -- -- 1
440 V A -- -- 0.09
60 V A 5 5 35
110 V A 0.35 0.35 15
220 V A -- -- 3
440 V A -- -- 0.27
60 V A 18 20 35
110 V A 18 20 35
220 V A 1.5 1.5 10
440 V A 0.2 0.2 0.6
60 V A 18 20 35
110 V A 18 20 35
220 V A 1.5 1.5 35
440 V A 0.2 0.2 0.6
Maximum breaking current AC
e.g. for isolation of load distributions
50/60 Hz 400 V A 72 96 200
Page
82
4-POLE, 4 NO, 18 ... 140 A
Contactor Type LSR260 LSR311 LSR314
Size 2 3 3
Main circuit
DC capacity
Utilization category DC-1, switching resistive loads (L/R 1 ms)
e
(at 40 C)
60 V A 23 23 60
110 V A 4.5 4.5 9
220 V A 1 1 2
440 V A 0.4 0.4 0.6
60 V A 45 70 80
110 V A 45 70 80
220 V A 5 5 10
440 V A 1 1 1.8
60 V A 45 70 80
110 V A 45 70 80
220 V A 45 70 80
440 V A 2.9 2.9 4.5
60 V A 45 70 80
110 V A 45 70 80
220 V A 45 70 80
440 V A 2.9 2.9 4.5
Utilization category DC-3/DC-5
e
(at 40 C)
60 V A 6 6 6.5
110 V A 2.5 2.5 2.5
220 V A 1 1 1
440 V A 0.1 0.15 0.15
60 V A 45 70 80
110 V A 25 70 80
220 V A 5 7 7
440 V A 0.27 0.42 0.42
60 V A 45 70 80
110 V A 45 70 80
220 V A 25 35 35
440 V A 0.6 0.8 0.8
60 V A 45 70 80
110 V A 45 70 80
220 V A 45 70 80
440 V A 0.6 0.8 0.8
Maximum breaking current AC
e.g. for isolation of load distributions
50/60 Hz 400 V A 400 520 760
Page
83
W LSH AUXILIARY CONTACTORS, 4-POLE
Contactor Type LSH
Size 00
The contactors are designed for operation AC and DC operation
on a vertical mounting surface.
Upright mounting position AC operation
Special version required
DC operation Standard version
Positively-driven operation of contacts in contactor relays
LSH: Explanations:
Yes, in the basic unit and the auxiliary contact block as well as between the There is positively-driven operation if it is ensured that the NC and NO
basic unit and the snap-on auxiliary contact block (removable) acc. to: contacts cannot be closed at the same time.
ZH 1/457
EN 60947-5-1, Appendix L ZH1/457
Safety rules for control units on power-operated presses in the metalworking industry.
EN 60947-5-1, Appendix L
Low-voltage controlgear, control equipment, and switching elements.
Special requirements for positively-driven contacts
SUVA
Accident prevention regulations of the Schweizer Unfallverhtungsanstalt
(Swiss Institute for Accident Insurance)
Contact reliability
Contact reliability at 17 V, 1 mA acc. to EN 60947-5-4 Frequency of contact faults <10
8
, i.e. <1 fault per 100 million operating cycles
Contact endurance for AC-15/AC-14 and DC-13 utilization categories
The contact endurance is mainly dependent on the breaking current. It is assumed that the
operating mechanisms are switched randomly, i.e. not synchronized with the phase angle of
the supply system.
If magnetic circuits other than the contactor coil systems or solenoid valves are present,
e.g. magnetic brakes, protective measures for the load circuits are necessary.
RC elements and freewheel diodes would be suitable as protective measures.
The characteristic curves apply to:
LSH auxiliary contactors
LSZDH5 and LSZD05 auxiliary contact blocks
Diagram legend:
I
a
= Breaking current
I
e
1)
Snap-on auxiliary contact blocks: Ie/DC-13 max. 6 A.
22, 5 22, 5 360
Page
84
Contactor Type LSHD
Size 00
Basic units and auxiliary contact blocks
Rated control supply voltage V AC max. 600
Rated voltage V AC 600
Switching capacity A 600, Q 600
Uninterrupted current at 240 V AC A 10
General data
cycles
Basic unit with snap-on auxiliary Operating 10 million
contact block cycles
Solid-state compatible auxiliary Operating 5 million
contact block cycles
i
imp
kV 6
Safe isolation between the coil and the contacts in the basic unit V 400
Permissible ambient temperature During operation C 25 ... +60
Shock resistance
Rectangular pulse AC/DC operation g/ms 10/5 and 5/10
Sine pulse AC/DC operation g/ms 15/5 and 8/10
Screw terminals Auxiliary conductor and coil terminals Screw terminals
(1 or 2 conductors can be connected) Solid mm 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5) 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5) acc. to IEC 60947; max. 2 x (1 ... 4)
Finely stranded with end sleeve mm 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5) 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)
AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG 2 x (20 ... 16) 2 x (18 ... 14) 1 x 12
Terminal screws M3
Cage Clamp terminals (on request) Auxiliary conductor and coil terminals Cage Clamp terminals
k
1 kA)
Fuse links, gL/gG operational class
- DIAZED A 10
- NEOZED A 10
Or miniature circuit breakers with C characteristic A 6
k
< 400 A)
An insulation stop must be used for conductor cross-sections 1 mm.
Maximum external diameter of the conductor insulation: 3.6 mm.
Page
85
Contactor Type LSHD
Size 00
Control
AC operation at 50 Hz 0.8 ... 1.1 x U
s
at 60 Hz 0.85 ... 1.1 x U
s
DC operation at +50 C 0.8 ... 1.1 x U
s
at +60 C 0.85 ... 1.1 x U
s
Power consumption of the magnetic coils
(when coil is cold and 1.0 x Us)
AC operation, 50 Hz Closing VA/p.f. 27/0.8
Closed VA/p.f. 4.6/0.27
AC operation, 60 Hz Closing VA/p.f. 24/0.75
Closed VA/p.f. 3.5/0.27
Permissible residual current of the electronics
(with 0 signal)
for AC operation < 3 mA x (230 V/U
s
)
for DC operation <10 mA x (24 V/U
s
)
Operating times
1)
(Total break time = OFF-delay + Arcing time)
AC operation Values apply with coil in cold state
Closing and at operating temperature for
operating range
ON-delay of NO contact 0.8 ... 1.1 x U
s
ms 8 ... 35
1.0 x U
s
ms 10 ... 25
OFF-delay of NC contact 0.8 ... 1.1 x U
s
ms 6 ... 20
1.0 x U
s
ms 7 ... 20
Opening
OFF-delay of NO contact 0.8 ... 1.1 x U
s
ms 4 ... 30
1.0 x U
s
ms 5 ... 30
ON-delay of NC contact 0.8 ... 1.1 x U
s
ms 5 ... 30
1.0 x U
s
ms 7 ... 20
DC operation
Closing
ON-delay of NO contact 0.8 ... 1.1 x U
s
ms 25 ... 100
1.0 x U
s
ms 30 ... 50
OFF-delay of NC contact 0.8 ... 1.1 x U
s
ms 20 ... 90
1.0 x U
s
ms 25 ... 45
Opening
OFF-delay of NO contact 0.8 ... 1.1 x U
s
ms 7 ... 10
1.0 x U
s
ms 7 ... 9
ON-delay of NC contact 0.8 ... 1.1 x U
s
ms 13 ... 16
1.0 x U
s
ms 13 ... 15
Dependence of the switching frequency z' on the operational current I and
operational voltage U
z = z
.
I
e
/I
.
(U
e
/U)
1.5 .
1/h
1)
The OFF-delay of the NO contact and the ON-delay of the NC contact are increased if the contactor coils are attentuated against voltage peaks (noise suppression diode 6 to 10 times;
diode assemblies 2 to 6 times, varistor +2 to 5 ms).
Page
86
Contactor Type LSHD
Size 00
Load side
e
AC-12 A 10
AC-15/AC-14 up to 230 V A 6
s
400 V A 3
500 V A 2
690 V A 1
DC-12
s
1 conducting path 24 V A 10
60 V A 6
110 V A 3
220 V A 1
440 V A 0.3
600 V A 0.15
2 conducting paths in series 24 V A 10
60 V A 10
110 V A 4
220 V A 2
440 V A 1.3
600 V A 0.65
60 V A 10
110 V A 10
220 V A 3.6
440 V A 2.5
600 V A 1.8
DC-13
s
1 conducting path 24 V A 10
1)
60 V A 2
110 V A 1
220 V A 0.3
440 V A 0.14
600 V A 0.1
60 V A 3.5
110 V A 1.3
220 V A 0.9
440 V A 0.2
600 V A 0.1
60 V A 4.7
110 V A 3
220 V A 1.2
440 V A 0.5
600 V A 0.26
Switching frequency z
In operating cycles/h AC-12/DC-12 h
1
1000
during normal duty AC-15/AC-14 h
1
1000
for utilization category DC-13 h
1
1000
No-load switching frequency h
1
10000
Dependence of the switching frequency z' on the operational current I and
operational voltage U
z = z
.
I
e
/I
.
(U
e
/U)
1.5 .
1/h
1)
Snap-on auxiliary contact blocks: 6 A.
Page
87
W LSH AUXILIARY CONTACTORS FOR PLC-USE OVERVI EW
W DC OPERATI ON
IEC 60947 and EN 60947 (VDE 0660).
The LSH auxiliary contactors for switching auxiliary circuits are tailored to the special requirements of working with electron-
ic controls. The LSHD ... G/N auxiliary contactors cannot be extended with auxiliary contact blocks.
WFUNCTI ON
No auxiliary contact blocks can be snapped onto these auxiliary contactors. They have a low power consumption, an extended
magnetic coil operating range and an integrated surge suppressor for damping opening surges (exception: LSHD ... N).
WTECHNI CAL SPECI FI CATI ONS
All technical specifications not mentioned in the table below are identical to those of the LSH auxiliary contactors.
Contactor Type LSHD ... N LSH ... G
Size 00 00
Magnetic coil operating range 0.7 ... 1.25 x U
s
Power consumption of the magnetic coil (for cold coil)
Closing = closed
At U
s
= 17 V W 1.2
At U
s
= 24 V W 2.3
At U
s
= 30 V W 3.6
Permissible residual current <10 mA x (24 V/U
s
)
of the electronics for 0 signal
Overvoltage configuration of the magnetic coil No overvoltage damping With diode integrated
Operating times
Closing at 17 V
- ON-delay NO ms 40 ... 120
- OFF-delay NC ms 30 ... 70
At 24 V
At 30 V
Closing at 17 ... 30 V
- OFF-delay NO ms 7 ... 17 40 ... 60
- ON-delay NC ms 22 ... 30 60 ... 70
Upright mounting position Please ask
Page
88
W LSS CONTACTORS FOR PLC-USE OVERVI EW
W DC OPERATI ON
IEC 60947, EN 60947 (VDE 0660).
The LSS contactors for switching motors are tailored to the special requirements of working with electronic controls.
The LSSD contactors cannot be extended with auxiliary contacts or contact blocks.
Two single-pole auxiliary contacts can be fitted to the LSS0 contactors.
WFUNCTI ON
LSS contactors have a low power consumption, an extended operating range of the magnetic coil and an integrated surge
suppressor for damping opening surges.
All technical specifications not mentioned in the table below are identical to those of the LSDD and LSD0 contactors for
switching motors. The LSSD contactors cannot be extended with auxiliary contacts or contact blocks. Two single-pole auxil-
iary contacts LSZ0D010/D001 can be fitted to the LSS0 contactor (see Accessories).
Contactor Type LSSD ... G LSS0 ... H
Size 00 0
General data
Mechanical endurance Operating 30 million 10 million
cycles
Control
Magnetic coil operating range 0.7 ... 1.25 x U
s
Power consumption of the at U
s
17 V W 1.2 2.1
magnetic coil 24 V W 2.3 4.2
(for cold coil) 30 V W 3.6 6.6
Closing = closed
Permissible residual current < 10 mA x (24 V/U
s
) < 6 mA x (24 V/U
s
)
of the electronics (for 0 signal)
Overvoltage configuration of the magnetic coil With diode With varistor
Operating times of the contactors for PLC-use
Closing
- at 17 V ON-delay NO ms 40 ... 120 93 ... 270
OFF-delay NC ms 30 ... 70 83 ... 250
- at 24 V ON-delay NO ms 30 ... 60 64 ... 87
OFF-delay NC ms 20 ... 40 55 ... 78
- at 30 V ON-delay NO ms 20 ... 50 53 ... 64
OFF-delay NC ms 15 ... 30 45 ... 56
Opening at 17... 30 V OFF-delay NO ms 40 ... 60 18 ... 19
ON-delay NC ms 60 ... 70 24 ... 25
U
Page
89
WACCESSORI ES FOR LSD AND LSH AUXI LI ARY CONTACTORS OVERVI EW
W SNAP-ON AUXI LI ARY CONTACT BLOCKS
The auxiliary contact blocks and the maximum number of contacts that can be mounted are described in the sections
Contactors and Auxiliary Contactors.
Operation
In the case of the versions for rated control supply voltages of 110 V and 230 V, either AC voltage or DC voltage can be applied
on the line side, whereas the variant for 24 V is designed for DC operation only. A DC-operated contactor is connected to the
output in accordance with the input voltage that is applied. The mean value of the OFF-delay is approximately 1.5 times the
specified minimum time.
(also for Cage Clamp terminals on request) size 00, 0, 2, 3, 6 to 12
All LSD contactors and LSH auxiliary contactors can be retrofitted with RC elements or varistors for damping opening surges
in the coil. Diodes or diode assemblies can be used. The surge suppressors are plugged onto the front of size 00 contactors.
Space is provided for them next to a snap-on auxiliary contact block. With all size 0 to 3 contactors, varistors, RC elements and
diode assemblies can be plugged on directly at the coil terminals, either on the top or underneath. The plug-in direction of the
diodes and diode assemblies is determined by a coding device. Auxiliary contactors are supplied either without overvoltage
damping or with a varistor or diode connected as standard, according to the version.
Note: The OFF-delay times of the NO contacts and the ON-delay times of the NC contacts increase if the contactor coils are
damped against voltage peaks (noise suppression diode 6 to 10 times; diode assemblies 2 to 6 times, varistor +2 to 5 ms).
W SOLDER PI N ADAPTERS
The solder pin adapters for the size 00 contactors are available in version for:
contactors with one integrated auxiliary contact
W SEALABLE COVERS FOR SI ZES 00 TO 12 (ON REQUEST)
When contactors and auxiliary contactors are used in safety-oriented applications, it must be ensured that it is impossible to operate
the contactors manually. For ALEA contactors there are sealable covers available for this purpose on requets; these prevent
accidental manual operation. These are transparent molded-plastic caps with a bracket that enables the contactor to be sealed.
WMECHANI CAL LATCHI NG BLOCK
Technical specifications according to EN 61812-1 (VDE 0435 Part 2021)
Contactor Type LSZ00113
Mechanical latching block for the LSD0 and LSD2 contactors
i
V 690
Mechanical endurance with LSD0 3 million
(operating cycles) with LSD2 50000
Permissible ambient temperature
During operation C 25 ... +60
Degree of protection acc. to EN 60947-1, Appendix C IP20
Operating range of the magnetic coil 0.85 ... 1.1 x U
s
at AC 50/60 Hz and DC
Power consumption of the magnetic coils of the unlocking magnet W Approx. 4
(for cold coil and 1.0 x U
s
)
AC and DC operation
Command duration for de-energizing
AC operation ms 18 ... 31
DC operation ms 18 ... 26
Solid mm 2 x (0.5 ... 2.5); 1 x 4
AWG 2 x 14; 1 x 12
Finely stranded with end sleeve mm 2 x (0.5 ... 2.5); 1 x 2.5
AWG 2 x 14; 1 x 12
Tightening torque of the terminal screws Nm 0.8 ... 1.1
lb.in 7 ... 9.5
Page
90
W LSK CAPACITOR SWITCHING CONTACTORS OVERVI EW
W AC OPERATI ON
IEC 60947, EN 60947 (VDE 0660)
The contactors are suitable for use in any climate. They are finger-safe according to EN 50274. The LSK capacitor contactors
are special version of the size 00 to 3 ALEA contactors. The capacitors are precharged by means of the mounted leading NO
contacts and resistors; only then do the main contacts close. This prevents disturbances in the network and welding of the
contactors. Only discharged capacitors are permitted to be switched on with capacitor contactors. The auxiliary contact block
which is snapped onto the capacitor contactor contains the three leading NO contacts and in the case of 00 one standard NC
contact and in the case of 0 and 3 one standard NO contact, which is unassigned. Size 00 also contains another unassigned
NO contact in the basic unit. In addition, a 2-pole auxiliary contact block can be mounted laterally on the LSK3 capacitor
contactors (1 NO + 1 NC versions); type LSZ0D711. The fitting of auxiliary switches for LSKD and LSK0 is not expandable. For
the capacitor switching capacity of the basic LSD contactor version, see Technical specifications.
All technical specifications not mentioned in the table below are identical to those of the LSDD contactors for size 00, to those
of the LSD0 contactors for size 0 and to those of the LSD3 contactors for size 3.
Contactor Type LSKD17B3 LSK03213 LSK36213
Size 00 0 3
Capacitor rating at 230 V, 50/60 Hz kvar 3 7.5 3.5 15 3.5 30
rated power 400 V, 50/60 Hz kvar 5 12.5 6 25 5 50
(utilization category AC-6b) 525 V, 50/60 Hz kvar 7.5 15 7.8 30 7.5 60
690 V, 50/60 Hz kvar 10 21 10 42 10 84
Auxiliary contacts mounted (unassigned) 1 NO + 1 NC 1 NO
Auxiliary contacts mountable (lateral), not for sizes 00 and 0 -- 2 NC + 2 NO or
1 NO + 1 NC
Magnetic coil operating range 0.8 1.1 x U
s
Max. switching frequency h
1
180 100
Electrical endurance Operating > 250000 > 150000 > 100000
cycles
Ambient temperature C 60
Standards IEC 60947/EN 60947 (VDE 0660)
Short-circuit protection 1.6 ... 2.2 x I
e
Screw terminals Main conductors Screw terminals
(1 or 2 conductors can be connected) Solid mm 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5); 2 x (1 ... 2.5);
2 x (0.75 ... 2.5) 2 x (2.5 ... 6)
Acc. to IEC 60947; Acc. to IEC 60947;
Max. 2 x (1 ... 4) Max. 1 x 10
1)
Finely stranded with end sleeve mm 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5); 2 x (1 ... 2.5);
2 x (0.75 ... 2.5) 2 x (2.5 ... 6)
1)
AWG cables
- solid AWG 2 x (20 ... 16) 2 x (16 ... 12)
- solid or stranded AWG 2 x (18 ... 14) 2 x (14 ... 10)
- stranded AWG 1 x 12 1 x 8
Terminal screws M3 M4 (Pozidriv size 2)
- tightening torque Nm 0.8 ... 1.2 2 ... 2.5
lb.in 7 ... 10.3 18 ... 22
Coil voltage
0.85 1.1 x UN 230 VAC; 50/60 Hz 230 VAC; 50 Hz 230 VAC; 50 Hz
1)
BEZ00116 feeder terminal for 25 mm
W MOUNTI NG I NSTRUCTI ONS
In the area of capacitor switching contactors, difficulty inflammable and self-extinguishing materials may be used only,
because abnormal temperatures within the area of the resistance spirals cannot be excluded.
Page
91
W LSK CAPACITOR CONTACTORS, 12.5 ... 50 kVAR
Contactor Type LSKD17B3 LSK03213 LSK36213
Size 00 0 3
Solid mm 2.5 ... 16
Stranded mm 4 ... 70
solid or stranded
Solid mm 2.5 ... 16
Stranded mm 10 ... 70
solid or stranded
Both clamping points Finely stranded with end sleeve mm Max. 2 x 35
connected Finely stranded without end sleeve mm Max. 2 x 35
Solid mm Max. 2 x 16
Stranded mm Max. 2 x 50
AWG cables, AWG 2 x (10 ... 1/0)
solid or stranded
Terminal screw M6 (hex. socket, A/F 4)
- tightening torque Nm 4 ... 6
lb.in 36 ... 53
Connection for drilled copper bars
1)
Max. width mm 10
Without box terminal with cable lugs
2)
Finely stranded with cable lug mm 10 ... 50
3)
(1 or 2 conductors can be connected) Stranded with cable lug mm 10 ... 70
3)
solid or stranded
Solid mm 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)
4)
; 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)
4)
;
2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)
4)
2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)
4)
0.75) acc. to IEC 60947;
acc. to IEC 60947; max. 2 x (0.75 ... 4)
max. 2 x (1 ... 4)
4)
;
2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)
4)
4)
;
solid or stranded 2 x (18 ... 14)
4)
; 1 x 12
Terminal screw M3
- tightening torque Nm 0.8 ... 1.2
lb.in 7 ... 10.3
Cage Clamp terminals (on request) Auxiliary conductors:
solid or stranded SD
1)
If bars larger than 12 x 10 mm are connected, a terminal cover is needed to comply with the phase clearance. (on request)
2)
When connecting conductors which are larger than 25 mm2, the terminal cover must be used to keep the phase clearance. (on request)
3)
Only with crimped cable lugs according to DIN 46234. Cable lug max. 20 mm wide.
4)
If two different conductor cross-sections are connected to one clamping point, both cross-sections must lie in the range specified. If identical crosssections are used, this restriction does not apply.
Page
92
W LA3K CAPACI TOR SWI TCHI NG CONTACTORS
W AC OPERATI ON
Contactors LA3K are suitable for switching low-inductive and low loss capacitors in capacitor banks (IEC70 and 831,
VDE 0560) without and with reactors. Capacitor switching contactors are fitted with early make contacts and damping
resistors, to reduce the value of make current <70 x Ie.
W OPERATI NG CONDI TI ONS
Capacitor switching contactors are protected against contact welding for a prospective making current of 200 x Ie.
W MOUNTI NG I NSTRUCTI ONS
In the area of capacitor switching contactors, difficulty inflammable and self-extinguishing materials may be used only,
because abnormal temperatures within the area of the resistance spirals cannot be excluded.
acc. to IEC 947-4-1, IEC 947-5-1, EN 60947-4-1, EN 60947-5-1, VDE 0660
Contactor Type LA3K1813 LA3K1823 LA3K2433 LA3K3233
Capacitor rating at 230 V, 50/60 Hz kvar 0 7 0 7 5 11 5 14
rated power 400 V, 50/60 Hz kvar 0 12.5 0 12.5 10 20 20 25
(utilization category AC-6b) 525 V, 50/60 Hz kvar 0 15 0 15 12 25 12 32
690 V, 50/60 Hz kvar 0 18 0 18 14 28 14 36
Auxiliary contacts mounted (unassigned) 1NO 1NC
Auxiliary contacts mountable snap on front 1NC/6A 1NC/6A
LA190135 LA190135
1NO/3A 1NO/3A 1NO/3A 1NO/3A
LA190100 LA190100 LA190100 LA190100
1NC/3A 1NC/3A 1NC/3A 1NC/3A
LA190101 LA190101 LA190101 LA190101
side mounted 1NO+1NC/3A 1NO+1NC/3A
LA190134 LA190134
Magnetic coil operating range -- -- -- --
1
120 120 120 120
Electrical endurance Operating 250000 250000 150000 150000
cycles
Rated operational current Ie at 50C A 14 18 14 18 14 28 14 36
at 60C A 14 18 14 18 14 28 14 36
Ambient temperature C 60 (90)
1)
60 (90)
1)
60 (90)
1)
60 (90)
1)
Standards IEC 947-4-1 / EN 60947-4-1 / VDE 0660
Short-circuit protection fuse gL/gG A 35 63 35 63 50 80 63 100
For contactors without thermal overload relay
1 cable per clamp solid or stranded mm 0.75 6 1.5 25
flexible mm 1 4 2.5 16
flexible with multicore cable end mm 0.75 4 1.5 16
2 cable per clamp solid or stranded mm 6 + (1 6) / 4 + (0.75 4) 16 + (2.5 6) / 10 + (4 10)
2.5 + (0.75 2.5) / 1.5 + (0.75 1.5) 6 + (4 6) / 4 + (2.5 4)
flexible mm 6 + (1.5 6) / 4 + (1 4) 16 + (2.5 6) / 10 + (4 10)
2.5 + (0.75 2.5) / 1.5 + (0.75 1.5) 6 + (4 6) / 4 + (2.5 4)
Cables per clamp 2 2
For main connector
1 cable per clamp solid AWG 18 10 16 10
flexible AWG 18 10 14 4
2 cable per clamp solid AWG 10 + (16 10) / 12 + (18 12) 10 + (16 10) / 12 + (18 12)
14 + (18 16) / 16 + (18 16) 14 + (18 16) / 16 + (18 16)
flexible AWG 10 + (14 10) / 12 + (18 12) 4 + (18 12) / 6 + (18 8)
14 + (18 14) / 16 + (18 16) 8 + (18 8) / 10 + (18 12)
Cables per clamp 2 2
Coil voltage
0.85 1.1 x UN 230 VAC; 50 Hz
Mechanical life AC operated S x 10
6
10 10
DC operated S x 10
6
10 10
Short time current 10 S current A 144 240
Power loss per pole at Ie / AC3 400V W 0.5 1.3
1)
With reduced control voltage range 0,9 up to 1,0 x US and with reduced rated current Ie/AC1 accordung to Ie/AC3
Page
93
acc. to IEC 947-4-1, IEC 947-5-1, EN 60947-4-1, EN 60947-5-1, VDE 0660
Contactor Type LA3K5044 LA3K6233 LA3K7433 LA3K9033 LA3K1133
Capacitor rating at 230 V, 50/60 Hz kvar 12 20 12 28 12 30 22 40 20 50
rated power 400 V, 50/60 Hz kvar 20 33.3 20 50 20 60 33 75 33 80
(utilization category AC-6b) 525 V, 50/60 Hz kvar 26 43 26 64 26 75 45 95 45 115
690 V, 50/60 Hz kvar 30 48 30 72 30 87 50 108 50 130
Auxiliary contacts mounted (unassigned) -- -- -- -- --
Auxiliary contacts mountable snap on front 1NC/6A
LA190135
1NO/3A 1NO/3A 1NO/3A 1NO/3A 1NO/3A
LA190100 LA190100 LA190100 LA190100 LA190100
1NC/3A 1NC/3A 1NC/3A 1NC/3A 1NC/3A
LA190101 LA190101 LA190101 LA190101 LA190101
side mounted 1NO+1NC/3A 1NO+1NC/3A 1NO+1NC/3A 1NO+1NC/3A 1NO+1NC/3A
LA190134 LA190134 LA190134 LA190134 LA190134
Magnetic coil operating range -- -- -- -- --
1
120 120 80 80 80
Electrical endurance Operating 150000 150000 120000 120000 120000
cycles
Rated operational current Ie at 50C A 30 48 30 72 30 108 50 115 50 144
at 60C A 30 48 30 72 30 78 50 108 50 130
Ambient temperature C 60 (90)
1)
60 (90)
1)
60 (90)
1)
60 (90)
1)
Standards IEC 947-4-1 / EN 60947-4-1 / VDE 0660
Short-circuit protection fuse gL/gG A 80 160 125 160 160 200 160 200 160 250
For contactors without thermal overload relay
1 cable per clamp solid or stranded mm 4 50
flexible mm 10 35
flexible with multicore cable end mm 6 35
2 cable per clamp top below
solid or stranded mm 50 + 4 / 35 + 6 / 25 + (6 16) 0.5 95 10 120
16 + (6 16) / 10 + (6 16)
flexible mm 50 + (4 10) / 35 + (4 16) 0.5 70 10 95
25 + (4 25) / 16 + (4 16)
Cables per clamp 2 1 + 1
For main connector
1 cable per clamp solid AWG 12 10
flexible AWG 10 0
2 cable per clamp top below
solid AWG 10 + (12 10) / 12 + 12 18 10 --
flexible AWG 1 + (12 10) / 2 + (8 12) 18 3 / 0 8 4 / 0
3 + (12 8) / 4 + (10 6)
Cables per clamp 2 1 + 1
Coil voltage
0.85 1.1 x UN 230 VAC; 50 Hz
6
10 10 10 10 5
DC operated S x 10
6
10 10 10 10 5
Short time current 10 S current A 360 504 592 680 880
Power loss per pole at Ie / AC3 400V W 2.2 3.9 5.5 4.3 6.0
1)
With reduced control voltage range 0,9 up to 1,0 x US and with reduced rated current Ie/AC1 accordung to Ie/AC3
Page
94
aacc. to IEC 947-4-1, IEC 947-5-1, EN 60947-4-1, EN 60947-5-1, VDE 0660
Mounted auxiliary contacts Type LA3K18 LA3K24,..32,..40 LA3K50,..62,..74 LA3K90,..115
Rated insulation voltage Ui
1)
V~ 690 -- -- --
Thermal rated current Ith to 690V
Ambient temperature 40C A 16 -- -- --
60C A 12 -- -- --
Utilization category AC15
Rated operational current Ie 220-240V A 12 -- -- --
380-415V A 4 -- -- --
440V A 4 -- -- --
500V A 3 -- -- --
660-690V A 1 -- -- --
Utilization category DC13
Rated operational current Ie 60V A 8 -- -- --
110V A 1 -- -- --
220V A 0.1 -- -- --
Short circuit protection
short-circuit current 1kA, contact welding not accepted
max. fuse size gL (gG) A 25 -- -- --
Control Circuit
Power consumption of coils
AC operated inrush VA 33-45 90-115 140-165 190-280
sealed VA 7-10 9-13 13-18 2,5-5
W 2.6-3 2.7-4 5.4-7 2.5-5
DC operated inrush W 75 140 200 190-280
sealed W 2 2 6 2,5-5
Operation range of coils
in multiples of control voltage Us AC operated 0.85-1.1 0.85-1.1 0.85-1.1 0.85-1.1
DC operated 0.8-1.1 0.8-1.1 0.8-1.1 0.8-1.1
Switching time
At control voltage Us 10%
2) 3)
AC operated make time ms 8-16 10-25 12-28 20-35
release time ms 5-13 8-15 8-15 35-50
arc duration ms 10-15 10-15 10-15 10-15
DC operated make time ms 8-12 10-20 12-23 20-35
release time ms 8-13 10-15 10-18 35-50
arc duration ms 10-15 10-15 10-15 10-15
Cable cross-section
Auxiliary connector solid mm 0.75-6 -- -- --
flexible mm 1-4 -- -- --
flexible with multicore cable end mm 0.75-4 -- -- --
Magnet coil solid mm 0.75-2.5 0.75-2.5 0.75-2.5 0.75-2.5
flexible mm 0.5-2.5 0.5-2.5 0.5-2.5 0.5-2.5
flexible with multicore cable end mm 0.5-1.5 0.5-1.5 0.5-1.5 0.5-1.5
Clamps per pole 2 2 2 2
Auxiliary connector solid AWG 18-10 -- -- --
flexible AWG 18-10 -- -- --
Magnet coil solid AWG 14-12 14-12 14-12 14-12
flexible AWG 18-12 18-12 18-12 18-12
Clamps per pole 2 2 2 2
Auxiliary contacts snap on or side mounted Type LA190135 LA190034 LA190100 LA190101
1 NC 1 NO+1 NC 1 NO 1 NC
AC15 230V A 6 3 3 3
AC15 400V A 4 2 2 2
AC1 690V A 25 10 2 2
1)
Suitable for: earthed-neutral systems, overvoltage category I to IV, pollution degree 3 (standard-industry): Uimp = 8kV. Data for other conditions on request
2) Total breaking time = release time + arc duration
3) Values for delay of the release time of the make contact and the make time of the break contact will be increased, if magnet coils are protected against voltage peaks (varistor, RC-unit,
diode-unit)
Page
95
W LSW REVERSI NG CONTACTOR ASSEMBLI ES OVERVI EW
The LSW reversing contactor assemblies can be ordered as follows:
Sizes 00 to 3
Fully wired and tested, with mechanical and electrical interlock. For assemblies with AC operation and 50/60 Hz, a dead
interval of 50 ms must be provided when used with voltages 500 V; a dead interval of 30 ms is recommend for use
with voltages 400 V. These dead times do not apply to assemblies with DC operation.
Sizes 00 to 12
For overload relays for motor protection, see Protection Equipment: Thermal overload relays. The LSW contactor
assemblies have screw terminals and are suitable for screwing or snapping onto 35 mm standard mounting rails.
W COMPLETE UNI TS UP TO SI ZE 3
The fully wired reversing contactor assemblies are suitable for use in any climate. They are finger-safe according to
EN 50274. The contactor assemblies consist of 2 contactors with the same power, with one NC contact in the basic unit.
The contactors are mechanically and electrically interlocked (NC contact interlock). For motor protection, LST thermal
overload relays for direct mounting or stand-alone installation must be ordered separately.
Rated data AC-2 and AC-3 at AC Included in complete unit
50 Hz 400 V Size Order No.
Rating Operational Contactor Mechanical Wiring set AC230V/50/60 HZ
current I
e
interlock
2)
Fully wired and tested
kW A contactor assemblies
3 7 00 LSDD07 -- LSZDW001
5)
LSWD0733
4 9 LSDD09 LSWD0933
5.5 12 LSDD12 LSWD1233
5.5 12 0 LSD012 LSZ0W002 LSZ0W001
6)
LSW01233
7.5 17 LSD017 LSW01733
11 25 LSD025 LSW02533
15 32 2 LSD232 LSZ0W002 LSZ2W001
7)
LSW23233
18.5 40 LSD240 LSW24033
22 50 LSD250 LSW25033
30 65 3 LSD365 LSZ0W002 LSZ3W001
7)
LSW36533
37 80 LSD380 LSW38033
45 95 LSD395 LSW39533
2)
Laterally mountable with two auxiliary contacts, one for each contactor.
5)
Wiring set contains: mechanical interlock; connecting clips for 2 contactors; wiring modules on the top and bottom.
6)
Wiring set contains: wiring modules on the top and bottom.
7)
Wiring set contains: 2 connecting clips for contactors; wiring modules on the top and bottom.
W COMPONENTS FOR CUSTOMER ASSEMBLY
For customer assembly of reversing contactor assemblies size 6, 10 and 12, following components are available.
Contactors, thermal overload relays, the mechanical interlock (as of size 0) and for momentary-contact operation
auxiliary contact blocks for latching must be ordered separately.
Wiring set for size 6 LSZ6W002
Wiring set for size 10 LSZEW001
Wiring set for size 12 LSZ6W001
Mechanical interlock for size 6, 10, 12 LSZ6W001
Page
96
W LSW REVERSI NG CONTACTOR ASSEMBLI ES FUNCTI ON
The operating times of the individual LSD contactors are rated in such a way that no overlapping of the contact making
and the arcing time between two contactors can occur on reversing, providing they are interlocked by way of their
auxiliary switches (NC contact interlock) and the mechanical interlock. For assemblies with AC operation and 50/60 Hz, a
dead interval of 50 ms must be provided when used with voltages 500 V. This dead times does not apply to assemblies
with DC operation. The operating times of the individual contactors are not affected by the mechanical interlock.
The following points should be noted:
Size 00
For maintained-contact operation:
Use contactors with an NC contact in the basic unit for the electrical interlock.
For momentary-contact operation:
Use contactors with an NC contact in the basic unit for the electrical interlock; in addition, an auxiliary contact block with
at least one NO contact for latching is required per contactor.
Sizes 0 to 3
For maintained-contact operation:
The contactors have no auxiliary contact in the basic unit; NC contacts for the electrical interlock are therefore integrated
in the mechanical interlock that can be mounted on the side of contactor (one contact each for the left and right-hand
contactors).
For momentary-contact operation:
Electrical interlock as for maintained-contact operation; for the purpose of latching an auxiliary contact with an NO
contact is additionally required for each contactor. This contact can be snapped onto the top of the contactors.
Alternatively, auxiliary contact blocks mounted on the side can be used; they must be fitted onto the outside of each
contactor.
Sizes 00 to 3
All contactor assemblies can be fitted with RC elements or varistors for damping opening surges in the coil.
As with the individual contactors, the surge suppressors can either be plugged onto the top of the contactors (size 00) or
fitted onto the coil terminals on the top or bottom (size 0 to 3).
WTECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
The technical specifications are identical to those of the LSD .. contactors.
The CSA and UL approvals only apply to the complete contactor assemblies and not to the individual parts for customer
assembly.
Page
97
These LSY contactor assemblies for wye-delta starting are designed for standard applications.
Note:
Contactor assemblies for wye-delta starting in special applications such as very heavy starting or wye-delta starting of
special motors must be customized. Help with designing such special applications is available.
W COMPLETE UNI TS UP TO SI ZE 3
The LSY contactor assemblies for wye-delta starting can be ordered as follows:
Sizes 00 to 3:
Fully wired and tested, with electrical interlock, dead interval of up to 10 s on reversing (size 00 with electrical and
mechanical interlocks)
A dead interval of 50 ms on reversing is already integrated in the time relay function. There is also a range of accessories
(auxiliary contact blocks, surge suppressors, etc.) that must be ordered separately.
For overload relays for motor protection, see "Thermal Overload Relays
The LSY contactor assemblies have screw terminals and are suitable for screwing or snapping onto 35 mm standard mounting
rails. Fully wired and tested LSY contactor assemblies have one unassigned NO contact which is mounted onto the front of the
K3 delta contactor. A timing relay is mounted onto the right side of sizes 00, 0 to 2 (7,5 kW, 11 kW and 22 kW).
Rated data Size
at AC 50 HZ 400 V
Rating Operational Motor Line/delta Star contactor WYE-Delta timer Order No.
current I
e
current contactor complete
kW A A 230 V 50/60 Hz
up to 7.5 17 17 00-00-00 LSDD1213 LSDD0713 LSZD0101 LSYD1733
up to 15 32 34 0-0-0 LSD02533 LSD01213 LSZD0101 LSY03233
up to 22 50 43 2-2-0 LSD23233 LSD02533 LSZD0101 LSY25033
W COMPONENTS FOR CUSTOMER ASSEMBLY
Installation kits with wiring modules and, if necessary, mechanical connectors are available for contactor assemblies for
wyedelta starting. Contactors, overload relays, wye-delta timers, auxiliary contacts for electrical interlock if required also
feeder terminals, mechanical interlocks (exception: In the case of the wiring set for size 00 contactor assemblies the
mechanical interlock between the delta contactor and the star contactor is included in the kit) and base plates must be
ordered separately.
The wiring sets for sizes 00 and 0 contain the top and bottom main conducting path connections between the line and delta
contactors (top) and between the delta and star contactors (bottom). In the case of sizes 2 to 12 only the bottom main con-
ducting path connection between the delta and star contactors is included in the wiring module, owing to the
larger conductor cross-section at the infeed.
WWYE-DELTA CONTACTOR ASSEMBLI ES OVERVI EW
Wiring set for single infeed size 00
1)
LSZDY001
Wiring set for single infeed size 0
2)
LSZ0Y001
Wiring set for single infeed size 2 LSZ2Y004
Star jumper for size 00 LSZDY002
Star jumper for size 0 LSZ0Y002
Star jumper for size 2 LSZ2Y005
Base plate for size 2/2/0 LSZ2Y001
Y-D timer - 20s LSZD0101
Y-D timer - 60s LSZD0102
1)
Wiring set contains: mechanical interlock, 3 connecting clips; wiring modules on the top (connection between line and delta contactor) and on the bottom (connection between delta and wye-
contactor); star jumper.
2)
Wiring set contains: 5 connecting clips; wiring modules on the top (connection between line and delta contactor) and on the bottom (connection between delta and wye-contactor); star jumper.
Page
98
W MOTOR PROTECTI ON
Thermal overload relays can be used for overload protection. The overload relay can be either mounted onto the line
contactor or separately fitted. It must be set to 0.58 times the rated motor current.
W FUNCTI ON
Wye-delta starting can only be used either if the motor normally operates in a connection or starts softly or if the load
torque during Y starting is low and does not increase sharply. On the Y step the motors can carry approximately 50 % (class
KL 16) or 30 % (class KL 10) of their rated torque; The tightening torque is approximately 1/3 of that during direct on-line
starting. The starting current is approximately 2 to 2.7 times the rated motor current.
The changeover from Y to must not be effected until the motor has run up to rated speed. Operating mechanisms which
require this changeover to be performed earlier are unsuitable for wyedelta starting.
The ratings given in the table are only applicable to motors with a starting current ratio IA 8.4 x IN and using wye-delta
timing relay with a dead interval on reversing of approximately 50 ms.
Sizes 00 to 3:
All contactor assemblies can be fitted with RC elements, varistors or diode assemblies for damping opening surges in the
coil. As with the individual contactors, the surge suppressors can either be plugged onto the top of the contactors (size 00)
or fitted onto the coil terminals on the top or bottom (size 0 to 3).
Sizes 6 to 12:
The contactors are fitted with varistors as standard.
Rating Sizes Rated motor Thermal Setting range Permissible back-up fuses for starters,
of contactors current overload relay comprising contactor assemblies and overload relays.
K1-K3-K2
(the thermal overload Single or double infeed
1)
relays must be set to Fuse links
0.58 times the rated LV HRC LV HRC British
motor current)
DIAZED Operational class listed Standard
NEOZED aM fuses Fuses
gL/gG operational class CLASS BS88
RK5/L
Type of coordination Type of Type of
coordination coordination
"1" "2" "2" "1" "2"
kW A Type A A A A A A A
5.5 00-00-00 12 LSTD0800 5.5 ... 8 35 20 10 30 35 20
7.5 00-00-00 16 LSTD1000 7 ... 10 35 20 16 40 35 20
11 0-0-0 22 LST01600 11 ... 16 63 25 20 60 63 25
15 0-0-0 29 LST02000 14 ... 20 100 35 20 80 100 35
18.5 0-0-0 35 LST02500 20 ... 25 100 35 20 100 100 35
22 2-2-0 41 LST23200 22 ... 32 125 63 35 125 125 63
1)
The maximum rated motor current must not be exceeded.
W TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Short-circuit protection with fuses for motor feeders with short-circuit currents up to 50 kA and 690 V.
For Thermal overload relays see Protection Equipment: Thermal Overload Relays.
WWYE-DELTA CONTACTOR ASSEMBLI ES OVERVI EW
Page
99
Starter Type LSY.. .. LSYD LSY0 LSY2
Sizes 00-00-00 0-0-0 2-2-0
All technical specifications not mentioned in the table below are identical to those of the individual LSD contactors and LST thermal overload relays
Utilization category DC-1 Operat- 3 million
ing
cycles
Short-circuit protection without overload relay
1)
Maximum rated current of the fuse
Main circuit
Fuse links, gL/g
GLV HRC, DIAZED, NEOZED
Single or double infeed
- acc. to IEC 60947-4-1/ Type of coordination 1 A 35 100 125
EN 60947-4-1 Type of coordination 2 A 20 35 63
Control circuit
Fuse links, gL/g A 10
GDIAZED, NEOZED A 6
2)
, if the auxiliary contact of the Thermal overload relay is connected
in the contactor coil circuit
k
1 kA)
Miniature circuit breaker with C characteristic A 10
A 6
2)
, if the auxiliary contact of the Thermal overload relay is connected
in the contactor coil circuit
Size of individual contactors K1 line contactor Type LSD ...D12 ...025 ...232
K3 delta contactor Type LSD ...D12 ...025 ...232
K2 star contactor Type LSD ...D07 ...012 ...025
Unassigned auxiliary contacts of the individual contactors
3)
Current-carrying capacity with reversing time up to 10 s
e
at 400 V A 17 40 65
500 V A 11.3 31.2 55.4
690 V A 9 22.5 53.7
Rated power for induction motors at at 230 V kW 4.7 12 20.4
50 Hz and 60 Hz and 400 V kW 8.2 21 35
500 V kW 6.9 20.5 38
690 V kW 7.5 20.4 51
1000 V kW -- -- --
Switching frequency with overload relay h
-1
15 15 15
e
at 400 V A 17 31 44
500 V A 11.3 31 44
690 V A 9 22.5 44
Rated power for induction motors at at 230 V kW 4.7 9.4 13.8
50 Hz and 60 Hz and 400 V kW 8.2 16.3 24
500 V kW 6.9 20.4 30
690 V kW 7.5 20.4 42
1000 V kW -- -- --
Switching frequency with overload relay h
-1
15 15 15
e
at 400 V A 17 28 39
500 V A 11.3 28 39
690 V A 9 22.5 39
Rated power for induction motors at at 230 V kW 4.7 8.5 12.2
50 Hz and 60 Hz and 400 V kW 8.2 14.7 21.3
500 V kW 6.9 18.4 26.7
690 V kW 7.5 20.4 37
1000 V kW -- -- --
Switching frequency with Thermal overload relay h
-1
15 15 15
1)
Short-circuit protection with overload relays, see Thermal Overload Relays.
2)
Up to I
k
< 0.5 kA; 260 V.
W LSY COMPLETE UNITS, 3 ... 22 kW
DI MENSI ONS
Page
100
5
7
,
5
5,3 8,6
5
1
5
5
67
99
106
2)
15,5
1
1
8
3)
67
45
5)
95
35
5
0
5
4)
35
5
0
5
4)
W LSD CONTACTORS, 3-POLE
W LSDD CONTACTORS, SI ZE 00
Screw terminals with surge suppressor, auxiliary contact block and mounted thermal overload relay.
Lateral distance to grounded components = 6 mm.
2)
Auxiliary contact block
3)
Surge suppressor
4)
Drilling pattern
5)
Auxiliary contact block 1-pole
45
4)
a
b)
2)
1)
3)
1
4
3
6
3
86
10 135
8
0
15,5
10
86
5
5
35
6
0
5
8
5
W LSD0 CONTACTORS AND LSSO CONTACTORS FOR PLC-USE, SI ZE 0
Lateral distance to grounded components = 6 mm.
For size 0:
a = 3 mm at < 240 V
a = 7 mm at > 240 V
b = DC 10 mm deeper than AC
1)
Auxiliary contact block, laterally mountable
2)
Auxiliary contact block, mountable on the front,
1- and 4-pole
3)
Surge suppressor
4)
Drilling pattern
5
7
,
5
8,6 5,3
45
67
99
5 35
5
0
5 3)
4)
W LSSD CONTACTORS FOR PLC-USE, SI ZE 00
With surge suppressor.
Deviating dimensions for auxiliary contactors with Cage Clamp terminals (on request): Height: 60 mm.
3)
Surge suppressor
4)
Drilling pattern
DI MENSI ONS
Page
101
3)
4)
a
1)
5)
6)
S)
2)
7
60
1
3
0
5
5
1
0
0
2
2
1
28
70 10 10
8
0
134
13 183
5
132
1
4
6
For size S3:
a = 0 mm with varistor, diode assembl
and < 240 V
a = 3.5 mm with varistor and > 240 V
a = 17 mm with RC element
1)
Auxiliary switch block, laterally moun
2)
Auxiliary switch block, mountable on
front (1-, 2- and 4-pole), same dimen
for versions with screw or Cage Clam
minals
3)
W LSD3 CONTACTORS, SI ZE 3
For size 3:
a = 0 mm with varistor, diode assembly and < 240 V
a = 3.5 mm with varistor and > 240 V
1)
2)
Auxiliary contact block, mountable on the front
(1- and 4-pole), same dimensions for versions with
screw or Cage Clamp terminals
3)
Surge suppressor
4)
Drilling pattern
5)
For mounting on TH 35 standard mounting rail according
to EN 60715 (15 mm deep) or TH 75 standard mounting
rail according to EN 60715
6)
Allen screw 4 mm
4)
a
3)
1)
)
2)
5
5
45
9
5
159 15
55
7
5
1
7
1
1
1
2
20,5
107
10 110
5
8
0
For size S2:
a = 0 mm with varis
a = 3.5 mm with va
a = 17 mm with RC
b = DC 15 mm dee
1)
Auxiliary switch b
2)
Auxiliary switch b
(1-, 2- and 4-pole
3)
Surge suppresso
4)
Drilling pattern
For size 2:
a = 0 mm with varistor < 240 V, diode assembly
a = 3.5 mm with varistor > 240 V
1)
2)
1- and 4-pole
3)
Surge suppressor
4)
Drilling pattern
DI MENSI ONS
Page
102
2)
3)
1)
1
4
0
k
k
107
217
180
170
9
140
120
1
7
1
7
2
1
6
4
37
17
7
100
1
3
0
61
140
150
Drilling pattern
For size
k = 120
withd
1)
2nd a
2)
Auxili
3)
RC el
4)
3RB2
5)
3RT19
(Allen
6)
3RT19
With lateral and front mounted auxiliary contact block box terminals.
Distance from grounded parts: Lateral: 10 mm, Front: 20 mm
For size 6:
k = 120 mm (minimum clearance for removing the withdrawable coil)
1)
2nd auxiliary contact block, lateral
2)
3)
RC element
5)
Box terminals
1
6
8
175
165
145
202
138
k
k
132
70
11
48
25 1
7
2
1
0
2
0
0
9
1
8
0
120
5)
2)
1)
3)
165
251
217
Drilling pattern
W LSDE CONTACTORS, SI ZE 10
With lateral and front mounted auxiliary contact block box terminals.
For size 10:
1)
2)
3)
RC element
5)
Box terminals
5)
5)
DI MENSI ONS
Page
103
2)
1)
3)
156
1
8
2
271
236
225
190
180
160
1
7
2
1
4
2
0
0
48
25
k
150
89
9
1
8
0
130
k
180
11
For sizes S10 and S12
k = 150 mm (minimum
withdrawable coil)
1)
2nd auxiliary switch b
2)
Auxiliary switch block
3)
RC element
4)
3RB20 overload relay
5)
Box terminal block (A
6)
PLC connection 24 V
Drilling pattern
W LSDG CONTACTORS, SI ZE 12
With lateral and front mounted auxiliary contact block.
For size 12:
1)
2)
3)
RC element
W LSDH6 AND LSDH8 VACUUM CONTACTORS, 3-POLE
70
230
2
1
0
2
7
6
28
100
237
M10
12
2
3
2
M3,5
150
A
2
4
5
30
3
0
0
178
1)
Detail
A = Contact erosion indication for vacuum interrupter contacts
A
Detail
A = Contact erosion indication for vacuum interrupter contacts
W LSDH6 VACUUM CONTACTORS, SI ZE 14
70
230
2
3
2
2
9
5
2
1
0
70
2
5
9
2,5
28
100
237
M12
9,2 12
2
4
0
M3,5
150
A
2
5
5
40
220
1)
3
2
0
W LSDH8 VACUUM CONTACTORS, SI ZE 14
1)
With box terminals for laminated copper bars (on request).
Terminal cover for touch protection see page 32 LSZHD001.
DI MENSI ONS
Page
104
W LSR CONTACTORS, 4-POLE
W LSRD CONTACTORS, SI ZE 00
Screw terminals with surge suppressor and auxiliary contact block. Lateral distance to grounded components = 6 mm.
For size 00:
Deviating dimensions for contactors
with Cage Clamp terminals:
Height: 60 mm
Mounting depth with auxiliary contact block: 110 mm
2)
3)
Surge suppressor
4)
Drilling pattern
5)
Auxiliary contact block 1-pole
W LSR0 CONTACTORS, SI ZE 0
For size 0:
a = 3 mm at < 250 V
and mounting of surge suppressor
a = 7 mm at > 250 V
and mounting of surge suppressor
1)
Auxiliary contact block, laterally mountable (left)
2)
3)
Surge suppressor
4)
Drilling pattern
For sizes 2 and 3:
a = 0 mm with varistor < 240 V
a = 3.5 mm with varistor > 240 V
a = 17 mm with RC element and diode assembly
b = Size 2: DC 15 mm deeper than AC
Size 3: DC 13 mm deeper than AC
1)
(right or left)
2)
(1- and 4-pole)
3)
Surge suppressor
4)
Drilling pattern
5)
For mounting on TH 35 standard mounting rail
according to EN 60715 (15 mm deep) or for size 3
also to TH 75 standard mounting rail according to
EN 60715
6)
Allen screw 4 mm
DI MENSI ONS
Page
105
W LSH AUXILIARY CONTACTORS
W LSHD AUXI LI ARY CONTACTORS, SI ZE 00
Screw terminals for surge suppressor and auxiliary contact block. Lateral distance to grounded components = 6 mm.
1)
2)
Surge suppressor
3)
Drilling pattern
W LSHD...N, LSHD...G AUXI LI ARY CONTACTORS FOR PLC-USE, SI ZE 00
Screw terminals with diode built-in or additional surge suppressor. Lateral distance to grounded components = 6 mm.
All types: no further auxiliary contacts or contact blocks can be snapped on.
LSHD...N: surge suppressor can be inserted
LSHD...G: with built-in diode
Deviating dimensions for auxiliary contactors
with Cage Clamp terminals:
Height: 60 mm
1)
Surge suppressor
2)
Drilling pattern
DI MENSI ONS
Page
106
1 3
5
1
0
1
5
5
105
5
51
35
5
0
W LSK CAPACITOR CONTACTORS
W LSKD CAPACI TOR CONTACTORS, SI ZE 00
1
8
4
8
45
5
6
0
7
2
8
5
1
0
0
5
44
66
1 21
1 30
6
0
35
Drilling
pattern
W LSK0 CAPACI TOR CONTACTORS, SI ZE 0
51
90
116
170
8
5
7
183
1
3
0
1
6
7
22,5 22,5
70
1
5
0
1
2
4
1
0
4
3
8
1
8
60
1
3
0
Drilling
pattern
W LSK3 CAPACI TOR CONTACTORS, SI ZE 3
DI MENSI ONS
Page
107
W LA3K CAPACITY SWITCHING CONTACTORS
W LA3K18..
W LA3K24.., LA3K32..
W LA3K50.., LA3K62.., LA3K74..
W LA3K90.., LA3K11..
LA3K74..
DI MENSI ONS
Page
108
7
6
3
3
24
11
29 5 32
W ACCESSORIES FOR LSD CONTACTORS
W LSZDD003 PARALLEL CONNECTOR, SI ZE 00
3-pole, with terminal
7
6
3
3
33
11 29 5 32
W LSZDD004 PARALLEL CONNECTOR, SI ZE 00
8
5
1
2
3
55 66
94
106
W LSZ2D002 TERMI NAL COVER
FOR BOX TERMI NALS, SI ZE 2
69
108
124
70
1
6
0
1
2
4
W LSZ3D002 TERMI NAL COVER
FOR BOX TERMI NALS, SI ZE 3
14
32
45
67
84
23
9
6
1
8
W LSZ0D003 PARALLEL CONNECTOR, SI ZE 0
22,5 84 7
4
8
W LSZ00113 MECHANI CAL LATCHI NG BLOCK
24
47
55
1
4
0
6
0
46
6
57
2
5
4
4
17
W LSZ2D003 PARALLEL CONNECTOR, SI ZE 0
DI MENSI ONS
Page
109
3
8
36
38
5 9
1
6
25
W LSZDD2.., LSZDH5..*
AUXI LI ARY CONTACT BLOCK, SI ZE 00
according to EN 50012 and *EN 50005
Screw terminals, 1- to 4-pole
27
2
7
,
5
24
13,6
W LSZD0501, LSZD0510
AUXI LI ARY CONTACT BLOCK, SI ZE 00
according to EN 50005
Screw terminals, cable entry from below, 1-pole
44
1
8
49
3
8
11 5
W LSZ0D1.., LSZ0D1..F*
AUXI LI ARY CONTACT BLOCK, SI ZES 0 TO 12
according to EN 50012 and *EN 50005
Screw terminals, 4-pole
10
8
0
71
W LSZ0D711, LSZ3D811*
AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCK, SIZES 0 (*3) TO 12
according to EN 50012, laterally mountable,
11
1
8
3
8
44
W LSZ0D0.., LSZ0D9..
AUXI LI ARY CONTACT BLOCK, SI ZES 0 TO 12
according to EN 50012 and EN 50005
10
W ACCESSORIES FOR LSD CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES
W LSZ6W001 MECHANI CAL I NTERLOCK, SI ZES 6 TO 12
13,6
24
2
7
,
5
27
DI MENSI ONS
Page
110
5 8,6
90
35
5
67
6
7
5
0
5
7,5
51
W LSW REVERSING CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES
W LSWD, SI ZE 00
with or without LSZDW002 mechanical interlock link
DC95
8 14
100
10 28
40 5
6
0
7,5
5
39
61
86
8
6
W LSW0, SI ZE 0
with LSZ0W002 mechanical interlock
1
3
DC125
52
5
9
5
1
2
0
36
110
50 10 17,5
10
120 5
8
W LSW2, SI ZE 2
1
2
DC147
1
5
7
46
85
134
65
10
12 22
150
5
8
5
1
3
0
W LSW3, SI ZE 3
DI MENSI ONS
Page
111
W LSY CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES FOR WYE-DELTA STARTING
(AC+DC)
1
5 67
K2 K3
K4
K4
8
8
W LSYD, SI ZES 00 00 00
38
25
DC) (AC
105
135
140 (DC)
K1 K3 K2
K4
158
8
8
130 (AC) 5
W LSY0, SI ZES 0 0 0
K2
K3 K4 K1
10
184 (DC)
7
150
1
2
5
1
4
0
178
169 (AC)
W LSY2, SI ZES 2 2 0
K1
SCHEMATI CS
Page
112
W CONNECTION DIAGRAMS FOR LS CONTACTORS AND ACCESSORIES
1 /L1 1 3
1 4 2/T1
A2()
A1 (+)
3/L2
4/T2
5/L3
6/T3
1 /L1 21
22 2/T1
A2()
A1 (+)
3/L2
4/T2
5/L3
6/T3
W LSDD CONTACTORS, SI ZE 00
Terminal designations according to EN 50012
LSDD, LSSD contactors LSDD, LSSD contactors
1NO included 1NC included
W LSK CAPACI TOR SWI TCHI NG CONTACTORS
LSKD contactor LSK0, LSK3 contactor
Size 00 Sizes 0, 3
W LSD0, LSD2, LSD3, LSD6, LSDE AND LSDG CONTACTORS, SI ZES 0 TO 12
LSD0, LSS0, LSD2, LSD3 LSD6, LSDE, LSDG
contactors contactors
LSD6, LSDE, LSDG contactors 2NO + 2NC
with front mounted 4-pole LSZ0D122 auxiliary contact block
or with lateral 2-pole LSZ0D711 auxiliary contact block
1 /L1 21
22 2/T1
A2
A1
1 3
1 4
3/L2
4/T2
5/L3
6/T3
83
84
31
32
61
62
43
44
53
54
71
72
W LSDH6 AND LSDH8 VACUUM CONTACTORS, SI ZE 14
4 NO + 4 NC
1 /L1
2/T1
A2()
A1 (+)
3/L2
4/T2
5/L3
6/T3
7/L4
8/T4
W LSR0, LSR2, LSR3 CONTACTORS WI TH 4 MAI N CONTACTS, SI ZES 0 TO 3
4NO
1 /L1
2/T1
A2()
A1 (+)
3/L2
4/T2
5/L3
6/T3
7/L4
8/T4
W LSRD CONTACTORS WI TH 4 MAI N CONTACTS, SI ZE 00
4NO
LSZD.... auxiliary contact blocks
according to EN 50005 and
EN 50012 can be snapped on
LSZ0.... auxiliary contact blocks
according to EN 50005 and
EN 50012 can be snapped on
SCHEMATI CS
Page
113
W LSHD AUXI LI ARY CONTACTORS FOR PLC-USE, SI ZE 00
Terminal designations according to EN 50011 (no auxiliary contacts can be snapped on), surge suppressor can be pluged in
LSHD067N LSHD068N LSHD069N
4 NO 3 NO + 1 NC 2 NO + 2 NC
W LSHD AUXI LI ARY CONTACTORS FOR PLC-USE, SI ZE 00
Terminal designations according to EN 50011 (no auxiliary contacts can be snapped on), diode integrated
LSHD067G LSHD068G LSHD069G
4 NO 3 NO + 1 NC 2 NO + 2 NC
W LSHD AUXI LI ARY CONTACTORS, SI ZE 00
1)
LSHD067. LSHD068. LSHD069.
4 NO 3 NO + 1 NC 2 NO + 2 NC 1)
Positively-driven operation is
assured likewise for auxiliary
contact blocks according to EN
50005 in conjunction with LSH
auxiliary contactors.
W ACCESSORIES FOR CONTACTORS AND AUXILIARY CONTACTORS LSDD, LSSD WITH 1 NC INCLUDED
AND FOR AUXILIARY CONTACTORS, SI ZE 00
LSZD auxiliary contact blocks, 4-pole
for snapping onto the front
LSZDH540
4NO
LSZDH531
3NO + 1NC
LSZD auxiliary contact blocks, 1-pole
for snapping onto the front, cable entry from below
LSZD0510
1NO
LSZD0501
1NC
W ACCESSORI ES FOR CONTACTORS LSDD, LSSD WITH 1 NO INCLUDED, SI ZE 00
LSZD auxiliary contact blocks 1 to 4-pole, for snapping onto the front, terminal designations according to EN 50012
LSZDH522
2NO + 2NC
LSZDD201 LSZDD213 LSZDD212 LSZDD222
SCHEMATI CS
Page
114
1 3
1 4
21
22
33
34
43
44
1 3
1 4
21
22
43
44
31
32
1 3
1 4
21
22
41
42
31
32
LSZ0D131
3NO + 1NC
LSZ0D122
2NO + 2NC
LSZ0D113
1NO + 3NC
LSZ0D140F
4NO
LSZ0D131F
3NO + 1NC
LSZ0D122F
2NO + 2NC
LSZ0D104F
4NC
1 3
1 4
21
22
43
44
31
32
LSZ0D711
1NO + 1NC
mounted left
LSZ0D711
1NO + 1NC
mounted right
53
54
61
62
83
84
71
72
LSZ3D811
1NO + 1NC
mounted left
LSZ3D811
1NO + 1NC
mounted right
W AUXI LI ARY CONTACT BLOCKS, 4-POLE, FOR CONTACTORS SI ZES 0 TO 12
Terminal designations according to EN 50012, for snapping onto the front
W AUXI LI ARY CONTACT BLOCKS, 4-POLE, FOR CONTACTORS SI ZES 0 TO 12
Terminal designations according to EN 50005, for snapping onto the front
W FIRST LATERALLY MOUNTABLE AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCK, 2-POLE, FOR CONTACTORS SIZES 0 TO 12
W SECOND LATERALLY MOUNTABLE AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCK, 2-POLE,
ONLY FOR CONTACTORS SIZES 3 TO 12
W ACCESSORI ES FOR CONTACTORS, SI ZE 0 TO 12
LSZ0D0 auxiliary contact blocks, 1-pole
for snapping onto the front
LSZ0D010
1NO
LSZ0D001
1NC
LSZ0D9.. auxiliary contact blocks, 1-pole
early make and delayed, for snapping onto the front
LSZ0D910
1NO
early make
LSZ0D901
1NC
delayed
Diode Diode assembly Varistor RC element
U
W SURGE SUPPRESSORS FOR SI ZES 00 TO 12 (CODED PLUG-I N DI RECTI ON)
SCHEMATI CS
Page
115
W POSITION OF THE TERMINALS FOR LS CONTACTORS AND ACCESSORIES
A1
A2
1 3 5 13
2 4 6 14
)
)
! #
" $
W LSDD, LSSD CONTACTORS, SI ZE 00

1NO included 1NC included
A1
A2
1 3 5
2 4 6
1
1
2 3 4
2 3 4
A2
A1
W LSD0, LSS0, LSD2, LSD3 CONTACTORS, SI ZE 0 TO 12
W LSD6, LSDE, LSDG CONTACTORS, SI ZES 6 TO 12
Terminal designations according to EN 50012, with laterally included auxiliary contact block LSZ0D711 (2 NO + 2 NC).
Can be extended by LSZ3D811 to 4 NO + 4 NC.
2NO + 2 NC or 4 NO + 4 NC
21
13
14
22
A1 A2
1 L1 3 L2 5 L3
2 T1 4 T2 6 T3
71
83
84
72
31
43
44
61
53
54
62 32
W LSDH6 AND LSDH8 VACUUM CONTACTORS, SI ZE 14
4 NO + 4 NC
SCHEMATI CS
Page
116
W LSRD CONTACTORS WI TH 4 MAI N CONTACTS, SI ZE 00
4 NO
A1
A2
1 3 5
2 4 6
7
8
W LSR0, LSR2, LSR3 CONTACTORS WI TH 4 MAI N CONTACTS, SI ZES 0 TO 3
4 NO
A1
A2
1 5
2 6
A2
A1
7 3
8 4
W LSK CAPACI TOR SWI TCHI NG CONTACTORS, SI ZES 00 TO 3
LSKD contactor
Size 00
)
) " $ "
#
#
! # !
A1
A2
1 3 5
2 4 6
43
44
A2
A1
LSK0, LSK3 contactor
Sizes 0, 3
13 23 33 43 A1
14 24 34 44 A2
13 21 31 43 A1
14 22 32 44 A2
13 21 33 43 A1
14 22 34 44 A2
W LSHD AUXI LI ARY CONTACTORS AND AUXI LI ARY CONTACTORS FOR PLC-USE, SI ZE 00
LSHD067. LSHD068. LSHD069.
4 NO 3 NO + 1 NC 2 NO + 2 NC
SCHEMATI CS
Page
117
W LSZDH5.., LSZD05.. AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCKS FOR CONTACTORS LSDD, LSSD
WITH 1 NC CONTACT OR LSHD AUXILIARY CONTACTORS
W AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCKS FOR CONTACTORS LSDD, LSSD
WITH 1 NO CONTACT
W LSZDD2.. AUXI LI ARY CONTACT BLOCKS, 1 TO 4-POLE, SI ZE 00
for snapping onto the front, terminal designations according to EN 50012
LSZDD201 LSZDD212
1NC 1NO + 2NC
LSZDD213 LSZDD222
1NO + 3NC 2NO + 2NC
W LSZDH5.. AUXI LI ARY CONTACT BLOCKS, 4-POLE, SI ZE 00
LSZDH540
4 NO
54 84
53 63 73 83
64 74 54 62
53 83 61 73
74 84
LSZDH531
3NO + 1NC
54 84
53 83 61 71
62 72
LSZDH522
2NO + 2NC
W LSZD05.. AUXI LI ARY CONTACT BLOCKS, 1-POLE, SI ZE 00
for snapping onto the front, cable entry from below, terminal designations according to EN 50005
LSZD0510
1 NO
#! #" # #
LSZD0501
1NC
21
22
21 31 43
22 32 44
21 31 41 53
22 32 42 54
21 31 41 53
22 32 42 54
W LSZ0D1.. AUXI LI ARY CONTACT BLOCKS, 4-POLE, SI ZE 0 TO 12
LSZ0D122
2NO + 2NC
LSZ0D131
3NO + 1NC
LSZ0D113
1NO + 3NC
W LSZ0D1.. AUXI LI ARY CONTACT BLOCKS, 4-POLE, SI ZE 0 TO 12
LSZ0D140F
4 NO
LSZ0D131F
3NO + 1NC
LSZ0D122F
2NO + 2NC
LSZ0D104F
4NC
13
14
21 31 43
22 32 44
13 23 33 43
14 24 34 44
13
14
21 31 43
22 32 44
13 21 33 43
14 22 34 44
13
14
21 31 43
22 32 44
13 21 31 41
14 22 32 44
13
14
21 31 43
22 32 44
13 21 31 41
14 22 32 42
13
14
21 31 43
22 32 44
13 23 33 41
14 24 34 42
13
14
21 31 43
22 32 44
13 23 31 41
14 24 32 42
13
14
21 31 43
22 32 44
11 21 31 41
12 22 32 42
SCHEMATI CS
Page
118
W LSZ0D0.., LSZ0D9.. AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCKS, 1-POLE, SI ZES 0 TO 12
for snapping onto the front, terminal designations according to EN 50005 or EN 50012
LSZ0D010
1 NO
.3
.4
.1
.2
LSZ0D001
1NC
LSZ0D910
1 NO
early make
.7
.8
.5
.6
LSZ0D901
1NC
delayed
W LSZ0D7.., LSZ3D8.. AUXI LI ARY CONTACT BLOCKS, 2-POLE, SI ZES 0 (3) TO 12
LSZ0D711
First laterally mountable, left or right
1NO + 1NC
Left Right
LSZ3D811
Second laterally mountable, left or right (only for sizes 3 to 12)
1NO + 1NC
Left Right
W POSITION OF THE TERMINALS FOR LSW REVERSING CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES
111
112
121
122
1 3
2 4 6
K1
5 1 3
2 4 6
K2
5
K1
K2
111
112
122
121
W LSW REVERSI NG CONTACTOR ASSEMBLI ES, SI ZES 0 TO 3
Terminal designations according to EN 50005. LSZ0W002 mechanical interlock (laterally mountable), integrated in reversing
contactor assemblies (reversing starters), contains 2 NC contacts for the electrical interlock, one for each contactor.
2 NC
SCHEMATI CS
Page
119
W CI RCUI T DI AGRAMS FOR LSW REVERSI NG CONTACTOR ASSEMBLI ES
L1
L2
L3
F2
K1
K2
M
3~
W V U
F1
W MAI N CI RCUI T, SI ZE 00
The LSZDW001 wiring set contains, among other things,
wiring connectors for connecting the main circuit.
L1/L+
S0
S1 K1
K1
N/L
F3
53
54
A1
A2
21
22
A1
21
22
K2
53
54
S2
S2 S1
F2
96
95
K2 K1
K2
A2
L1/L+
S
K1
N/L
F3
A1
A2
21
22
A1
21
22
F2
96
95
K2 K1
K2
A2
10 2
W CONTROL CI RCUI T, SI ZE 00
(The terminal designations for the contactors comply with
EN 50012). The LSZDW001 wiring set contains, among
other things, the electrical interlock.
For momentary-contact For maintained-contact
operation operation
L1
L2
L3
F2
K1
K2
M
3~
W V U
F1
W MAI N CI RCUI T, SI ZES 0 TO 3
The LSZ.W001 wiring set contains, among other things, the
wiring modules on the top and bottom for connecting the
main current paths.
L1/L+
S0
S1 K1
K1
N/L
F3
.3
.4
A1
A2
111
112
A1
122
121
K2
.3
.4
S2
S2 S1
F2
96
95
K2 K1
K2
A2
L1/L+
S
K1
N/L
F3
A1
A2
111
112
A1
122
121
F2
96
95
K2 K1
K2
A2
10 2
W CONTROL CI RCUI T, SI ZES 0 TO 3
(The terminal designations for the contactors comply with
EN 50005). The LSZ0W002 mechanical interlock contains
2 NC contact, one for each contactor interlock.
operation operation
S0 Button "OFF"
S1 Button "Clockwise ON"
S2 Button "Counterclockwise ON"
S Button "CW-OFF-CCW"
K1 Clockwise contactor
K2 Counterclockwise contactor
F1 Fuses for main circuit
F3 Fuses for control circuit
F2 Thermal overload relays
SCHEMATI CS
Page
120
W CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS FOR LSY WYE-DELTA STARTING CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES
L1
L2
L3
F1
K1 K3
M
3~
U1
V1
W1
F0
K2
1 3 5
2 4 6
W2
U2
V2
1 3 5
2 4 6
M
U1
V1
W1
W2
U2
V2
3AC 50Hz ...V
3~
F0
K3 K2
43
95
N(L )
L1 (L+)
44
41
42
K4
K3
K1
S1
S0
F1
96
AC 50Hz (DC) . . . V
21
22
K2
1 8 28
K4
1 7
K1
34
33
K1 K2
1 4
1 3
F0
K3 K2
95
N(L )
L1 (L+)
41
42
K4
K3
F1
96
AC 50Hz (DC) . . . V
21
22
K2
1 8 28
K4
1 7
K1
34
33
K1 K2
1 4
1 3
S
43
44
K1
K3
1 4
1 3
W CONTROL CI RCUI T, SI ZES 0 TO 12
with LSZD0101 Y-Delta timer, laterally mounted (example
circuits). The contact element K4:17/18 is only closed in the
wye stage; the contact element is open in the delta stage
as well as in the de-energized state. S1 (S) is connected
to clamping point K1:33.
operation operation
L1
L2
L3
F1
K1 K3
M
3~
U1
V1
W1
F0
K2
1 3 5
2 4 6
W2
U2
V2
1 3 5
2 4 6
M
U1
V1
W1
W2
U2
V2
3AC 50Hz ...V
3~
F0
S0 Button "OFF"
S1 Button "ON"
S Maintained-contact switch
K1 Line contactor
K2 Star contactor
K3 Delta contactor
K4 Solid-state, time-delay auxiliary contact block or timing relay
F0 Fuses
F1 Thermal overload relays
* Clamping point K1:44 remains unwired in this version
*
SCHEMATI CS
Page
121
3
/
L
2
L1 L2 L3
A1
F0
1
/
L
1
5
/
L
3
2
/
T
1
4
/
T
2
6
/
T
3
A2
C1
51 1 3
52 1 4
L1 L2 L3
A1
F0
A2
C1
3
/
L
2
1
/
L
1
5
/
L
3
2
/
T
1
4
/
T
2
6
/
T
3
43
44
W LSK CAPACI TOR SWI TCHI NG CONTACTORS
Typical circuit diagram Typical circuit diagram
Size 00 Sizes 0 and 3
Typical circuit diagram Circuit diagram with
quick discharge resistors
W CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS FOR CAPACITOR SWITCHING CONTACTORS
BZ MODULAR CONTACTORS
Page
122
BZ MODULAR CONTACTOR, AC1, 1-POLE
TOP-TECHNIC
TOP-TECHNIC
TOP-TECHNIC
BZ MODULAR CONTACTORS
Page
123
BZ MODULAR
CONTACTORS
w CONTENTS
DIMENSIONS ........................................................................................................ Page 129
SCHEMATICS .......................................................................................................... Page 130
MODULAR CONTACTORS
Page
124
DESCRI PTI ON COI L VOLTAGE FREQU/REMARK TYPE ORDER NO.
1-POLE, 1 MODULE = 17,5 mm
Contactor AC1: 20A/400V, 1NO AC230V 50/60Hz R2010 230 BZ326471
2-POLE, 1 MODULE = 17,5 mm
Contactor AC1: 20A/400V, 1NO+1NC AC24V 50/60Hz R2011 24 BZ326421
Contactor AC1: 20A/400V, 2NC AC230V 50/60Hz R2002 230 BZ326439
4-POLE, 2 MODULES = 35 mm
BZ326471 BZ326453 BZ326463
W BZ MODULAR CONTACTORS FOR SWI TCHI NG AC1 LOAD, AC OPERATED
W SCHRACK-I NFO
1 Module = 17,5 mm
see next page
MODULAR CONTACTORS
Page
125
DESCRI PTI ON COI L VOLTAGE FREQU/REMARK TYPE ORDER NO.
Contactor AC1: 20A/400V, 4NO AC230V 50/60Hz K1R40 230 BZ326441
BZ326441
W BZ MODULAR CONTACTOR 4-POLE, SOLENOI D OPERATED, SEALABLE
W SCHRACK-I NFO
Width = 45 mm
No auxiliary contacts possible
DESCRI PTI ON TYPE ORDER NO.
Auxiliary contact block AC15: 3A, 1NO+1NC RH11 BZ326470
BZ326470
W AUXI LI ARY CONTACT BLOCK FOR BZ MODULAR CONTACTORS
W SCHRACK-I NFO
2-pole
0,5 Module = 8,8 mm
Max. 1 RH11 for 1 contactor
Page
126
Lamp Type Power Current Capacitors Max. lamps per pole at 230V 50Hz and max. 60C
W A F R20.. R25.. R40.. R63.. K1R..
Incandescent lamps 60 0,27 - 22 28 58 85 28
100 0,45 - 13 17 35 51 17
200 0,91 - 7 8 17 25 8
300 1,36 - 4 5 11 16 5
500 2,27 - 3 3 7 10 3
1000 4,5 - 1 1 3 5 1
Fluorescent lamps 11 0,16 - 60 75 210 310 60
uncompensated or serial compensated 18 0,37 2,7 25 30 90 140 25
24 0,35 2,5 25 30 90 140 25
36 0,43 3,4 20 25 70 140 20
58 0,67 5,3 14 17 45 70 14
65 0,67 5,3 13 16 40 65 13
85 0,8 - 11 14 35 60 11
Fluorescent lamps 11 0,07 - 2 x 100 2 x 110 2 x 220 2 x 250 2 x 100
dual-connection 18 0,11 - 2 x 50 2 x 55 2 x 130 2 x 200 2 x 50
24 0,14 - 2 x 40 2 x 44 2 x 110 2 x 160 2 x 40
36 0,22 - 2 x 30 2 x 33 2 x 70 2 x 100 2 x 30
58 0,35 - 2 x 20 2 x 22 2 x 45 2 x 70 2 x 20
65 0,35 - 2 x 15 2 x 16 2 x 40 2 x 60 2 x 15
85 0,47 - 2 x 10 2 x 11 2 x 30 2 x 40 2 x 10
Fluorescent lamps 11 0,16 2,0 30 30 100 140 30
parallel compensated 18 0,37 2,0 20 20 70 90 20
24 0,35 3,0 15 15 55 75 15
36 0,43 4,5 10 10 38 51 10
58 0,67 7,0 6 6 25 30 6
65 0,67 7,0 5 5 24 28 5
85 0,8 8,0 4 4 18 23 4
Fluorescent lamps 18 0,09 - 40 40 100 150 40
with serial electronic 36 0,16 - 20 20 50 75 20
58 0,25 - 15 15 30 55 15
2 x 18 0,17 - 2 x 20 2 x 20 2 x 50 2 x 60 2 x 20
2 x 36 0,32 - 2 x 10 2 x 10 2 x 25 2 x 30 2 x 10
2 x 58 0,49 - 2 x 7 2 x 7 2 x 15 2 x 20 2 x 7
Transformers 20 - - 40 52 110 174 40
for metal halid low voltage lamps 50 - - 20 24 50 80 20
75 - - 13 16 35 54 13
100 - - 10 12 27 43 10
150 - - 7 9 19 29 7
200 - - 5 5 14 23 5
300 - - 3 4 9 14 3
Mercury-vapour lamps 50 0,61 - 16 18 38 55 16
(high-pressure lamps), uncompensated 80 0,8 - 12 14 28 40 12
e. g. HQL, HPL 125 1,15 - 8 9 20 28 8
250 2,15 - 4 5 11 15 4
400 3,25 - 3 4 7 10 3
700 5,4 - 1 2 4 6 1
1000 7,5 - 1 1 3 4 1
Mercury-vapour lamps 50 0,28 7 7 7 32 46 7
(high-pressure lamps), compensated 80 0,41 8 5 5 25 35 5
e. g. HQL, HPL 125 0,65 10 3 3 16 22 3
250 1,22 18 2 2 8 12 2
400 1,95 25 1 1 5 7 1
700 3,45 45 1 1 3 4 1
1000 4,8 60 - - 2 3 -
WBZ MODULAR CONTACTOR TYPES R20.., R25.., R40.., R63.., K1R..
acc. to IEC 947-4-1, IEC 947-5-1, VDE 0660, EN 60947-4-1, EN 60947-5-1
Page
127
Lamp Type Power Current Capacitors Max. lamps per pole at 230V 50Hz and max. 60C
W A F R20.. R25.. R40.. R63.. K1R..
Metal halide lamps 35 0,53 - 22 24 45 65 22
uncompensated 70 1 - 12 14 24 35 12
e. g. HQI, HPI, CDM 150 1,8 - 6 8 13 18 6
250 3 - 4 5 8 12 4
400 3,5 - 3 4 6 10 3
1000 9,5 - 1 1 2 4 1
2000 16,5 - - - 1 2 -
400V per pole 2000 10,5 - - - 1 2 -
3500 18 - - - - 1 -
Metal halide lamps 35 0,25 6 8 8 38 50 8
compensated 70 0,45 12 4 4 20 28 4
e. g. HQI, HPI, CDM 150 0,75 20 2 2 12 17 2
250 1,5 33 1 1 7 10 1
400 2,1 35 1 1 5 7 1
1000 5,8 95 - - 2 3 -
2000 11,5 148 - - 1 1 -
400V pro Pol 2000 6,6 58 - - 1 2 -
3500 11,6 100 - - - 1 -
Metal halide lamps 20 0,1 integrated 9 9 18 20 9
with serial electronic 35 0,2 integrated 6 6 11 13 6
(e. g.: PCI) 70 0,36 integrated 5 5 10 12 5
50-125 x In lamp for 0,6ms 150 0,7 integrated 4 4 8 10 4
Sodium-vapour lamps 35 1,5 - 7 9 22 30 7
(low pressure lamps), uncompensated 55 1,5 - 7 9 22 30 7
90 2,4 - 4 6 13 19 4
135 3,5 - 3 4 10 13 3
150 3,3 - 3 4 10 13 3
180 3,3 - 3 4 10 13 3
200 3,3 - 3 4 10 13 3
Sodium-vapour lamps 35 0,31 20 3 3 12 16 3
(low pressure lamps), compensated 55 0,42 20 2 2 8 14 2
90 0,63 30 1 1 5 9 1
135 0,94 45 1 1 3 6 1
150 1 40 1 1 3 6 1
180 1,16 40 1 1 2 5 1
200 1,32 25 - - 2 4 -
Sodium-vapour lamps 150 1,8 - 5 6 11 22 5
(high pressure lamps), uncompensated 250 3 - 4 5 7 13 4
330 3,7 - 3 4 6 10 3
400 4,7 - 2 2 5 8 2
1000 10,3 - 1 1 2 4 1
Sodium-vapour lamps 150 0,83 20 2 2 7 14 2
(high pressure lamps), compensated 250 1,5 33 1 1 4 8 1
330 2 40 1 1 3 6 1
400 2,4 48 1 1 2 5 1
1000 6,3 106 - - 1 2 -
Sodium-vapour lamps 20 0,1 integrated 9 9 18 20 9
(high pressure lamps) with serial electronic 35 0,2 integrated 6 6 11 13 6
(e. g.: PCI) 70 0,36 integrated 5 5 10 12 5
50-125 x In lamp for 0,6ms 150 0,7 integrated 4 4 8 10 4
WBZ MODULAR CONTACTOR TYPES R20.., R25.., R40.., R63.., K1R..
Page
128
WBZ MODULAR CONTACTOR TYPES R20.., R25.., R40.., R63.., K1R.., RH11
Contactor Type R20.. R25.. R40.. R63.. K1R.. RH11
Main contacts
Rated insulation voltage Ui V AC 440
2)
440
2)
440
2)
440
2)
690
1)
440
2)
Rated operation voltage Ue V AC 250 440 440 440 690 440
Frequency of operations AC1, AC3 1/h 300 300 600 600 600 600
Mechanical life S x 10
6
1 1 1 1 5 1
Rated operational current Ie (= Ith) open at 60C A 20 25 40 63 20 -
Contact life S x 10
6
0,1 0,1 0,1 0,1 0,2 -
Minimum switch voltage V/mA 24/100 24/100 24/100 24/100 24/100 1 7/5
Short time current 10s-current A 72 72 216 240 96 -
Power loss per pole at Ie/AC1 W 2 2 3 7 1 0,5
Switching of three-phase motors, rated operational current Ie A - 9 27 30 12 -
Rated operational power of three-phase motors 220V kW - 2,2 7,5 8 3 -
50-60Hz 230-240V kW 1,1
4)
2,5 8 8,5 3 -
380-415V kW - 4 12,5 15 4 -
Contact life S x 10
6
- 0,15 0,15 0,15 0,9 -
AC operated inrush VA 7-9 14-18 33-45 33-45 3-3,5 -
sealed VA 2,2-4,2 4,4-8,4 7-10 7-10 3-3,5 -
W 0,8-1,6 1,6-3,2 2,6-3 2,6-3 3-3,5 -
Operation range of coils in multiples of control voltage Us (-40 to +40C) 0,85-1,1 0,85-1,1 0,85-1,1 0,85-1,1 0,85-1,1 -
Coordination-type "1"
according to IEC 947-4-1, max. fuse size gL (gG) A 35 35 63 80 40 -
Cable cross-sections
Main connector solid or stranded mm 1,5-10 1,5-10 2,5-25 2,5-25 0,5-2,5
3)
0,5-2,5
3)
flexible mm 1,5-6 1,5-6 2,5-16 2,5-16 0,5-2,5
3)
0,5-2,5
3)
flexible with multicore cable end mm 1,5-6 1,5-6 2,5-16 2,5-16 0,5-1,5 0,5-1,5
Clamps per pole 1 1 1 1 2 2
Magnetic coil solid or stranded mm 0,75-2,5 0,75-2,5 0,75-2,5 0,75-2,5 0,5-2,5
3)
-
flexible mm 0,5-2,5 0,5-2,5 0,5-2,5 0,5-2,5 0,5-2,5
3)
-
flexible with multicore cable end mm 0,5-1,5 0,5-1,5 0,5-1,5 0,5-1,5 0,5-1,5 -
Clamps per pole 1 1 1 1 2 -
Auxiliary Contacts
1)
V AC - - - - - 440
2)
Thermal rated current Ith 40C A - - - - - 10
Ambient temperature 60C A - - - - - 6
Rated operational current Ie 220-240V A - - - - - 3
380-415V A - - - - - 2
440V A - - - - - 1,6
Rated operational current Ie 24-60V A - - - - - 2
110V A - - - - - 0,4
per pole 220V A - - - - - 0,1
Short-circuit current 1kA, contact welding not accepted
max. fuse size gL (gG) A - - - - - 10
Switching time
At control voltage Us 10% make time ms 7-16 9-15 11-15 11-15 15-19 -
release time ms 6-12 4-8 6-13 6-13 8-25 -
arc duration ms 10-15 10-15 10-15 10-15 10-15 -
1) Suitable for: earthed-neutral systems, overvoltage category I to IV, pollution degree 3 (standard-industry): Uimp = 8kV. 3) Maximum cable cross-section with prepared conductor
2) Suitable for: earthed-neutral systems, overvoltage category I to III, pollution degree 3 (standard-industry): Uimp = 4kV. 4) AC5b motor 2-pole 230V 1,1kW
DI MENSI ONS
Page
129
WBZ MODULAR CONTACTOR TYPES R20.., R25.., R40.., R63.., K1R40, RH11
W 1 MODULE W 2 MODULES
W 3 MODULES
W AUXI LI ARY CONTACT BLOCK
BZ326470
W MODULAR CONTACTOR, SOLENOID OPERATED
BZ326441
SCHEMATI CS
Page
130
WCONNECTION DIAGRAM FOR MODULAR CONTACTOR
BZ TYPES R20.., R25.., R40.., R63.., K1R40
W 1-POLE, 1 MODULE
R20-10 230
WCONNECTION DIAGRAM FOR AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCK
W 2-POLE, 0,5 MODULE
RH11
W 2-POLE, 1 MODULE
R20-20 24
R20-20 230
R20-11 24
R20-11 230
R20-02 230
R25-02 24
R25-02 230
W 3-POLE, 3 MODULES
R40-30 230
W 4-POLE, 2 MODULES
R25-40 24
R25-40 230
R25-31 24
R25-31 230
R25-13 24
R25-13 230
R25-04 24
W 4-POLE, 3 MODULES
R40-40 24
R40-40 230
R40-22 230
W 4-POLE
K1R40 230
R63-40 24
R63-40 230 R63-31 230
(21)
(22)
R63-04 230
(21)
(22)
(13)
(14)
SCHEMATI CS
Page
131
W TYPES R20.., R25.. 1-POLE, 1 MODULE
WPOSITION OF THE TERMINALS FOR MODULAR CONTACTOR
BZ TYPES R.., K1R40 AND AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCK RH11
1NO
13 23 33 43 A1
14 24 34 44 A2
1
2
A2
A1
43
31
32
44
W TYPE K1R40 4-POLE, (WI DTH = 45 mm)
4NO
W TYPE RH11 2-POLE, 0,5 MODULE
1NO + 1NC
W TYPES R25.. 4-POLE, 2 MODULES
4NO
1 3
2 4
5 7
6 8
W TYPES R20.., R25.. 2-POLE, 1 MODULE
2NO
1 3
2 4
A2
A1
1NO + 1NC
1 R3
2 R4
A2
A1
2NC
R1 R3
R2 R4
A2
A1
A2
A1
W TYPES R40.. 3-POLE, 3 MODULES
3NO
1 3
2 4
5
6
A2
A1
1 3
2 4
5 7
6 8
A2
A1
1 3
2 4
5 R7
6 R8
A2
A1
1 3
2 4
R5 R7
R6 R8
A2
A1
R1 R3
R2 R4
R5 R7
R6 R8
A2
A1
3NO + 1NC
1 3
2 4
5 R7
6 R8
1NO + 3NC
1 R3
2 R4
R5 R7
R6 R8
4NC
R1 R3
R2 R4
R5 R7
R6 R8
W TYPES R40.., R63.. 4-POLE, 3 MODULES
4NO 3NO + 1NC 2NO + 2NC 4NC
A2
A1
A2
A1
A2
A1
Page
132
LA MI NI ATUR POWER AND AUXI LI ARY CONTACTORS
LA1 MINIATUR POWER CONTACTORS
FOR SWITCHING MOTORS AC3, 3POLE
AUXI LI ARY CONTACT BLOCKS
FOR MI NI ATUR POWER CONTACTORS
TOP-TECHNIC
TOP-TECHNIC
SURGE SUPPRESSORS
FOR MI NI ATUR CONTACTORS
TOP-TECHNIC
LA MI NI ATUR POWER AND AUXI LI ARY CONTACTORS
Page
133
LA MINIATUR POWER AND
AUXI LI ARY CONTACTORS
w CONTENTS
DIMENSIONS ........................................................................................................ Page 139
SCHEMATICS .......................................................................................................... Page 140
MI NI ATUR POWER AND AUXI LI ARY CONTACTORS
Page
134
TYPE LA1
Contactor AC3: 4KW/400V, 1NO AC24V 50/60Hz LA100910
Contactor AC3: 4KW/400V, 1NC
1)
AC24V 50/60Hz LA100920
Contactor AC3: 4KW/400V, 1NO AC220-240V 50Hz LA100913
1)
AC220-240V 50Hz LA100923
Contactor AC3: 4KW/400V, 1NO DC24V LA100915
1)
DC24V LA100925
Contactor AC3: 4KW/400V, 1NO DC24V
2)
LA10091B
1)
Additional auxiliary contact blocks for contactors with 1NC included: only LA190153, 154, 155, 156 to be used (for miniatur auxiliary contactors)
2)
With integrated coil-protection: diode + Z-diode
LA100910
W LA1 MINIATUR POWER CONTACTORS FOR SWITCHING MOTORS AC3 3POLE
TYPE LA1
Contactor AC3: 4KW/400V AC220-240V 50Hz LA100943
Contactor AC3: 4KW/400V DC24V
2)
LA10094B
2)
With integrated coil-protection: diode + Z-diode
LA100943
W LA1 MINIATUR POWER CONTACTORS FOR SWITCHING MOTORS AC3 4POLE
Auxiliary contact block 2NO+2NC DIN EN 50012 LA190150
LA190150
WAUXI LI ARY CONTACT BLOCKS FOR MI NI ATUR POWER CONTACTORS
W SCHRACK-I NFO
Auxiliary contact blocks for LA1 miniatur power contactors with 1 NO included.
For LA1 miniatur power contactors with 1 NC included, see next page.
MI NI ATUR POWER AND AUXI LI ARY CONTACTORS
Page
135
TYPE LA1
Contactor AC15: 3A/230V, 4NO AC24V 50/60Hz LA100770
Contactor AC15: 3A/230V, 4NO AC220-240V 50Hz LA100773
Contactor AC15: 3A/230V, 4NO AC380-400V 50Hz LA100774
Contactor AC15: 3A/230V, 3NO+1NC AC24V 50/60Hz LA100780
Contactor AC15: 3A/230V, 3NO+1NC AC220-240V 50Hz LA100783
Contactor AC15: 3A/230V, 2NO+2NC AC24V 50/60Hz LA100790
Contactor AC15: 3A/230V, 2NO+2NC AC220-240V 50Hz LA100793
Contactor AC15: 3A/230V, 2NO+2NC DC24V LA100795
LA100770
WLA1 MI NI ATUR AUXI LI ARY CONTACTORS AC15 4POLE
Auxiliary contact block 2NC DIN EN 50011 LA190155
Auxiliary contact block 4NO DIN EN 50011 LA190156
LA190156
WAUXI LI ARY CONTACT BLOCKS FOR MI NI ATUR AUXI LI ARY CONTACTORS
RC-Unit 250-415VAC 50Hz LA190194
LA190194
WSURGE SUPPRESSOR FOR MI NI ATUR CONTACTORS
W SCHRACK-I NFO
Auxiliary contact blocks for all LA1 miniatur auxiliary contactors and also for LA1 miniatur
power contactors with 1 NC included.
Page
136
WMINIATUR POWER CONTACTORS LA1009..
acc. to IEC 947-4-1, VDE 0660, EN 60947-4-1
Contactor Type LA1009..
Main contacts
1)
Making capacity Ieff at Ue = 690V AC A 165
Breaking capacity Ieff 400V AC A 100
cos = 0,65 500V AC A 90
690V AC A 80
Switching of resistive load
Rated operational current Ie (= Ith) open at 40C A 20
Rated operational power of three-phase motors 230V kW 7,9
50-60Hz, cos = 1 240V kW 8,3
400V kW 13,8
415V kW 14,3
Minimum cross-section of conductor at load with Ie (= Ith) mm 2,5
Utilization category AC2 and AC3
Switching of three-phase motors
Rated operational current Ie 220V A 12
open and enclosed 230V A 11,5
240V A 11
380-400V A 9
415-440V A 8
500V A 7
660-690V A 5
Rated operational power of three-phase motors 220-240V kW 3
50-60Hz 380-400V kW 4
500-690V kW 4
Switching of squirrel cage motors, inching
open and enclosed 230V A 11,5
240V A 11
380-400V A 9
415-440V A 8
500V A 7
660-690V A 5
Rated operational power of three-phase motors 220-240V kW 3
50-60Hz 380-400V kW 4
500-690V kW 4
1) Suitable at 690V for: earthed-neutral systems, overvoltage category I to IV, pollution degree 3 (standard-industry): Uimp = 8kV. Data for other conditions on request.
Page
137
WMINIATUR POWER CONTACTORS LA1009..
acc. to IEC 947-4-1, VDE 0660, EN 60947-4-1
Switching of resistive load 1 pole 24V A 20
Time constant L/R 1ms 60V A 20
220V A 0,6
3 poles in series 24V A 20
60V A 20
110V A 20
220V A 16
Utilization category DC3 and DC5
Switching of of shunt motors 1 pole 24V A 20
and series motors 60V A 5
Time constant L/R 1ms 110V A 1
Rated operational current Ie 220V A 0,15
3 poles in series 24V A 20
60V A 20
110V A 20
220V A 2
Maximum ambient temperature
Operation open C -40 to +60 (+90)
enclosed C -40 to +40
with thermal overload relay open C -25 to +60
enclosed C -25 to +40
Storage C -50 to +90
Short circuit protection for contactors without thermal overload relay
Coordination-type "1" according to IEC 947-4-1
Contact welding without hazard of persons, max. fuse size gL (gG) A 40
Coordination-type "2" according to IEC 947-4-1
Light contact welding accepted, max. fuse size gL (gG) A 25
Contact welding not accepted
max. fuse size gL (gG) A 10
For contactors with thermal overload relay the device with the smaller admissible
backup fuse (contactor or thermal overload relay) determines the fuse size.
Cable cross-sections for contactors without thermal overload relay
Main connector solid or stranded mm 0,5-2,5
flexible mm 0,5-2,5
flexible with multicore cable end mm 0,5-1,5
Clamps per pole 2
solid or stranded AWG 18-14
Frequency of operations
without load 1/h 10000
Contactors without thermal overload relay AC3, Ie 1/h 600
AC4, Ie 1/h 120
DC3, Ie 1/h 600
6
5
DC operated S x 10
6
15
Short time current
10s-current A 96
Power loss
per pole at Ie/AC3 400V W 0,15
Resistance to shock according to IEC 68-2-27
Shock time 20ms sine-wave
AC operated NO g 5
NC g 5
DC operated NO g 8
NC g 6
1) With reduced control voltage range 0,9 up to 1,0 x Us and with reduced rated current Ie /AC1according to Ie /AC3
Page
138
WMINIATUR POWER AND AUXILIARY CONTACTORS LA1009.., LA1007..
acc. to IEC 947-5-1, VDE 0660, EN 60947-5-1
Contactor Type LA 100 7.. / LA 100 9.. AC operated LA 100 7.. / LA 100 9.. DC operated
Auxiliary contacts
1)
690
1)
Thermal rated current Ith to 690V
Ambient temperature 40C A 10 10
60C A 6 6
Power loss
per pole at Ith W 0,5 0,5
Rated operational current Ie 220-240V A 3 3
380-415V A 2 2
440V A 1,6 1,6
500V A 1,2 1,2
660-690V A 0,6 0,6
Rated operational current Ie 60V A 2 2
110V A 0,4 0,4
220V A 0,1 0,1
Maximum ambient temperature
Operation open C -40 to +60 (+90)
3)
-40 to +60 (+90)
3)
enclosed C -40 to +40 -40 to +40
Storage C -50 to +90 -50 to +90
Short-circuit current 1kA
Contact welding not accepted, max. fuse size gL (gG) A 20 20
For contactors with thermal overload relay the device with the smaller admissible
control fuse (contactor or thermal overload relay) determines the fuse size.
AC operated inrush VA 25 -
sealed VA 4-5 -
W 1,2 -
DC operated inrush W - 2,5
sealed W - 2,5
Operation range of coils
in multiples of control voltage Us 0,85-1,1 0,8-1,1
Switching time at control voltage Us 10%
4) 5)
AC operated make time ms 15-25 -
release time ms 8-25 -
arc duration ms 10-15 -
DC operated make time ms - 15-19
release time ms - 8-25
arc duration ms - 10-15
Cable cross-sections
all connectors solid mm 0,75-2,5 0,75-2,5
flexible mm 0,75-2,5 0,75-2,5
flexible with multicore cable end mm 0,5-2,5 0,5-2,5
Clamps per pole 2 2
solid or stranded AWG 18-14 18-14
1) Suitable at 690V for: earthed-neutral systems, overvoltage category I to IV, pollution degree 3 (standard-industry): Uimp = 8kV. Data for other conditions on request.
3) With reduced control voltage range 0,9 up to 1,0 x Us and with reduced thermal rated current Ith to Ie /AC15.
4) Summary switching time = release time + arc duration
5) Release time of NC make time of NO increase when suppressor units for voltage peak protection are used (Varistor, RC-units, Diode units).
DI MENSI ONS
Page
139
LA 100 9..
LA 101 2..
W MINIATUR POWER AND AUXILIARY CONTACTORS
W CONTACTORS
LA1007.., LA1009..
AC and DC operated
W AUXI LI ARY CONTACT BLOCK
LA19015.
W ACCESSORY FOR MINIATUR POWER AND AUXILIARY CONTACTORS
W RC UNI T
LA190194
SCHEMATI CS
Page
140
W CONNECTION DIAGRAMS FOR MINIATUR POWER CONTACTORS
W 3-POLE
terminal designations according to EN 50012
LA10091.
1 NO included
LA10092.
1 NC included
W 4-POLE
LA10094.
4 NO
W CONNECTION DIAGRAMS FOR MINIATUR AUXILIARY CONTACTORS
W 4-POLE
LA10077.
4 NO
LA10078.
3 NO + 1 NC
LA10079.
2 NO + 2 NC
W AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCKS FOR MINIATUR CONTACTORS
LA190150
2 NO + 2 NC
LA190151
1 NO + 1 NC
LA100153
2 NO + 2 NC
LA190154
1 NO + 1 NC
LA100155
2 NC
LA190156
4 NO
W FOR POWER CONTACTORS WI TH 1 NO I NCLUDED
W FOR POWER CONTACTORS WI TH 1 NC I NCLUDED AND ALL AUXI LI ARY CONTACTORS
SCHEMATI CS
Page
141
13
14
21 31 43
22 32 44
W POSITION OF THE TERMINALS FOR MINIATUR POWER CONTACTORS
A1
A2
1 3 5 13
2 4 6 14
)
)
! #
" $
)
)
! #
" $
W 3-POLE
LA10091.
1 NO included
LA10092.
1 NC included
W 4-POLE
LA10094.
4 NO
7
8
)
)
! #
" $
13 23 33 43 A1
14 24 34 44 A2
)
)
! #
" $
13 21 33 43 A1
14 22 34 44 A2
)
)
! #
" $
13 21 31 43 A1
14 22 32 44 A2
W POSITION OF THE TERMINALS FOR MINIATUR AUXILIARY CONTACTORS
W 4-POLE
LA10077.
4 NO
LA10078.
3 NO + 1 NC
LA10079.
2 NO + 2 NC
21 31 43 53
22 32 44 54
13
14
21 31 43
22 32 44
21 33
22 34
W POSITION OF THE TERMINALS FOR AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCKS
FOR MINIATUR POWER AND AUXILIARY CONTACTORS
W FOR POWER CONTACTORS WI TH 1 NO I NCLUDED
front mounted auxiliary contact blocks, terminal designations according to EN 50012
LA190150
2 NO + 2 NC
LA190151
1 NO + 1 NC
13
14
21 31 43
22 32 44
51 61 73 83
52 62 74 84
13
14
21 31 43
22 32 44
51 63
52 64
W FOR POWER CONTACTORS WI TH 1 NC I NCLUDED AND ALL AUXI LI ARY CONTACTORS
front mounted auxiliary contact blocks, terminal designations according to EN 50005
LA190153
2 NO + 2 NC
LA190154
1 NO + 1 NC
13
14
21 31 43
22 32 44
51 61
52 62
LA190155
2 NC
13
14
21 31 43
22 32 44
53 63 73 83
54 64 74 84
LA190156
4 NO
ALEA THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS
Page
142
LSTD
LST2
TOP-TECHNIC
LST3
TOP-TECHNIC
LST0
Page
143
ALEA THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS
ALEA THERMAL
OVERLOAD RELAYS
w CONTENTS
OVERVIEW.............................................................................................................. Page 144
ACCESSORIES........................................................................................................ Page 156
CHARAKTERISTIC CURVES.............................................................................. Page 157
DIMENSIONS ........................................................................................................ Page 158
SCHEMATICS .......................................................................................................... Page 159
Page
144
THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS
W LST THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS OVERVI EW
LSTD LST0 LST2 LST3
FEATURES BENEFITS LST
GENERAL DATA
SIZES Are coordinated with the dimensions, connections and technical S00 ... S3
characteristics of the other devices in the ALEA modular system
Permit the mounting of slim and compact load feeders in widths
of 45 mm (S00), 45 mm (S0), 55 mm (S2), 70 mm (S3)
Simplify configuration
SEAMLESS CURRENT RANGE Allows easy and consistent configuration with one series of
overload relays (for small to large loads) 0.11 ... 100 A
PROTECTION FUNCTIONS
TRIPPING IN THE EVENT OF OVERLOAD Provides optimum inverse-time delayed protection of
loads against excessive temperature rises due to overload
TRIPPING IN THE EVENT OF PHASE UNBALANCE Provides optimum inverse-time delayed protection of loads
against excessive temperature rises due to phase unbalance
TRIPPING IN THE EVENT OF PHASE FAILURE Minimizes heating of induction motors during phase failure
PROTECTION OF SINGLE-PHASE LOADS Enables the protection of single-phase loads
FEATURES
RESET FUNCTION Allows manual or automatic resetting of the relay
REMOTE RESET FUNCTION (ON REQUEST) Allows the remote resetting of the relay (by means of separate module)
TEST FUNCTION FOR AUXILIARY CONTACTS Allows easy checking of the function and wiring
STATUS DISPLAYS Displays the current operating state
LARGE CURRENT ADJUSTMENT BUTTON Makes it easier to set the relay exactly to the correct current value
INTEGRATED AUXILIARY CONTACTS (1 NO + 1 NC) Allows the load to be switched off if necessary
Can be used to signal output
DESIGN OF LOAD FEEDERS
SHORT-CIRCUIT STRENGTH UP TO 100 KA AT 690 V Provides optimum protection of the loads and operating personnel
(in conjunction with the corresponding fuses in the event of short-circuits due to insulation faults or faulty
or the corresponding motor starter protector) switching operations
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL MATCHING Simplifies configuration
TO CONTACTORS LSSD, LSDD, LSD0, LSD2, LSD3 Reduces wiring outlay and costs
Enables stand-alone installation as well as space-saving direct mounting
SPRING-LOADED TERMINAL CONNECTION Enables fast and maintenance-free connections S00
SYSTEM FOR MAIN CIRCUIT (ON REQUEST) Permits vibration-resistant connections
SPRING-LOADED TERMINAL CONNECTION Enables fast and maintenance-free connections
SYSTEM FOR AUXILIARY CIRCUITS (ON REQUEST) Permits vibration-resistant connections
OTHER FEATURES
TEMPERATURE COMPENSATION Allows the use of the relays at high temperatures without derating
Prevents premature tripping
Allows compact installation of the control cabinet without distance
between the devices/load feeders
Simplifies configuration
Enables space to be saved in the control cabinet
VERY HIGH LONG-TERM STABILITY Provides safe protection for the loads even after years of use in
severe operating conditions
Page
145
TYPE LSTD / LST0 / LST2 / LST3
APPLICATIONS
System protection
1)
Motor protection
Alternating current, 3-phase
Alternating current, 1-phase
DC current
SIZE OF CONTACTOR S00, S0, S2, S3
RATED OPERATIONAL CURRENT In
SIZE S00 up to 12A
SIZE S0 up to 25A
SIZE S2 up to 50A
SIZE S3 up to 100A
RATED OPERATIONAL VOLTAGE Ue 690/1000 VAC
2)
RATED FREQUENCY 50/60 Hz
TRIP CLASS Class 10
THERMAL OVERLOAD RELEASE 0.11 ... 0.16A
up to 80 ... 100A
RATING FOR INDUCTION MOTOR AT 400 V AC 0.04 KW up to 45 KW
ACCESSORIES FOR SIZES S00 S0 S2 S3
Terminal brackets for stand-alone installation
Mechanical RESET
Cable release for RESET
Electrical remote RESET
Terminal covers -- --
Sealable covers for setting knobs integrated integrated integrated integrated
1)
The units are responsible in the main circuit for overload protection of the assigned electrical loads
(e.g. motors), feeder cable and other switching and protection devices in the respective load feeder.
2)
Size 3 up to 1000 V AC.
Has this function or can use this accessory.
-- Does not have this function or cannot use this accessory.
W LST THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS OVERVI EW
LSTD LST0 LST2 LST3
Page
146
W CONNECTION
W LST THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS GENERAL I NFORMATI ONS
Connection of the auxiliary circuit
Connection type Screw terminals
Terminal screw Pozidriv size 2
Tightening torque Nm 0.8 ... 1.2
Conductor cross-sections (min./max.), 1 or 2 conductors
- solid mm
2
1 (0.5 ... 4), 2 (0.5 ... 2.5)
- finely stranded without end sleeve mm
2
- finely stranded with end sleeve mm

2
1 (0.5 ... 2.5), 2 (0.5 ... 1.5)
- stranded mm
2
- AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG 2 (20 ... 14)

Connection type Spring-loaded terminals on request for size 00
- solid mm
2
2 (0.25 ... 1.5)
2
--
2
2 (0.25 ... 1.5)
- stranded mm
2
2 (0.25 ... 1.5)
- AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG 2 (24 ... 16)
OVERLOAD RELAYS CURRENT MEASUREMENT CURRENT RANGE CONTACTORS (TYPE, SIZE, RATING IN kW)
LSSD+LSDD/S00 LSS0+LSD0/S0 LSD2/S2 LSD3/S3
TYPE TYPE A 3/4/5.5 5.5/7.5/11 15/18.5/22 30/37/45
LSTD integrated 0.11 12 -- -- --
LST0 integrated 1.8 25 -- -- --
LST2 integrated 5.5 50 -- -- --
LST3 integrated 18 100 -- -- --
Page
147
W SCHRACK I NFO
The LST thermal overload relays up to 100 A have been designed for inverse-time delayed protection of loads with
normal starting against excessive temperature rises due to overload or phase failure. An overload or phase failure results
in an increase of the motor current beyond the set rated motor current. Via heating elements, this current rise heats up
the bimetal strips inside the device which then bend and as a result trigger the auxiliary contacts by means of a tripping
mechanism. The auxiliary contacts then switch off the load by means of a contactor. The break time depends on the ratio
between the tripping current and set current Ie and is stored in the form of a long-term stable tripping characteristic. The
"tripped" status is signaled by means of a switch position indicator. Resetting takes place either manually or auto matically
after the recovery time has elapsed. The devices are manufactured in accordance with environmental guidelines and
contain environmentally friendly and reusable materials.
WDESI GN AND FUNCTI ON
W DEVI CE CONCEPT
The LST thermal overload relays are compact devices, i.e. current measurement and the evaluation unit are integrated in a
single enclosure.
W MOUNTI NG OPTI ONS
The LST thermal overload relays can be mounted directly onto the LSS/LSD contactors (exception: size 00 with Cage Clamp
connection can only be installed as a stand-alone installation). The devices can also be installed as stand-alone installations
with the corresponding terminal brackets.
W CONNECTI ON METHOD
All sizes of the LST thermal overload relays with screw terminal can be connected to the auxiliary and main current paths.
Rails can be connected to the main conductor connections of size 3 overload relays if the box terminals are removed.
As an alternative, the devices are also available with Cage Clamp terminals. The auxiliary conductor connections of these
devices, and for size 00 the main conductor connections as well, are fitted with Cage Clamp terminals (on request).
W OVERLOAD RELAYS I N CONTACTOR ASSEMBLI ES FOR WYE-DELTA STARTI NG
When overload relays are used in combination with contactor assemblies for wye-delta starting it must be noted that only
0.58 times the motor current flows through the line contactor. An overload relay mounted onto the line contactor must
be set to 0.58 times the motor current. An assignment of the LST thermal overload relays to the line contactors of our
LSY contactor assemblies for wye-delta starting can be found under "Power and Auxiliary Contactors".
W OPERATI ON WI TH FREQUENCY CONVERTER
The LST thermal overload relays are suitable for operation with frequency converters. Depending on the frequency of the
converter, a higher current than the motor current must be used in some cases due to eddy-currents and skin effects.
(1) Connection for mounting onto contactors: Optimally adapted in electrical, mechanical and design terms to the
contactors and soft starters, these connecting pins can be used for direct mounting of the overload relays. Stand-
alone installation is possible as an alternative (in some cases in conjunction with a stand-alone installation module).
(2) Selector switch for manual/automatic RESET and RESET button: With this switch you can choose between manual
and automatic RESET. A device set to manual RESET can be reset locally by pressing the RESET button. A remote
RESET is possible using the RESET modules (accessories), which are independent of size (on request).
(3) Switch position indicator and TEST function of the wiring: Indicates a trip and enables the wiring test.
(4) Motor current setting: Setting the device to the rated motor current is easy with the large rotary knob.
(5) STOP button: If the STOP button is pressed, the NC contact is opened. This switches off the contactor downstream.
The NC contact is closed again when the button is released.
(6) Transparent, sealable cover Secures the motor current setting, TEST function and the selector switch for manual/
automatic RESET against adjustment.
(7) Supply terminals: The generously sized terminals permit connection of two conductors with different cross-sections
for the main and auxiliary circuits. The auxiliary circuit can be connected with screw terminals and alternatively with
spring-loaded terminals (on request).
1
2
5
7
3
4
6
Page
148
W BASI C FUNCTI ONS
The LST thermal overload relays are designed for:
Inverse-time delayed protection of loads from overloading
Inverse-time delayed protection of loads from phase failure
W CONTROL CI RCUI T
The LST thermal overload relays do not require an additional supply voltage for operation.
W SHORT-CI RCUI T PROTECTI ON
Fuses or motor starter protectors must be used for short-circuit protection.
W TRI P CLASSES
The LST thermal overload relays are available for normal starting conditions with trip class 10.
W PHASE FAI LURE PROTECTI ON
The LST thermal overload relays are fitted with phase failure sensitivity in order to minimize temperature rises of the load
in the case of a phase failure during single-phase operation.
W SETTI NG
The LST thermal overload relays are set to the rated motor current by means of a rotary knob. The scale of the rotary
knob is shown in ampere.
W MANUAL AND AUTOMATI C RESET
Automatic and manual reset is selected by pressing and turning the blue button (RESET button). If the button is set to
manual reset, the overload relay can be reset directly by pressing the RESET button. Resetting is possible in combination
with mechanical and electrical reset options from the range of accessories. If the blue button is set to automatic RESET,
the relay is reset automatically. The time between tripping and resetting is determined by the recovery time.
W RECOVERY TI ME
After tripping due to overload, the LST thermal overload relays require some time until the bimetal strips have cooled
down. The device can only be reset after the bimetal strips have cooled down. This time (recovery time) depends on the
tripping characteristics and strength of the tripping current. The recovery time allows the load to cool down after
tripping due to overload.
W TEST FUNCTI ON
The TEST slide can be used to check whether the operational LST thermal overload relay is working properly. Actuating
the slide simulates tripping of the relay. During this simulation the NC contact (95-96) is opened and the NO contact (97-
98) is closed. This tests whether the auxiliary circuit has been correctly connected to the overload relay. If the LST
thermal overload relay has been set to automatic RESET, the overload relay is automatically reset when the TEST slide is
released. The relay must be reset with the RESET button if it has been set to manual RESET.
W STOP FUNCTI ON
If the STOP button is pressed, the NC contact is opened. This switches off the contactor downstream and thus the load.
The load is switched on again when the STOP button is released.
W DI SPLAY OF THE OPERATI NG STATE
The respective operating state of the LST thermal overload relay is displayed by means of the position of the marking on
the TEST function/switch position indicator slide. After tripping due to overload or phase failure, the marking on the slide
is to left on the "O" mark, otherwise it is on the "I" mark.
W AUXI LI ARY CONTACTS
The LST thermal overload relays are fitted with an NO contact for the "tripped" signal, and an NC contact for
disconnecting the contactor.
Page
149
THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAY SIZE 00
Thermal overload relay 0,11...0,16 A LSTD0016
Thermal overload relay 0,7...1 A LSTD0100
Thermal overload relay 7...10 A LSTD1000
Thermal overload relay 9...12 A LSTD1200
Thermal overload relay 1,8...2,5 A LST00250
Thermal overload relay 2,8...4 A LST00400
Thermal overload relay 7...10 A LST01000
Thermal overload relay 9...12,5 A LST01250
W LST THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAY, SI ZE 00
LSTD....
LST0....
Page
150
LST THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS
Thermal overload relay 9...12,5 A LST21250
Overload relay thermal 18...25 A LST32500
DESCRI PTI ON SI ZE ORDER NO.
Holder for stand-alone installation 00 LSZDTE01
Holder for stand-alone installation 0 LSZ0TE01
LST2....
LST3....
W HOLDER FOR LST THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAY
LSZ....
Page
151
W THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS LSTD, LST0, LST2, LST3
Type LSTD LST0 LST2 LST3
Size 00 0 2 3
Width 45 mm 45 mm 55 mm 70 mm
General data
Trips in the event of Overload and phase failure
Trip class acc. to IEC 60947-4-1 CLASS 10
Phase failure sensitivity Yes
Overload warning No
Reset and recovery
Reset options after tripping Manual, automatic and remote RESET
1)
Recovery time
- for automatic RESET min Depends on the strength of the tripping current and characteristic
- for manual RESET min Depends on the strength of the tripping current and characteristic
- for remote RESET min Depends on the strength of the tripping current and characteristic
Features
Display of operating state on device Yes, by means of TEST function/switch position indicator slide
TEST function Yes
RESET button Yes
STOP button Yes
Ambient temperature
Storage/transport C -55 ... +80
Operation C -20 ... +70
Temperature compensation C Up to 60
Permissible rated current at
- temperature inside control cabinet 60 C % 100 (over +60 C current reduction is not required)
- temperature inside control cabinet 70 C % 87
Repeat terminals
Coil repeat terminal Yes Not required
Auxiliary contact repeat terminal Yes Not required
Degree of protection acc. to IEC 60529 IP20 IP20
2)
Touch protection acc. to IEC 61140 Finger-safe
Shock resistance with sine acc. to IEC 60068-2-27 g/ms 8/10
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) Interference immunity
Conductor-related interference
- burst acc. to IEC 61000-4-4 (corresponds to degree of severity 3) kV EMC interference immunity is not relevant for thermal overload relays
- surge acc. to IEC 61000-4-5 (corresponds to degree of severity 3) kV EMC interference immunity is not relevant for thermal overload relays
Electrostatic discharge acc. to IEC 61000-4-2 kV EMC interference immunity is not relevant for thermal overload relays
(corresponds to degree of severity 3)
Field-related interference acc. to IEC 61000-4-3 V/m EMC interference immunity is not relevant for thermal overload relays
(corresponds to degree of severity 3)
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) Emitted interference EMC interference immunity is not relevant for thermal overload relays
Resistance to extreme climates Air humidity % 100
Dimensions See dimensional drawings
Installation altitude above sea level m Up to 2000; above this, please enquire
Mounting position The diagrams show the permissible mounting positions for direct mounting and
stand-alone installation. For installation in the hatched area, a setting correction
of 10 % must be implemented.
Stand-alone installation:
Contactor + overload relay:
Type of mounting Direct mounting
3)
/ Direct mounting/stand-alone installation with
stand-alone stand alone holder
installation with
stand alone holder
1)
Remote RESET in combination with the corresponding accessories (on request).
2)
Terminal compartment: degree of protection IP00.
3)
The LSTD overload relay with Cage Clamp terminals can only be installed as a stand-alone installation.
NSB01 364 1 35
0
45
1 35
45
1
e
x 1 , 1
90 90
0
1
e
x 1 , 1 1
e
x 1 , 1
NSB01 363 1 35
0
22, 5
22, 5
1 35
1
e
0
x 1 , 1
Page
152
Size 00 0 2 3
Main circuit
i
(degree of pollution 3) V 690 1000
imp
kV 6 8
Rated operational voltage U
e
V 690 1000
Type of current
Direct current Yes
Alternating current Yes, frequency range up to 400 Hz
Set current A 0.11 ... 0.16 to 1.8 ... 2.5 to 5.5 ... 8 to 18 ... 25 to
9 ... 12 20 ... 25 40 ... 50 80 ... 100
Power loss per unit (max.) W 3.9 ... 6.6 3.9 ... 6 6 ... 9 10 ... 16.5
With fuse without contactor
With fuse and contactor See "Technical specifications" (short-circuit protection with fuses/motor starter protectors
for motor feeders)
Safe isolation between main and auxiliary V 500 690
conducting path acc. to IEC 60947-1
Connection for main circuit
Connection type Screw terminals with box terminal
Terminal screw Pozidriv size 2 Allen screw 4mm
Tightening torque Nm 0.8 ... 1.2 2 ... 2.5 3 ... 4.5 4 ... 6
Conductor cross-sections (min./max.),
1 or 2 conductors
- solid mm
2
2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)
2)
2 x (1 ... 2.5)
2)
2 x (0.75 ... 16) 2 x (2.5 ... 16)
2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)
2)
2 x (2.5 ... 6)
2)
Max. 2 x (1 ... 4)
2)
Max. 2 x (2.5 ... 10
2)
)
2
2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)
2)
2 x (1 ... 2.5)
2)
2 x (0.75 ... 16) 2 x (2.5 ... 35)
2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)
2)
2 x (2.5 ... 6)
2)
1 x (0.75 ... 25) 1 x (2.5 ... 50)
- stranded mm
2
2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)
2)
2 x (1 ... 2.5)
2)
2 x (0.75 ... 25) 2 x (10 ... 50)
2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)
2)
2 x (2.5 ... 6)
2)
1 x (0.75 ... 35) 1 x (10 ... 70)
Max. 2 x (1 ... 4)
2)
Max. 2 x (2.5 ... 10)
2)
- AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG 2 x (18 ... 14) 2 x (14 ... 10) 2 x (18 ... 3) 2 x (10 ... 1/0)
1 x (18 ... 1) 1 x (10 ... 2/0)
- ribbon cable conductors (number x width x thickness) mm -- 2 x (6 x 9 x 0.8) 2 x (6 x 9 x 0.8)
Busbar connection Busbar connection
1)
Terminal screw -- M6 x 20
Tightening torque Nm -- 4 ... 6
Conductor cross-sections (min./max.)
- finely stranded with cable lug mm
2
-- 2 x 70
- stranded with cable lug mm
2
-- 3 x 70
- AWG cables, solid or stranded, with cable lug AWG -- 2/0
- with connecting bar (max. width) mm -- 12
Connection type Cage Clamp terminals on request
- solid mm
2
2 x (0.25 ... 2.5) --
2
2 x (0.25 ... 2.5) --
2
2 x (0.25 ... 1.5) --
- stranded mm
2
-- --
- AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG 2 x (24 ... 14) --
1)
The box terminal is removable. Rail and cable lug connections are possible if the box terminal is removed.
2)
If two different conductor cross-sections are connected to one clamping point, both cross-sections must lie in the range specified. If identical cross-sections are used, this restriction does not apply.
Page
153
Size 00 0 2 3
Auxiliary circuit
Number of NO contacts 1
Number of NC contacts 1
Auxiliary contacts assignment 1 NO for the signal "tripped",
1 NC for disconnecting the contactor
i
V 690
imp
kV 6
Contact rating of the auxiliary contacts
NC contact with alternating current AC-14/AC-15,
rated operational current I
e
at Ue:
- 24 V A 4
- 120 V A 4
- 125 V A 4
- 230 V A 3
- 400 V A 2
- 600 V A 0.6
- 690 V A 0.5
NO contact with alternating current AC-14/AC-15,
rated operational current Ie at Ue:
- 24 V A 3
- 120 V A 3
- 125 V A 3
- 230 V A 2
- 400 V A 1
- 600 V A 0.6
- 690 V A 0.5
NC contact, NO contact with direct current DC-13,
rated operational current Ie at Ue:
- 24 V A 1
- 60 V A
1)
- 110 V A 0.22
- 125 V A 0.22
- 220 V A 0.11
Continuous thermal current Ith A 6
2)
Contact reliability (suitability for PLC control; 17 V, 5 mA) Yes
With fuse
- gL/gG operational class A 6
- Quick A 10
With miniature circuit breaker (C characteristic) A 6
Safe isolation between main and auxiliary conducting V 415
path acc. to IEC 60947-1
CSA, UL, UR rated data
Auxiliary circuit switching capacity B600, R300
Connection of the auxiliary circuit
Tightening torque Nm 0.8 ... 1.2
- solid mm2 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)
3)
, 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)
3)
- finely stranded without end sleeve mm2 --
- finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)
3)
, 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)
3)
- stranded mm2 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)
3)
, 2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)
3)
- AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG 2 x (18 ... 14)
Connection type Cage Clamp terminals on request
- solid 2 x (0.25 ... 2.5)
- finely stranded without end sleeve 2 x (0.25 ... 2.5)
- finely stranded with end sleeve 2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)
- stranded --
- AWG cables, solid or stranded 2 x (24 ... 14)
1)
On request.
2)
Up to I
k
0.5 kA; 260 V.
3)
If two different conductor cross-sections are connected to one clamping point, both cross-sections must lie in the range specified.
If identical cross-sections are used, this restriction does not apply.
W THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS SI ZE 00 AND SI ZE 0
Page
154
Overload relays 3 kW LSSD/LSDD07 4 kW LSSD/LSDD09 5.5 kW LSSD/LSDD12 UL-listed fuses
Setting range I
e
max = 7 A I
e
max = 9 A I
e
max = 12 A RK5
(at 50 Hz 400 V AC) (at 50 Hz 400 V AC) (at 50 Hz 400 V AC)
A gL/gG aM BS 88 gL/gG aM BS 88 gL/gG aM BS 88 A
Size 00
0.11 ... 0.16 0.5 -- -- 0.5 -- 0.5 1
0.14 ... 0.2 1 -- -- 1 -- 1 1
0.18 ... 0.25 1 -- -- 1 -- 1 1
0.22 ... 0.32 1.6 -- 2 1.6 -- 2 1.6 2 1
0.28 ... 0.4 2 -- 2 2 -- 2 2 2 1.6
0.35 ... 0.5 2 -- 2 2 -- 2 2 2 2
0.45 ... 0.63 2 -- 4 2 -- 4 2 4 2.5
0.55 ... 0.8 4 -- 4 4 -- 4 4 4 3
0.7 ... 1 4 -- 6 4 -- 6 4 6 4
0.9 ... 1.25 4 -- 6 4 -- 6 4 6 5
1.1 ... 1.6 6 -- 10 6 -- 10 6 10 6
1.4 ... 2 6 -- 10 6 -- 10 6 10 8
1.8 ... 2.5 10 -- 10 10 -- 10 10 10 10
2.2 ... 3.2 10 -- 16 10 -- 16 10 16 12
2.8 ... 4 16 -- 16 16 -- 16 16 16 16
3.5 ... 5 20 6 20 20 6 20 20 6 20 20
4.5 ... 6.3 20 6 20 20 6 20 20 6 20 25
5.5 ... 8 20 10 20 20 10 20 20 10 20 30
7 ... 10 -- -- -- 20 16 20 20 16 20 40
9 ... 12 -- -- -- -- -- -- 20 16 25 45
Short-circuit protection with fuses/motor starter protectors for motor feeders
With short-circuit currents up to 50 kA at 50/60 Hz 690 V AC Permissible short-circuit protection fuse for motor starters
comprising overload relay and contactor, type of coordination "2"
1)
Overload relays 5.5 kW LSS0/LSD012 7.5 kW LSS0/LSD017 5.5 kW LSS0/LSD025 UL-listed fuses
Setting range I
e
max = 12 A I
e
max = 17 A I
e
max = 25 A RK5
Size 0
1.8 ... 2.5 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
2.2 ... 3.2 10 16 10 16 10 16 12
2.8 ... 4 16 16 16 16 16 16 16
3.5 ... 5 20 6 20 20 6 20 20 6 20 20
4.5 ... 6.3 20 6 25 20 6 25 20 6 25 25
5.5 ... 8 25 10 25/32
2)
25 10 25/32
2)
25 10 32 30
7 ... 10 25 16 25/32
2)
25 16 25/32
2)
32 16 35 40
9 ... 12.5 25 20 25/32
2)
25 20 25/32
2)
35 20 35 45
11 ... 16 25 20 25/32
2)
25 20 25/32
2)
35 20 35 60
14 ... 20 -- -- -- 25 20 25/32
2)
35 20 35 80
17 ... 22 -- -- -- -- -- -- 35 20 35 80
20 ... 25 -- -- -- -- -- -- 35 20 35 100
1)
Assignment and short-circuit protective devices according to IEC60947-4-1:
The contactor or starter must not endanger persons or the installation in the event of a short-circuit.
Type of coordination 1: The contactor or the starter may be non-operational after every short-circuit release.
Type of coordination 2: The contactor or the starter must be operational after a short-circuit release (without replacement of parts).
Welding of the contacts is permissible however.
2)
At max. 415 V.
Page
155
W THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS SI ZE 2 AND SI ZE 3
Overload relays 3 kW LSD232 4 kW LSD240 5.5 kW LSD250 UL-listed fuses
Setting range I
e
max = 32 A I
e
max = 40 A I
e
max = 50 A RK5
Size 2
5.5 ... 8 25 10 25 25 10 25 25 10 25 30
7 ... 10 32 16 32 32 16 32 32 16 32 40
9 ... 12.5 35 16 35 35 16 35 35 16 35 50
11 ... 16 40 20 40 40 20 40 40 20 40 60
14 ... 20 50 25 50 50 25 50 50 25 50 80
18 ... 25 63 32 63 63 32 63 63 32 63 100
22 ... 32 63 35 63 63 35 63 80 35 80 125
28 ... 40 63 50 63 63 50 63 80 50 80 150
36 ... 45 -- -- -- 63 50 80 80 50 80 175
40 ... 50 -- -- -- -- -- -- 80 50 80 200
Short-circuit protection with fuses/motor starter protectors for motor feeders
With short-circuit currents up to 50 kA at 50/60 Hz 690 V AC Permissible short-circuit protection fuse for motor starters
comprising overload relay and contactor, type of coordination "2"
1)
Overload relays 30 kW LSD365 37 kW LSD380 45 kW LSD395 UL-listed fuses
Setting range I
e
max = 65 A I
e
max = 80 A I
e
max = 95 A RK5
Size 3
18 ... 25 63 32 63 63 32 63 63 32 63 100
22 ... 32 80 35 80 80 35 80 80 35 80 125
28 ... 40 80 50 80 80 50 80 80 50 80 150
36 ... 50 125 50 125 125 50 125 125 50 125 200
45 ... 63 125 63 125 160 63 160 160 63 160 250
57 ... 75 -- -- -- 160 80 160 160 80 160 300
70 ... 90 -- -- -- -- -- -- 160 100 160 350
80 ... 100 -- -- -- -- -- -- 160 100 160 350
1)
Assignment and short-circuit protective devices according to IEC60947-4-1:
The contactor or starter must not endanger persons or the installation in the event of a short-circuit.
Type of coordination 1: The contactor or the starter may be non-operational after every short-circuit release.
Type of coordination 2: The contactor or the starter must be operational after a short-circuit release (without replacement of parts).
Welding of the contacts is permissible however.
Page
156
ACCESSORI ES
W ACCESSORI ES FOR THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS
The following accessories are available for the LST thermal overload relays:
For the four overload relay sizes 00 to 3 one terminal bracket each for stand-alone installation
One mechanical RESET module for all sizes on request
One cable release for resetting devices which are difficult to access (for all sizes) on request
Terminal covers
Stand-alone holder
W OVERVIEW
W TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Type LSZDTE01 LSZ0TE01 LSZ2TE01 LSZ3TE01
For overload relays LSTD LST0 LST2 LST3
Mounting type For screw and snap-on mounting onto TH 35 standard mounting rails, size S3 also for TH 75 standard mounting rails
Connection for main circuit
Connection type Screw terminals Screw terminals with box terminal
Terminal screw Pozidriv size 2 Allen screw 4 mm
Conductor cross-section (min./max.), 1 or 2 conductors
- solid mm
2
1 x (0.5 ... 2.5), 1 x (1 ... 6), 2 x (0.75 ... 16) 2 x (2.5 ... 16)
max. 1 x (... 4) max. 1 x (... 10)
2
--
2
1 x (0.5 ... 2.5) 1 x (1 ... 6) 2 x (0.75 ... 16), 2 x (2.5 ... 35),
1 x (0.75 ... 25) 1 x (2.5 ... 50)
- stranded mm
2
1 x (0.5 ... 2.5), 1 x (1 ... 6), 2 x (0.75 ... 25), 2 x (10 ... 50),
max. 1 x (... 4) max. 1 x (... 10) 1 x (0.75 ... 35) 1 x (10 ... 70)
- AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG 1 x (18 ... 14) 1 x (14 ... 10) 2 x (18 ... 3), 2 x (10 ... 1/0),
1 x (18 ... 1) 1 x (10 ... 2/0)
- ribbon cable conductors (number x width x thickness) mm -- -- 2 x (6 x 9 x 0.8) 2 x (6 x 9 x 0.8)
Page
157
CHARACTERI STI C CURVES
10
100
1000
10 000
5000
2000
500
200
50
20
5
2
1
1
2
5
10
40
60
100
0,6 0,8 1 2 3 4 6 8 10 20 30 40 60 80 x 1n A
s
15
Tripping time
3-pole
loading
2-pole
loading
Current
min
W THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS CHARACTERI STI C CURVES
W SCHEMATIC REPRESENTATION OF A CHARACTERISTIC CURVE
The tripping characteristics show the relationship between the tripping time and tripping current as multiples of the set
current Ie and are given for symmetrical three-pole and two-pole loads from the cold state. The smallest current used for
tripping is called the minimum tripping current. According to IEC 60947-4-1, this current must be within specified limits.
The limits of the minimum tripping current for the LST thermal overload relays for symmetrical three-pole loads are
between 105 % and 120 % of the set current. The tripping characteristic starts with the minimum tripping current and
continues with higher tripping currents based on the characteristics of the so-called trip classes (CLASS 10, CLASS 20
etc.). The trip classes describe time intervals within which the overload relays have to trip with 7.2 times the set current
Ie from the cold state for symmetrical three-pole loads.
The tripping characteristic for a three-pole LST thermal overload relay (see characteristic curve for symmetrical three-pole
loads from the cold state) only applies if all three bimetal strips are simultaneously loaded with the same current. If only
two bimetal strips are heated due to a phase failure, these two strips alone must generate the necessary force to trigger
the tripping mechanism which would result in a longer tripping time or require a higher current. If these higher currents
are applied over a longer period, they usually cause damage to the load. To avoid damage, the LST thermal overload
relays are fitted with phase failure sensitivity which ensures faster tripping in accordance with the characteristic curve for
double-pole loads from the cold state by means of a suitable mechanical mechanism. Compared with a cold load, a load
at operating temperature obviously has a lower temperature reserve. This is taken into account by the LST thermal over-
load relays by reducing the tripping time to about 25 % when loaded with the set current Ie for an extended period.
The tripping times are as follows for:
The characteristic curves for the individual LST thermal overload relays can be requested from Technical Assistance.
Trip class Tripping times
CLASS 10A 2 s ... 10 s
CLASS 10 4 s ... 10 s
CLASS 20 6 s ... 20 s
CLASS 30 9 s ... 30 s
Page
158
DI MENSI ONS
WSCREW CONNECTI ON
Lateral distance to grounded components: at least 6 mm.
W LSTD, SI ZE 00
with mechanical RESET (on request)
W LST0, SI ZE 0
with terminal bracket for stand-alone installation
W LST2, SI ZE 2
W LST3, SI ZE 3
15,5
6
1
1
1
8
1
0
2
4 4
1
4
7
45
5 33
49
68
max. 185
148
17,4
46
min. 28...max. 130
12
32
12
max. 8
2)
1)
3)
4)
5)
40
5
5
5, 5 44
55
5
4
1
0
5
5
,
5
9
5
5
0
4
1 08
51
5
1 )
59
5
6
2
5
1
1
0
5
5 60
70
5
7
1 30
79
5
7
5
1)
Mechanical RESET.
2)
Cable release (400 or 600 mm long, mounting on the front or laterally on the holder).
3)
Holder for RESET.
4)
Pushbutton.
5)
Extension plunger.
6)
For mounting on TH35-7,5 standard mounting rail according to EN 60715.
7)
For mounting on TH35-15 or TH75 standard mounting rail acc. to EN 607 15
6)
6)
6)
6)
6)
7)
Page
159
SCHEMATI CS
95
96
97
98 A2 1 4/22 4T2 6T3 2T1
1 L1 3L2 5L3
T
E
S
T
R
E
S
E
T
S
T
O
P
4 6 2
1 3 5
4 6 2
1 3 5
95
96
97
98 4T2 6T3 2T1
1 L1 3L2 5L3
T
E
S
T
R
E
S
E
T
S
T
O
P
W INTERNAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS FOR THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS
W PROTECTION OF DC MOTORS
+ +
W LSTD
W 1-POLE W 2-POLE
W LST0, LST2, LST3
W POSITION OF THE TERMINALS FOR LST THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS
W LSTD
with LSZDTE01
W LST0, LST2, LST3
with LST0TE01, LST2TE01, LST3TE01
1L1 3L2 5L3
2T1 4T2 6T3 14/22
95 96 97 98 A2
1L1 3L2 5L3
2T1 4T2 6T3
95 96 97 98
Page
160
LA THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS
LA1 THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAY
WI TH HAND RESET
TOP-TECHNIC
LA THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS
Page
161
LA THERMAL OVERLOAD
RELAYS FOR MI NI ATUR
POWER CONTACTORS
w CONTENTS
DIMENSIONS ........................................................................................................ Page 166
SCHEMATICS .......................................................................................................... Page 167
Page
162
Thermal overload relays 0,12 0,18A LA100300
Thermal overload relays 8,0 11A LA100311
Thermal overload relays 10 14A LA100312
LA100300
WLA1 THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS WI TH HAND RESET
Page
163
W THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS LA1003.. FOR MINIATUR POWER CONTACTORS
W RELAYS WI TH STANDARD TRI PPI NG CHARACTERI STI C FOR LA1003..
Setting Range:
Tripping time depending on the multiple of the current setting from cold condition (tolerance 20% of the tripping time)
W EXAMPLE OF SELECTI ON FOR THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAY LA1003..
Technical data of a motor
PN = 1,5 kW IN = 3,6 A IA/IN = 5 tE time = 14 s
LA100302 (2,7- 4 A)
Tripping time at 5 x IN = 9,9 s
9,9 s + 20% tolerance = 11,9 s < tE Motor = 8 s
The device is suitable.
Type Setting Range IA / IN IA / IN IA / IN IA / IN IA / IN IA / IN
A 3 4 5 6 7,2 8
LA1003.. s s s s s s
0,12 0,18 18,5 10,4 7,2 5,5 4,3 3,6
0,18 0,27 16,7 9,8 6,5 5 4,1 3,5
0,27 0,4 19,4 12,1 8,2 5,9 4,9 4,2
0,4 0,6 18,7 11,2 8 6 4,9 4,1
0,6 0,9 19,7 11,6 8,1 6,1 4,9 4,2
0,8 1,2 22,9 13,6 10 7,3 6 5,2
1,2 1,8 22,2 13,2 9,2 7,6 5,8 5,3
1,8 2,7 23 13,7 9,3 7,6 5,7 5,1
2,7 4 24 14,4 9,9 7,8 5,9 5,1
4 6 24,7 13,8 9,9 7,3 5,6 4,8
6 9 22 13,4 8 5,7 4,1 3,5
8 11 17,4 9,2 5,9 4,1 2,9 2,3
10 14 26,4 12,9 7,6 5,2 3,5 2,8
Max. fuse size according to coordination-type Fuse UL SCCR
3)
Type Setting Range "2"
1)
"1"
1)
DOL Y quick slow, gL (gG) slow, gL (gG) aM
A A A A A A A kA
LA1003.. 0,12 0,18 0,5
2)
0,5
2)
25 - 15 5
0,18 0,27 1,0
2)
1,0
2)
25 - 15 5
0,27 0,4 2 2 25 - 15 5
0,4 0,6 2 2 25 - 15 5
0,6 0,9 4 4 25 - 15 5
0,8 1,2 4 4 25 2 15 5
1,2 1,8 6 6 25 2 15 5
1,8 2,7 10 10 25 4 15 5
2,7 4 16 10 25 4 15 5
4 6 7,5 10,5 20 16 25 6 15 5
6 9 10,5 15,5 35 25 35 10 25 5
8 11 14 19 35 25 35 16 30 5
10 14 18 24 50 35 63 16 40 5
1) Coordination-type according to IEC 947-4-1:
"2": Light contact welding accepted. Thermal overload relay must not be damaged.
"1": Welding of contactor and damage of the thermal overload relay allowed.
2) Miniature fuse
W FUSES FOR LA1003..
Page
164
W TRI PPI NG CHARACTERI STI CS FOR LA1003..
Detailed tripping times for each range see table on page before.
Average value of typical
tolerance curves from
cold condition
Proceeding from service
condition the times
decrease to 20-30% of
the characteristic values
with two-pole load
Tripping time
min. s
Typical tolerance curve
from cold condition
Proceeding from service
condition the times
decrease to 70-80% of
the characteristic values
K =Imax /Ie
K
Imax = max. phase current
Ie = max. scale value
with three-phase load
Tripping time
min. s
F. L. C. multiplication factor
Page
165
W THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS LA1003.. FOR MINIATUR POWER CONTACTORS
Main contacts
1)
V ~ 690
operation open C -25 to +60
storage C -50 to +70
Trip class
according to IEC 947-4-1 10A
Cable cross-section
Main connector solid or stranded mm 0,75-6+0,75-2,5
2)
flexible mm 0,75-4+0,5-2,5
2)
flexible with multicore cable end mm 0,5-2,5+0,5-1,5
Cables per clamp number 1+1
Auxiliary connector solid mm 0,75-2,5
2)
flexible mm 0,5-2,5
2)
flexible with multicore cable end mm 0,5-1,5
Cables per clamp number 2
Auxiliary contacts
1)
same potential V ~ 690
different potential V ~ 440
230V A 3
400V A 2
690V A 0,6
Rated operational current Ie 24V A 1,2
110V A 0,15
220V A 0,1
Short circuit protection (without welding 1kA)
highest fuse rating gL (gG) A 6
Power loss per current path (max.)
minimum setting value W 1,1
maximum setting value W 2,3
1) Suitable for: earthed-neutral systems, overvoltage category I to III, pollution degree 3 (standard-industry): Uimp = 4kV (at 440V), 6kV (at 690V). Data for other conditions on request.
2) Maximum cable cross-section with prepared conductor.
W TEMPERATURE COMPENSATI ON
In case of higher ambient temperature use the following formula:
(Ambient temperature - 20) x 0,125 = correction factor in % of the full load motor current
Example:
Ambient temperature 70C, full load motor current 7A
(70 - 20) x 0,125 = 6,25%
Setting value: 7A + 6,25% = 7,44A
DI MENSI ONS
Page
166
-12
W THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS FOR MINIATUR POWER CONTACTORS LA1003..
W LA1003.. (+ CONTACTOR LA1009..)
Contacor
Thermal overload relay
SCHEMATI CS
Page
167
W CONNECTION DIAGRAMS FOR THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS LA1
FOR MINIATUR POWER CONTACTORS
W LA1003..
manual reset
W POSITION OF THE TERMINALS FOR THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS LA1
FOR MINIATUR POWER CONTACTORS
W LA1003..
ALEA MOTOR PROTECTI ON SWI TCHES UP TO 100A
Page
168
BESD....
BES2....
TOP-TECHNIC
BES3....
TOP-TECHNIC
BES0....
ALEA MOTOR PROTECTI ON SWI TCHES UP TO 100A
Page
169
ALEA MOTOR PROTECTI ON
SWI TCHES UP TO 100A
w CONTENTS
OVERVIEW.............................................................................................................. Page 170
ACCESSORIES........................................................................................................ Page 188
CHARAKTERISTIC CURVES.............................................................................. Page 190
DIMENSIONS ........................................................................................................ Page 191
SCHEMATICS .......................................................................................................... Page 195
Page
170
TYPE BESD / BES0 / BES2 / BES3
APPLICATIONS
System protection
1)
Motor protection
SIZE S00, S0, S2, S3
RATED CURRENT In
SIZE S00 up to 12A
SIZE S0 up to 25A
SIZE S2 up to 50A
SIZE S3 up to 100A
RATED OPERATIONAL VOLTAGE Ue ACCORDING TO IEC 690 VAC
2)
RATED FREQUENCY 50/60 Hz
TRIP CLASS Class 10
THERMAL OVERLOAD RELEASE 0.11 ... 0.16A
up to 80 ... 100A
ELECTRONIC TRIP UNITS A multiple of the rated current 13 Times
SHORT-CIRCUIT BREAKING CAPACITY Icu at 400 VAC 50/100 kA
ACCESSORIES FOR SIZES S00 S0 S2 S3
Auxiliary switches
Signaling switches --
Undervoltage releases
Shunt trip units
Insulated three-phase busbar systems --
Busbar adapters
Door-coupling rotary operating mechanisms --
Link modules
Enclosures for surface mounting --
Infeed terminal --
1)
For symmetrical loading of the three phases.
2)
500 V AC with moulded-plastic enclosure.
Has this function or can use this accessory.
-- Does not have this function or cannot use this accessory.
W BES OVERVI EW
BESD.... BES0.... BES2.... BES3....
MOTOR PROTECTI ON SWI TCHES UP TO 100A
Page
171
W BES OVERVI EW
The following illustrations show our BES motor protection switches with the accessories which can be mounted for the
various sizes.
W BES MOTOR PROTECTI ON SWI TCHES SI ZE 00, WI TH MOUNTABLE ACCESSORI ES
W BES MOTOR PROTECTI ON SWI TCHES SI ZES 0, 2 OR 3, WI TH MOUNTABLE ACCESSORI ES
Mountable accessories for all sizes 00 ... 3:
1. Transverse auxiliary switch
2. Lateral auxiliary switch with 2 contacts
4. Shunt release
5. Undervoltage release
Mountable accessories for sizes:
6.1. Undervoltage release with leading auxiliary contacts 00
6.2. Undervoltage release with leading auxiliary contacts 0 ... 3
7. Signaling switch 0 ... 3
Page
172
W BES OVERVI EW
Mounting location and function
The BES motor protection switches have three main contact elements. In order to achieve maximum flexibility, auxiliary
switches, signaling switches, auxiliary trip units and door coupling rotary operating mechanism can be supplied separately.
These components can be fitted as required on the motor protection switches without using tools.
W MOUNTABLE ACCESSORI ES FOR BES MOTOR PROTECTI ON SWI TCHES
W AUXI LI ARY SWI TCHES, SI GNALI NG SWI TCHES, SHUNT TRI PS AND UNDERVOLTAGE RELEASES
Front side
Notes:
A maximum of 4 auxiliary contacts
with auxiliary switches can be attached
to each motor protection switch.
Left-hand side
Notes:
A maximum of 4 auxiliary contacts
with auxiliary switches can be attached
to each motor protection switch.
Auxiliary switches (2 contacts)
and signaling switches can be
mounted separately or together.
Right-hand side
Notes:
One auxiliary trip unit can be
mounted per motor protection switch.
Transverse auxiliary switches
1 NO + 1 NC / 2 NO
Lateral auxiliary switches
(2 contacts)
1 NO + 1 NC / 2 NO
Signaling switches
for sizes 0, 2 and 3
Tripping 1 NO + 1 NC
Short-circuit 1 NO + 1 NC
Shunt trip units
or
Undervoltage releases
An auxiliary switch block can be inserted transversely on the front.
The overall width of the motor protection switches remains unchanged.
One of the two auxiliary switches can be mounted laterally for each motor protection
switches The contacts of the auxiliary switch close and open together with the main
contacts of the motor protection switches. The overall width of the lateral
auxiliary switch with 2 contacts is 9 mm.
One signaling switch can be mounted at the side of each motor protection switches
with a rotary operating mechanism. The signaling switch has two contact systems.
One contact system always signals tripping irrespective of whether this was caused
by a short-circuit, an overload or an auxiliary trip unit. The other contact system only
switches in the event of a short-circuit. There is no signaling as a result of switching
off with the handle. In order to be able to switch on the motor protection switches
again after a short-circuit, the signaling switch must be reset manually after the error
cause has been eliminated. The overall width of the signaling switch is 18 mm.
For remote-controlled tripping of the motor protection switches. The release coil
should only be energized for short periods (see schematics).
Trips the motor protection switches when the voltage is interrupted and prevents the
motor from being restarted accidentally when the voltage is restored. Used for
remote-controlled tripping of the motor protection switches. Particularly suitable for
EMERGENCY-STOP disconnection by way of the corresponding EMERGENCY-STOP
pushbutton according to DIN VDE 0113.
W ROTARY OPERATING MECHANISMS (DOOR-COUPLING) SIZE 0 TO 3
W SCHRACK I NFO
Motor protection switches with a rotary operating mechanism can be mounted in a control
cabinet and operated externally by means of a door-coupling rotary operating mechanism.
When the cabinet door with motor protection switches is closed, the operating mechanism
is coupled. When the motor protection switches closes, the coupling is locked which
prevents the door from being opened unintentionally. This interlock can be defeated by the
maintenance personnel. In the open position, the rotary operating mechanism can be
secured against reclosing with up to 3 padlocks. Inadvertent opening of the door is not
possible in this case either.
W ROTARY OPERATING MECHANISMS
ROTARY OPERATING MECHANISM
Rotary operating (door coupling) 0/2/3 BEZ00010
Rotary operating, emergency stop (door coupling) 0/2/3 BEZ00011
Page
173
W BES GENERAL I NFORMATI ONS
W SCHRACK I NFO
BES motor protection switches are compact, current limiting motor protection switches which are
optimized for load feeders. The motor protection switches are used for switching and protecting
induction motors of up to 45 kW at 400 V AC and for other loads with rated currents of up to 100A.
W TYPE OF CONSTRUCTI ON
The motor protection switches are available in four sizes:
Size 00 width 45 mm, max. rated current 12 A, at 400 V AC suitable for induction motors up to 5.5 kW.
Size 0 width 45 mm, max. rated current 25 A, at 400 V AC suitable for induction motors up to 11 kW.
W NOTE
Technical specifications by green backgrounds. The devices with Cage Clamp terminals are on request.
W SCREW TERMI NALS
BES motor protection switches of sizes 00 and 0 are fitted with terminals with captive screws and clamping pieces, allowing
the connection of 2 conductors with different cross-sections. The box terminals of the size 2 and 3 motor protection switches
also enable 2 conductors with different cross-sections to be connected. With the exception of size 3 motor protection switches
which are equipped with 4 mm Allen screws, all terminal screws are tightened with a Pozidriv screwdriver size 2. The box
terminals of the size 3 motor protection switches can be removed in order to connect conductors with cable lugs or connecting
bars. A terminal cover is available as touch protection and to ensure that the required clearances and creepage distances are
maintained if the box terminals are removed.
W BES MOTOR PROTECTI ON SWI TCHES SI ZE 00 WI TH CAGE CLAMP TERMI NALS (ON REQUEST)
W SCHRACK I NFO
As an alternative to screw terminals, size 00 motor protection switches are also available with Cage Clamp terminals. This
screwless connection method, already familiar from terminal blocks, clamps the conductors using a spring-loaded terminal and
is shock-proof and vibration-proof. Motor protection switches with Cage Clamp terminals allow independent connection of two
conductors per terminal.
W MOUNTI NG
The motor protection switches are snap-fitted an a 35 mm standard mounting rail to EN 60715. A standard mounting rail with
a height of 15 mm is required for size S3 motor protection switches. A 75 mm standard mounting rail can be used as an
alternative for size 3. Size 2 and 3 motor protection switches can also be screwed directly onto a base plate.
Page
174
When mounting the motor protection switches, the following clearances must be maintained to grounded or live parts and
to cable ducts made of molded plastic.
Motor protect o /
circuit breakers
Distance to grounded or
live parts acc. to
IEC 60947-2
Type Size U
e
V
Y
mm
X
mm
Z
mm
S00 up to 690 20 70 9
S0 up to 500
up to 690
30
50
90
90
9
30
S2 up to 690 50 140 30
S3 up to 240
up to 440
up to 500
up to 690
50
70
110
150
167
167
167
167
10
10
10
30
X Z Z
Y
Y
1L1 3L2 5L3
2T1 4T2 6T3
1L1 3L2 5L3
2T1 4T2 6T3
BESD
BES0
BES2
BES3
i n switches
BES
BES
BES
WI NSTALLATI ON GUI DELI NES, FUNCTI ON AND CONFI GURATI ON
W TRI P UNI TS
BES motor protection switches are equipped with inverse-time delayed overload release based on the bimetal principle and
with instantaneous electronic trip units (electromagnetic shortcircuit releases). The overload releases can be adjusted in
accordance with the load current. The electronic trip units are permanently set to a value 13 times the rated current and thus
enable trouble-free starting of motors. The scale cover can be sealed to prevent unauthorized adjustments to the set current.
W TRI P CLASSES
The trip classes of thermally delayed trip units are based on the tripping time (tA) at 7.2 times the set current in cold state
(excerpt from IEC 60947-4):
CLASS 10: 4 s < tA < 10 s
The motor protection switches must trip within this time!
W OPERATI NG MECHANI SMS
Size 00 motor protection switches are actuated by a rocker operating mechanism and size 0, 2 and 3 motor protection
switches by a rotary operating mechanism. If the motor protection switches trips, the rotary operating mechanism switches to
the tripped position to indicate this. Before the motor protection switches is reclosed, the rotary operating mechanism must be
reset manually to the 0 position. Only then can the motor protection switches be set again to the I position. In the case of motor
protection switches with rotary operating mechanisms, an electrical signal can be output by a signaling switch to indicate that
the motor starter protector has tripped. All operating mechanisms can be locked in the 0 position with a padlock (shackle
diameter 3.5 mm to 4.5 mm). The motor protection switches isolating function complies with IEC 60947-2.
W PREVENTI ON OF UNI NTENDED TRI PPI NG
In order to prevent premature tripping due to the integrated phase failure sensitivity, motor protection switches should always
be connected to ensure current flows through all three main current paths.
W SHORT-CI RCUI T PROTECTI ON
If a short-circuit occurs, the short-circuit releases of BES motor protection switches isolate the faulty load feeder from the
network and thus prevent further damage. Motor protection switches with a short-circuit breaking capacity of 50 kA or 100 kA
are virtually short-circuit resistant at a voltage of 400 V AC, since higher short-circuit currents are not to be expected in
practice.
W MOTOR PROTECTI ON
The tripping characteristics of BES motor protection switches are designed mainly to protect induction motors. The motor protec-
tion switches are therefore also referred to as motor circuit breakers. The rated current In of the motor to be protected is set on the
setting scale. Factory setting of the short-circuit release is 13 times the rated current of the motor protection switches. This permits
trouble-free starting and ensures that the motor is properly protected. The phase failure sensitivity of the motor protection switches
ensures that it is tripped in time in the event of a phase failure and overcurrents that occur as a result in the other phases. Motor
protection switches with thermal overload releases are normally designed in accordance with trip class 10.
Page
175
W SYSTEM PROTECTI ON
The BES motor protection switches for motor protection are also suitable for plant protection. In order to prevent premature
tripping due to phase failure sensitivity, the three conducting paths must always be uniformly loaded. The conducting paths
must be connected in series the case of single-phase loads.
W SHORT-CI RCUI T PROTECTI ON FOR STARTER COMBI NATI ONS
The BES motor protection switches for starter combinations in sizes 0, 2 and 3 provide short-circuit protection with the
help of a contactor and overload relay combination. Like the motor protection switches for motor protection, they are
equipped with short-circuit releases which are permanently set to a value equivalent to 13 times the rated current of the motor
protection switches. They are not equipped with overload releases. On overload, the overload relay triggers the contactor, the
motor protection switches remains closed. Only when a short-circuit occurs in the feeder does the motor protection switches
trip as well. The motor protection switches for starter combinations must always be used in combination with an overload relay
because the motor protection switches alone cannot protect the motor and itself against overload.
W MAI N AND EMERGENCY-STOP SWI TCHES
The BES motor protection switches comply with the isolating function to IEC 60947-2, therefore they can be used taking IEC
60204-1 into account as main and EMERGENCY-STOP switches. BES door-coupling rotary operating mechanisms for heavy
duty also comply with the requirements for the isolating function.
W USE OF I T SYSTEMS (I T NETWORKS)
BES motor protection switches are suitable for operation in IT systems according to IEC 60947-2. In the event of a 3-pole
short-circuit, their response in this system is the same as in others: Therefore, the same short-circuit breaking capacity I
cu
and
I
cs
applies, see "Technical specifications". An initial fault (ground fault) does not necessarily force immediate disconnection of
the network when operating IT systems. If a second independent error occurs (ground fault), the switching capacity of the
motor protection switches might be reduced. This is the case if both ground faults occur in different phases and if one of the
ground faults occurs on the input side and the other on the outgoing terminal of the motor protection switches. In order to
maintain the short-circuit function of the motor protection switches even with two independent ground faults (double
ground faults), the reduced short-circuit breaking capacity with double ground faults must be taken into account in IT systems
I
cuIT
(see "Technical specifications"). If a ground fault is instantaneously recognized and remedied (ground-fault monitoring),
the risk of double ground fault and thus reduced short-circuit breaking capacity I
cuIT
can be minimized.
W SWI TCHI NG OF DC CURRENTS
BES motor protection switches for alternating currents are also suitable for DC switching. The maximum permissible DC
voltage per conducting path must, however, be adhered to. Higher voltages require a series connection with 2 or 3 conducting
paths. The response values of the overload release remain unchanged; the response values of a short-circuit release increase by
approximately 30 % for DC. The example circuits for DC switching can be seen in the table below.
Example circuit for size S00 to S3 BES motor protection switches
Example circuit for
size S00 to S3 BES
motor protect
Maximum permitted
DC voltage U
e
Notes
150 V DC 2-pole switching, non-grounded system
1)
If there is no possibility of a ground fault, or if every ground fault is rectified immediately
(ground-fault monitoring), then the maximum permitted DC voltage can be tripled.
300 V DC 2-pole switching, grounded system
The grounded pole is always assigned to the individual conducting path, so that there
are always 2 conducting paths in series in the event of a ground fault.
450 V DC 1-pole switching, grounded system
3 conducting paths in series. The grounded pole is assigned to the unconnected
conducting path.
M
L+ L
M
L+ L
M
L+ L
ion switches
1)
It is assumed that this circuit always provides safe disconnection even in the event of a double ground fault that bridges two contacts.
Page
176
BESD0063
DESCRI PTI ON SHORT CI RUI T BRAKI NG CAPACI TY SI ZE ORDER NO.
ALEA MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCH SIZE 00
Motor protection switch 0,16A, Class 10 100kA 00 BESD0016
Motor protection switch 10A, Class 10 50kA 00 BESD1000
Motor protection switch 12A, Class 10 50kA 00 BESD1200
W BES MOTOR PROTECTI ON SWI TCH, SI ZE 00
W SCHRACK I NFO
For mounting BESD.. onto contactor size 00 use LSZDD005 (AC-DC).
Page
177
Motor protection switch 0,16A, Class 10 100kA 0 BES00016
Motor protection switch 10A, Class 10 100kA 0 BES01000
BES00400
W SCHRACK I NFO
For mounting BES0.. onto contactor size 0 use LSZ0D002 (AC) or LSZ0D004 (DC).
For mounting BES0.. onto contactor size 00 use LSZDD006 (AC-DC).
Page
178
BES2....
BES3....
MOTOR PROTECTI ON SWI TCHES ACCESSORI ES
Page
179
AUXILLIARY SWITCH
Auxilliary switch side mounted 1 NO + 1 NC 00/0/2/3 BEZ00001
Auxilliary switch front mounted 1 NO + 1 NC 00/0/2/3 BEZ00003
Auxilliary switch side mounted 2 NO 00/0/2/3 BEZ00002
Auxilliary switch front mounted 2 NO 00/0/2/3 BEZ00004
BEZ00001
W AUXI LLI ARY SWI TCH
SIGNALING SWITCH
Signaling switch 1 NO + 1 NC 0/2/3 BEZ00005
BEZ00005
W SI GNALI NG SWI TCH
UNDERVOLTAGE RELEASE
Undervoltage release side mounted AC 230V/50HZ, AC 240V/60HZ 00/0/2/3 BEZ00006
Undervoltage release side mounted AC 400V/50HZ, AC 440V/60HZ 00/0/2/3 BEZ00007
BEZ00006
W UNDERVOLTAGE RELEASE
Page
180
SHUNT TRIP
Shunt trip side mounted AC 20...24V, 50/60HZ, 100% ED 00/0/2/3 BEZ00008
Shuntt trip side mounted AC 210...240V, 50/60HZ,100% ED 00/0/2/3 BEZ00009
BEZ00009
W SHUNT TRI P
HOUSINGS
Moulded plastic housing, membran IP55 00 BEZ00012
Moulded plastic housing, emergency stop, mushroom head (yellow/red) 00 BEZ00013
Moulded plastic housing, rotary handle IP55 0 BEZ00112
Moulded plastic housing, emergency stop IP55 (yellow/red) 0 BEZ00113
Moulded plastic housing, rotary handle IP55 2 BEZ00212
Moulded plastic housing, emergency stop IP55 (yellow/red) 2 BEZ00213
LOCKING PLATE
Locking plate for 3 padlocks 00 BEZ00014
BEZ00012
W HOUSI NGS AND LOCKI NG PLATE
BUSBARS
3-pole busbar for 2 motor protection switches 00/0 BEZ00017
3-pole busbar for 2 motor protection switches 2 BEZ00217
3-pole busbar for 3 motor protection switches 2 BEZ00218
BEZ00017
W BUSBARS
Page
181
COVERS FOR SPARE-PLACE
Cover for spare-place, blank plate (45 mm) 00/0 BEZ00019
Cover for spare-place, blank plate (55 mm) 2 BEZ00219
BEZ00019
W COVERS FOR SPARE-PLACE
ROTARY OPERATING MECHANISM
Rotary operating (door coupling) 0/2/3 BEZ00010
Rotary operating, emergency stop (door coupling) yellow/red 0/2/3 BEZ00011
BEZ00010
W ROTARY OPERATING MECHANISMS (DOOR-COUPLING)
FEED TERMINALS
Feed Terminal Size 00 for 3-phase-busbar (25 mm
2
) 00 BEZ00016
2
) 0 BEZ00116
2
) 2 BEZ00216
BEZ00116
W FEED TERMI NALS
Page
182
W BES MOTOR PROTECTI ON SWI TCHES SI ZES 00 TO 3
Short-circuit breaking capacity I
cu
, I
cs
according to IEC 60947-2
This table shows the rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity I
cu
and the rated service short-circuit breaking capacity I
cs
of the BES motor protection switches with different inception voltages dependent of the rated current I
n
of the motor
protection switches.
Motor protection switches infeed is permissible at the upper or lower terminals without restricting the rated data. If the short-
circuit current at the place of installation exceeds the rated shortcircuit breaking capacity of the motor protection switches as
specified in the table, a back-up fuse is required. Alternatively, a motor protection switches with a limiter function can be
connected upstream.
The maximum rated current for the back-up fuse is specified in the tables. The rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity
then applies as specified on the fuse.
Short-circuit resistant up to at least 50 kA
No back-up fuse required, since short-circuit resistant up to 100 kA
1)
10 % overvoltage.
2)
5 % overvoltage.
3)
Back-up fuse only required if the short-circuit current at the place of installation > I
cu
.
4)
Alternatively, fuseless limiter combinations for 690 V AC can also be used.
Circuit breakers/ Rated Up to AC 240 V
1)
Up to AC 400 V
1)
/415 V
2)
Up to AC 440 V
1)
/460 V
2)
Up to AC 500 V
1)
/525 V
2)
Up to AC 690 V
1)
Motor starter current I
n
protectors Icu Ics max. fuse Icu Ics Max. fuse Icu Ics Max. fuse Icu Ics Max. fuse Icu Ics Max. fuse
(gL/gG) (gL/gG)
3)
(gL/gG)
3)
(gL/gG)
3)
(gL/gG)
3)4)
Type A kA kA A kA kA A kA kA A kA kA A kA kA A
Size 00
BESD 0.16 ... 1 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
1.25; 1.6 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 2 2 20
2; 2.5 100 100 100 100 100 100 10 10 35 2 2 35
3.2; 4 100 100 100 100 50 10 40 3 3 40 2 2 40
5; 6.3 100 100 100 100 50 10 50 3 3 50 2 2 50
8 100 100 50 12.5 80 50 10 63 3 3 63 2 2 63
10 100 100 50 12.5 80 10 10 63 3 3 63 2 2 63
12 100 100 50 12.5 80 10 10 80 3 3 80 2 2 80
Size 0
BES0 0.16 ... 1.6 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
2; 2.5 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 8 8 25
3.2 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 8 8 32
4; 5 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 6 3 32
6.3 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 6 3 50
8 100 100 100 100 50 25 63 42 21 63 6 3 50
10 100 100 100 100 50 25 80 42 21 63 6 3 50
12.5 100 100 100 100 50 25 80 42 21 80 6 3 63
16 100 100 50 25 100 50 10 80 10 5 80 4 2 63
20 100 100 50 25 125 50 10 80 10 5 80 4 2 63
22; 25 100 100 50 25 125 50 10 100 10 5 80 4 2 63
Size 2
BES2 16 100 100 50 25 100 50 25 100 12 6 63 5 3 63
20 100 100 50 25 100 50 25 100 12 6 80 5 3 63
25 100 100 50 25 100 50 15 100 12 6 80 5 3 63
32 100 100 50 25 125 50 15 125 10 5 100 4 2 63
40; 45 100 100 50 25 160 50 15 125 10 5 100 4 2 63
50 100 100 50 25 160 50 15 125 10 5 100 4 2 80
Size 3
BES3 40 100 100 50 25 125 50 20 125 12 6 100 6 3 63
50 100 100 50 25 125 50 20 125 12 6 100 6 3 80
63 100 100 50 25 160 50 20 160 12 6 100 6 3 80
75 100 100 50 25 160 50 20 160 8 4 125 5 3 100
90; 100 100 100 50 25 160 50 20 160 8 4 125 5 3 125
Page
183
Short-circuit breaking capacity I
cuIT
in the IT system (IT network) according to IEC60947-2
BES motor protection switches are suitable for operation in IT systems. Values valid for triple-pole short-circuit are I
cu
up to I
cs
.
In case of double ground fault on different phases at the input and output side of a motor protection switches, the special
short-circuit breaking capacity I
cuIT
applies. The specifications in the table below apply to BES motor protection switches.
In the colored areas, I
cuIT
is 100 kA, or in some ranges it is 50 kA. Therefore the motor protection switches are short-circuit
resistant in these ranges.
If the short-circuit current at the place of installation exceeds the rated short-circuit breaking capacity of the motor protection
switches as specified in the table, a back-up fuse is required. The maximum rated current for the back-up fuse is specified in
the tables. The rated short-circuit breaking capacity then applies as specified on the fuse.
Short-circuit resistant up to at least 50 kA
No back-up fuse required, since short-circuit resistant up to 100 kA
1)
10 % overvoltage.
2)
5 % overvoltage.
3)
Back-up fuse only required, if short-circuit current at the place of installation > I
cuIT
.
4)
Alternatively, fuseless limiter combinations for 690 V AC can also be used.
Motor starter Rated current Up to AC 240 V1) Up to AC 400 V1)/415 V2) Up to AC 500 V1)/525 V2) Up to AC 690 V1)
protectors In IcuIT Max. fuse IcuIT Max. fuse IcuIT Max. fuse IcuIT Max. fuse
(gL/gG)3) (gL/gG)3)4) (gL/gG)3) (gL/gG)3)
Type A kA A kA A kA A kA A
Size 00
BESD 0.16 ... 0.63 100 100 100 100
0.8; 1 100 100 100 2 16
1.25; 1.6 100 2 20 2 20 2 20
2; 2.5 100 2 35 2 35 2 35
3.2; 4 100 2 40 2 40 2 40
5; 6.3 100 2 50 2 50 2 50
8; 10 50 80 2 63 2 63 2 63
12 50 80 2 80 2 80 2 80
Size 0
BES0 0.16 ... 0.63 100 100 100 100
0.8; 1 100 100 100 6 16
1.25; 1.6 100 100 8 20 6 20
2; 2.5 100 8 25 8 25 6 25
3.2 100 8 32 8 32 6 32
4; 5 100 6 32 4 32 3 32
6.3... 10 100 6 50 4 50 3 50
12.5 100 6 63 4 63 3 63
16...25 50 80 4 63 3 63 2 63
Size 2
BES2 16 50 100 8 100 6 80 5 63
20 50 125 8 100 6 80 5 63
25 50 125 8 100 6 80 5 63
32 50 125 6 125 4 100 3 80
40... 50 50 160 6 125 4 100 3 80
Size 3
BES3 40 50 125 10 63 5 50 5 50
50 50 125 8 80 3 63 3 63
63 50 160 6 80 3 63 3 63
75 50 160 5 100 2 80 2 80
90; 100 50 160 5 125 2 100 2 100
Page
184
General technical specifications
Type BESD BES0 BES2 BES3
Standards
IEC 60947-1, EN 60947-1 (VDE 0660 Part 100) Yes
IEC 60947-2, EN 60947-2 (VDE 0660 Part 101) Yes
IEC 60947-4-1, EN 60947-4-1 (VDE 0660 Part 102) Yes
UL489, CSA C22.2-No.5-02 No
Size 00 0 2 3
Number of poles 3
Max. rated current I
n
max (= max. rated operational current I
e
) A 12 25 50 100
Storage/transport C 50... +80
Operation C 20... +70
2)
Permissible rated current at inside temperature of control cabinet
+60 C % 100
+70 C % 87
Motor protection switches/circuit breaker inside enclosure
Permissible rated current at ambient temperature of enclosure
+35 C % 100
+60 C % 87
Rated operational voltage U
e
Acc. to IEC V AC 690
3)
Acc. to UL/CSA V AC 600
Rated frequency Hz 50/60
i
V 690
imp
kV 6
Utilization categories
IEC 60947-2 (motor protection switches/circuit breaker) A
IEC 60947-4-1 (motor starter) AC-3
Trip class CLASS Acc. to IEC60947-4-1 10 10 10 10
DC short-circuit breaking capacity (time constant t = 5 ms)
1 conducting path 150 V DC kA 10
2 conducting paths in series 300 V DC kA 10
3 conducting paths in series 450 V DC kA 10
Power loss P
v
per motor starter I
n
: ... 1.25 A W 5 --
protector/circuit breaker I
n
: 1.6 ... 6.3 A W 6 --
Dependent on rated current I
n
I
n
: 8 ... 12 A W 7 --
(upper setting range) I
n
: ... 0.63 A W -- 5 --
I
n
: 0.8 ... 6.3 A W -- 6 --
R
per conducting path
= P/I
2
x 3
I
n
: 8 ... 16 A W -- 7 --
I
n
: 20 ... 25 A W -- 8 --
I
n
: ... 25 A W -- 12 --
I
n
: 32 A W 15
I
n
: 40 ... 50 A W -- 20 --
I
n
: ... 63 A W -- 20
I
n
: 75 and 90 A W -- 30
I
n
: ... 100 A W -- 38
Shock resistance Acc. to IEC 60068-2-27 g/ms 25/11 (square and sine pulse)
Degree of protection Acc. to IEC 60529 IP20
4)
Touch protection Acc. to EN 50274 Finger-safe
Temperature compensation Acc. to IEC 60947-4-1 C 20 ...+60
Phase failure sensitivity Acc. to IEC 60947-4-1 Yes
Isolating function Acc. to IEC 60947-2 Yes
Main and EMERGENCY-STOP switch Acc. to IEC 60204-1 Yes
characteristics
5)
(VDE 0113)
Safe isolation between main and Acc. to EN 60947-1
auxiliary circuits, req. for PELV applications
Up to 400 V + 10 % Yes
Up to 415 V + 5 % (higher voltages on request) Yes
Permissible mounting positions Any, acc. to IEC60447 start command "I" right-hand side or top
Mechanical endurance Operating cycles 100000 50000
Electrical endurance Operating cycles 100000 25000
Max. switching frequency per hour (motor starts) 1/h 15
2)
Above +60C current reduction.
3)
500V with molded-plastic enclosure. For short-circuit breaking capacity I
cu
, I
cs
see table of same name.
4)
Terminal compartment IP00.
5)
With appropriate accessories.
Page
185
Conductor cross-sections of main circuit
Type BESD BES0 BES2 BES3
Connection type Screw terminals Screw terminals
with box terminals
Terminal screw Pozidriv size 2 Pozidriv size 2 4 mm Allen screw
Prescribed tightening torque Nm 0.8...1.2 2...2.5 3...4.5 4...6
Conductor cross-sections (1 or 2 conductors connectable)
Solid mm
2
2 x (0.5... 1.5)
4)
, 2 x (1... 2.5)
4)
, 2 x (0.75... 16) 2 x (2.5... 16)
2 x (0.75... 2.5)
4)
2 x (2.5... 6)
4)
Finely stranded with end sleeve mm
2
2 x (0.5... 1.5)
4)
, 2 x (1... 2.5)
4)
, 2 x (0.75... 16), 2 x (2.5... 35),
2 x (0.75... 2.5)
4)
2 x (2.5... 6)
4)
1 x (0.75... 25) 1 x (2.5... 50)
Stranded mm
2
2 x (0.5... 1.5)
4)
, 1 x (1... 2.5)
4)
, 2 x (0.75... 25), 2 x (10...50),
2 x (0.75... 2.5)
4)
2 x (2.5... 6) 1 x (0.75... 35) 1 x (10...50)
AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG 2 x (18... 14) 2 x (14... 10) 2 x (18... 2), 2 x (10... 1/0),
1 x (18... 2) 1 x (10... 2/0)
Ribbon cable conductors (number x width x thickness) mm -- 2 x (6 x 9 x 0.8)
With copper bars
2)
-- -- 18 x 10
With cable lugs
3)
-- -- up to 2 x 70
Connection type Cage Clamp terminals
5)
on request
Solid mm
2
2 x (0.25... 2.5) -- --
2
2 x (0.25... 1.5) -- --
Finely stranded without end sleeve mm
2
2 x (0.25... 2.5) -- --
AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG 2 x (24... 14) -- --
Max. external diameter of the cable insulation mm 3.6
1)
Cable-lug and busbar connection possible after removing the boxterminals.
2)
If bars larger than 12mmx10mm are connected, a terminal cover is needed to comply with the phase clearance (on request).
3)
If conductors larger than 25mm
2
are connected, a terminal cover is needed to comply with the phase clearance (on request).
4)
5)
With conductor cross-sections of " 1mm
2
an "insulation stop" must be used.
Page
186
Permissible rated data of devices approved for North America (UL/CSA)
motor protection switches of the BES series are approved for UL/CSA and according to UL 508 and CSA C22.2 No. 14 they
can be used on their own or as a load feeder in combination with a contactor. These motor protection switches can be used
as "Manual Motor Controllers" for "Group Installations", as "Manual Motor Controllers Suitable for Tap Conductor Protection
in Group Installations" and as "Self-Protected Combination Motor Controllers" (Type E).
BES motor protection switches as "Manual Motor Controllers"
If used as a "Manual Motor Controller", the motor protection switches is always operated in combination with an upstream
short-circuit protection device. Approved fuses or a circuit breaker according to UL489/CSAC22.2 No. 5-02 can be used. These
devices must be dimensioned according to the National Electrical Code (UL) or Canadian Electrical Code (CSA).
Motor protection switchess hp rating
1)
for FLA
2)
Rated current 240 V AC 480 V AC 600 V AC
max. I
n
UL CSA UL CSA UL CSA
I
bc
3)
I
bc
3)
I
bc
3)
I
bc
3)
I
bc
3)
I
bc
3)
Type V 1-phase 3-phase A kA kA kA kA kA kA
Size 00
BESD 0.16 ... 2 65 65 65 65 10 10
2.5 65 65 65 65 10 10
FLA
2)
max. 12 A, 115 1/2 -- 3.2 65 65 65 65 10 10
600 V 200 1 1/2 3 4 65 65 65 65 10 10
NEMA size 00 230 2 3 5 65 65 65 65 10 10
460 -- 7 1/2 6.3 65 65 65 65 10 10
575/600 -- 10 8 65 65 65 65 10 10
10 65 65 65 65 10 10
12 65 65 65 65 10 10
Size 0
BES0 0.16 ... 3.2 65 65 65 65 30 30
4 65 65 65 65 30 30
FLA
2)
max. 25 A, 115 2 -- 5 65 65 65 65 30 30
600 V 200 3 5 6.3 65 65 65 65 30 30
NEMA size 1 230 3 7 1/2 8 65 65 65 65 30 30
460 -- 15 10 65 65 65 65 30 30
575/600 -- 20 12.5 65 65 65 65 30 30
16 65 65 65 65 10 10
20 65 65 65 65 10 10
22 65 65 65 65 10 10
25 65 65 65 65 10 10
Size 2
BES2 16 65 65 65 65 30 25
20 65 65 65 65 30 25
FLA
2)
max. 50 A, 115 3 -- 25 65 65 65 65 30 25
600 V 200 7 1/2 15 32 65 65 65 65 30 25
NEMA size 2 230 10 20 40 65 65 65 65 30 25
460 -- 40 45 65 65 65 65 30 25
575/600 -- 50 50 65 65 65 65 30 25
Size 3
BES3 16 65 65 65 65 30 30
20 65 65 65 65 30 30
FLA
2)
max. 99 A, 115 7 1/2 -- 25 65 65 65 65 30 30
600 V 200 20 30 32 65 65 65 65 30 30
NEMA size 3 230 20 40 40 65 65 65 65 30 30
460 -- 75 50 65 65 65 65 30 30
575/600 -- 100 63 65 65 65 65 30 30
75 65 65 65 65 30 30
90 65 65 65 65 10 10
100 65 65 65 65 10 10
1)
hp rating = Power rating in horse power (maximum motor rating).
2)
FLA = Full Load Amps/Motor full load current.
3)
Complies with "short-circuit breaking capacity" according to UL/CSA.
Page
187
BES motor protection switches as "Manual Motor Controllers Suitable for Tap Conductor Protection in Group Installations"
The application as "Manual Motor Controllers Suitable for Tap Conductor Protection in Group Installations" is only available
from UL.
CSA does not recognize this approval! When the motor protection switches is used as a "Manual Motor Controller Suitable
for Tap Conductor Protection in Group Installations", it must always be combined with upstream short-circuit protection. As
short-circuit-protection device, approved fuses or a motor protection switches according to UL 489 can be used.These devices
must be dimensioned according to the National Electrical Code.
Motor protection switchess hp rating
1)
for FLA
2)
Rated current I
n
240 V AC Up to 480 V AC Up to 600 V AC
Max. UL UL UL
I
bc
3)
I
bc
3)
I
bc
3)
Type V 1-phase 3-phase A kA kA kA
Size 00
BESD 0.16 ... 0.8 65 65 10
1 65 65 10
FLA
2)
max. 8 A, 115 1/3 -- 1.25 65 65 10
480 V 200 3/4 2 2 65 65 10
NEMA size 0 230 1 2 2.5 65 65 10
460 -- 5 3.2 65 65 10
575/600 -- -- 4 65 65 10
5 65 65 10
6.3 65 65 10
8 65 65 10
Size 0
BES0 0.16 ... 1.6 65 65 30
2 65 65 30
FLA
2)
max. 115 2 -- 2.5 65 65 30
22 A, 480 V 200 3 5 3.2 65 65 30
12.5 A, 600 V 230 3 7 1/2 4 65 65 30
460 -- 15 5 65 65 30
NEMA size 1 575/600 -- 10 6.3 65 65 30
8 65 65 30
10 65 65 30
12.5 65 65 30
Size 2
BES3 16 65 65 25
20 65 65 25
FLA
2)
max. 115 3 -- 25 65 65 25
50 A, 600 V 200 7 1/2 15 32 65 65 25
NEMA size 2 230 10 20 40 65 65 25
460 -- 40 45 65 65 25
575/600 -- 50 50 65 65 25
Size 3
BES4 16 65 65 30
20 65 65 30
FLA
2)
max. 115 7 1/2 -- 25 65 65 30
100 A, 480 V 200 20 30 32 65 65 30
75 A, 600 V 230 20 40 40 65 65 30
460 -- 75 50 65 65 30
NEMA size 3 575/600 -- 75 63 65 65 30
75 65 65 30
90 65 65 --
100 65 65 --
1)
hp rating = Power rating in horse power (maximum motor rating).
2)
FLA = Full Load Amps/Motor full load current.
3)
Complies with "short-circuit breaking capacity" according to UL.
Rated data of the auxiliary switches and signaling switches
Type Lateral auxiliary Transverse auxiliary switches with
switches with
1NO + 1NC 1NO + 1NC
and signaling switch
Max. rated voltage
Acc. to NEMA (UL) VAC 600 250
Acc. to NEMA (CSA) VAC 600 250
Uninterrupted current A 10 2.5
Switching capacity A600 C300
Q300 R300
ACCESSORI ES
Page
188
W ACCESSORI ES FOR BES MOTOR PROTECTI ON SWI TCHES
Front transverse auxiliary switches (front mounted)
Switching capacity for different voltages
1NO + 1NC, 2NO
e
At AC-15, alternating voltage
- 24 V A 2
- 230 V A 0.5
- 400 V A --
- 690 V A --
At AC-12 = Ith, alternating voltage
- 24 V A 2.5
- 230 V A 2.5
- 400 V A --
- 690 V A --
At DC-13, direct voltage L/R 200ms
- 24 V A 1
- 48 V A 0.3
- 60 V A 0.15
- 110 V A --
- 220 V A --
Minimum load capacity V 17
mA 1
Lateral auxiliary switches and signaling switch (side mounted)
Switching capacity for different voltages
1 NO + 1 NC, 2 NO and signalling switch
e
At AC-15, alternating voltage
- 24 V A 6
- 230 V A 4
- 400 V A 3
- 690 V A 1
At AC-12 = Ith, alternating voltage
- 24 V A 10
- 230 V A 10
- 400 V A 10
- 690 V A 10
At DC, direct voltage L/R 200 ms
- 24 V A 2
- 110 V A 0.5
- 220 V A 0.25
- 440 V A 0.1
Minimum load capacity V 17
mA 1
Auxiliary trip units
Undervoltage release Shunt trip unit
Power consumption
During pick-up
- AC voltages VA/W 20.2 / 13 20.2 / 13
- DC voltages W 20 13 ... 80
During continuous duty
- AC voltages VA/W 7.2 / 2.4 --
- DC voltages W 2.1 --
Response voltage
Tripping V 0.35 ... 0.7 x U
s
0.7 ... 1.1 x U
s
Pickup V 0.85 ... 1.1 x U
s
--
Maximum opening time ms 20
ACCESSORI ES
Page
189
W ACCESSORI ES FOR BES MOTOR PROTECTI ON SWI TCHES
Short-circuit protection for auxiliary and control circuits
Melting fuses gL/gG A 10
Miniature circuit breaker, C characteristic A 6 Prospective short-circuit current < 0.4 kA.
Conductor cross-sections for auxiliary and control circuits
Prescribed tightening torque Nm 0.8...1.2
Conductor cross-sections (1 or 2 conductors)
Solid mm
2
2 x (0.5... 1.5)
1)
/2 x (0.75... 2.5)
1)
2
2 x (0.5... 1.5)
1)
/2 x (0.75... 2.5)
1)
Stranded mm
2
2 x (0.5... 1.5)
1)
/2 x (0.75 ... 2.5)
1)
AWG cables AWG 2 x (18 ... 14)
Connection type Cage Clamp terminals
2)
(on request)
Solid mm
2
2 x (0.25... 2.5)
2
2 x (0.25... 1.5)
Finely stranded without end sleeve mm
2
2 x (0.25 ... 2.5)
AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG 2 x (24... 14)
Max. external diameter of the cable insulation mm 3.6
1)
2)
With conductor cross-sections of 1 mm
2
an "insulation stop" must be used;
Page
190
10
5
2
1
10 000
5000
2000
1000
500
200
100
50
20
10
5
0,2
1
0,5
0,02
0,1
0,05
0,002
0,01
0,005
100
60
40
2
0,6
0,8
1 2 3 4 6 8 10
0,001
20 30 40 80 x
n
min
60
3-pole
loading
Class 10
2-pole
loading
Class 10
Opening time
Current
CHARACTERI STI C CURVES
W BES MOTOR PROTECTI ON SWI TCHES CHARACTERI STI C CURVES
W REPRESENTATION OF TYPICAL TIME/CURRENT CHARACTERISTIC OF BES
The time/current characteristic, the current limiting characteristics and the I2t characteristic curves were determined
according to DIN VDE 0660 and IEC 60947. The tripping characteristic of the inverse-time delayed overload release
(thermal overload releases, 'a' releases) for DC and AC with a frequency of 0 Hz to 400 Hz applies for the time/current
characteristic.
The characteristic curves apply to the cold state; at operating temperature, the tripping times of the thermal trip units
are reduced to approximately 25 %. Under normal operating conditions, all three poles of the device must be loaded.
The three main current paths must be connected in series in order to protect single-phase or DC loads.
With 2-pole and 3-pole loading, the maximum deviation in the tripping time of 3 times the set current and upwards is
20 % and thus in accordance with DIN VDE 0165. The tripping characteristics for the instantaneous, electromagnetic
electronic trip units (short-circuit releases, 'n' releases) are based on the rated current In that also represents the
maximum value of the setting range for motor protection switches with adjustable overload releases. If the current is set
to a lower value, the tripping current of the 'n' release is increased by a corresponding factor.
The characteristic curves of the electromagnetic electronic trip units apply to frequencies of 50 Hz/60 Hz. Appropriate
correction factors must be used for lower frequencies down to 16 2/3 Hz, for higher frequencies up to 400 Hz and for
DC.
The above characteristic curve for the motor starter
protector relates to a specific setting range. It is, however,
also valid as a schematic representation of motor protection
switches with other current ranges. Time/current
characteristic curves, current limiting characteristic curves
and I
2
t curves are available.
DI MENSI ONS
Page
191
1)
Side mounted auxiliary switch, 2-pole BEZ00001,2
2)
Signaling switch (S0 ... S3) side mounted BEZ00005
3)
Auxiliary trip unit: undervoltage release BEZ00006,7; shunt trip BEZ00008,9
4)
Front mounted auxiliary switch BEZ00003,4
7)
Drilling pattern
8)
Standard mounting rail TH 35 according to EN 60715
9)
For mounting according to EN 60715 on TH 35 standard mounting rail, 15 mm deep, or TH 75 standard mounting rail
10)
Allen screw 4 mm
11)
Lockable in neutral position with 3.5 ... 4.5 mm shackle diameter
3RV1 motor starter protectors, size S2
3RV1 motor starter protectors, size S3
1) 11) 3) 4) 5)
8)
45
9
0
70
76
9 18
62 5
4
5
1
2
4
5
3
,
5
6)
2)
18
25
5
1
0
5
7)
11) 2) 5) 4)
8)
3) 1)
4
5
14
1
2
9
0
9
7
45 5 56
80
91
4
5
69
18 18
72
9
5
25
1
0
6
7)
3RV10 31, 3RV13 31, 3RV14 31
20
55 18 9 18
4
5
8
5
109
121
127
5
8
132
144
1
4
0
8
9
1
2
5
1) 2)
3)
4)
8)
11)
5
30
1
3
0
7)
3RV10 4, 3RV13 4
4
5
70 1 8 1 8
1
1
6
1
6
5
1
5
0
5
7
8
1 32
1 53
1 57
1 46
1 0) 1 1 )
1 )
2)
3)
4)
9)
1 69
9
5
30
1
5
5
7)
W BESD MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCH, SIZE 00
W BES2 MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCH, SIZE 2
DI MENSI ONS
Page
192
W BUSBARS
W 3-PHASE BUSBAR FOR MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCHES SIZES 00 AND 0, MODULAR SPACING 45 mm
1)
For two motor protection switches BEZ00017
For three motor protection switches BEZ00018
For four motor protection switches BEZ00020
For five motor protection switches BEZ00021
1)
Covers for space place (45 mm)
Size 00/0 BEZ00019
2)
Covers for space place (55 mm)
Size 2 BEZ00219
21 8
1 73
1 28
83
45
1 3
2
1
B
A
Size A B
S00 111 67
S0 119 70
W 3-PHASE BUSBAR FOR MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCHES SIZE 2, MODULAR SPACING 55 mm
2)
For two motor protection switches BEZ00217
For three motor protection switches BEZ00218
3
3
1
6
8
9
8
55
15
110
165
3
3
DI MENSI ONS
Page
193
W FEED TERMINALS
W ROTARY OPERATING MECHANISMS (DOOR-COUPLING)
W BEZ00010/11
for motor protection switches size 0, 2, 3
Long shaft (with bracket)
3)
W FEED TERMINAL BEZ00216
for motor protection switches size 2
3
4
1 1 2
9
1
1
6
1
55
W TERMINAL BEZ00016
Connected from top
24 44
2
5
W TERMINAL BEZ00116
Connected from top
7
3
1
2
2
54
44
1 4 1 4
2
5
1)
Lockable in neutral position with max. 8 mm shackle diameter.
2)
Mounted with screw cap.
3)
Supplied with a shaft length of 330 mm; can be adjusted by shortening the shaft.
5)
Grounding terminal 35 mm2 and sheet-metal bracket for shaft.
DI MENSI ONS
Page
194
W MOLDED-PLASTIC ENCLOSURES FOR SURFACE MOUNTING
BEZ00012 with membrane, BEZ00013 with emergency stop mushroom head
45 1 9
55
1 3 c)
b)
b) 1 00, 5
b) 1 43
a) 89
4
,
5
1
4
5
.
.
.
1
4
8
7
7
,
5
6)
8)
3)
4)
9)
3)
Knock-outs for M25
4)
Knock-outs for rear cable entry M20
6)
Max. shackle diameter for padlock 8 mm
8)
Locking plate BEZ00014
9)
EMERGENCY-STOP mushroom button
BEZ00112, BEZ00113 with rotary handle
and rotary handle for emergency stop
BEZ00212, BEZ00213 with rotary handle
and rotary handle for emergency stop
1 9 45
2)
1
4
5
-
1
4
8
4
,
5
1
5
5
a 1 26
1 8
3)
1 )
1 50
1 8
1 81
2
3
5
2
5
0
7
25 29 32
3)
1 ) 2)
a) 105 mm
1)
Knock-outs for M25
2)
3)
Opening for padlock with shackle diameter max. 6 ... 8 mm
1)
Knock-outs for M32 (left) and M40 (right)
2)
3)
Opening for padlock with shackle diameter max. 6 ... 8 mm
a) 105 mm
b) With EMERGENCY-STOP mushroom button: 154 mm
Dimensions refer to mounting surface
c) With EMERGENCY-STOP mushroom button: 64 mm
d) Dimensions refer to mounting surface
d)
d)
W BEZ00112, BEZ00113 SIZE 0 W BEZ00212, BEZ00213 SIZE 2
W BEZ00012, BEZ00013 SIZE 00
SCHEMATI CS
Page
195
Lateral auxiliary switch (side mounted) Transverse auxiliary switch (front mounted)
BEZ00001 1NO + 1NC BEZ00002 2NO BEZ00003 1NO + 1NC BEZ00004 2NO
Signaling switch
BEZ00005 1NO + 1NC ... overload release Undervoltage release Shunt trip
1NO + 1NC ... short circuit release BEZ00006/7 BEZ00008/9
Undervoltage release Shunt trip
W CONNECTION DIAGRAMS
W CONTROL DIAGRAMS
W SWITCHING EXAMPLES
33 41
34 42
v I
57 65 77 85
58 66 78 86
BES motor protection switches with BEZ00005 signaling switch
D2
D1
U
v
C2
C1
33 43
34 44
13 21
14 22
13 23
14 24
S0, S1, S2 OFF pushbutton in the system
Q1 Motor protection switche
S Auxiliary switch of the motor protection switch Q1
F1; F2 Fuse (gL/gG) max. 10 A
F3 Shunt trip
F4 Undervoltage releases
S
Separate "tripped" and "shortcircuit" signals:
S1 Signaling switch
Q1 Motor protection switche
F1 Fuse (gL/gG), max. 10 A
H1 Signal lamp "Short-circuit"
H2 Signal lamp "Overload" or "Tripping by auxiliary trip unit"
1 3 5
4 6 2
v v v
T2 T3 T1
L1 L2 L3
BESD, BES0, BES2, BES3
Page
196
I NDEX
OVERVIEW FOR:
LSDD CONTACTORS
LSHD AUXILIARY CONTACTORS
CONTACTORS AND CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES 3POLE
LSSD CONTACTORS FOR PLC-USE
LSD0 CONTACTORS FOR PLC-USE
LSS0 CONTACTORS FOR PLC-USE
LSD6 CONTACTORS
LSDE CONTACTORS
LSDG CONTACTORS
LSD CONTACTORS
LSDE CONTACTORS
LSDG CONTACTORS
LSD CONTACTORS
BES MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCHES
GENERAL INFORMATIONS FOR:
LSD CONTACTORS FOR SWITCHING MOTORS, 3POLE
LSS CONTACTORS FOR SWITCHING MOTORS, 3POLE
LSD CONTACTORS FOR SWITCHING MOTORS, 3POLE
BES MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCHES
PRODUCTS AND ORDER NUMBERS FOR:
LSD CONTACTORS FOR SWITCHING MOTORS AC3 3POLE, SIZE 00
LSD CONTACTORS FOR SWITCHING MOTORS AC3 3POLE, SIZE 6/10/12
LSD VACUUM CONTACTORS AC3 3POLE, SIZE 14
LSW REVERSING CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES AC3, SIZE 00/0/2/3
LSY WYE-DELTA CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES AC3, SIZE 00/0/2
LSR CONTACTORS FOR SWITCHING AC1 LOADS 4POLE, SIZE 00/0
LSR CONTACTORS FOR SWITCHING AC1 LOADS 4POLE, SIZE 2/3
LSK CAPACITOR SWITCHING CONTACTORS
LA3K CAPACITOR SWITCHING CONTACTORS
AUXILIARY CONTACTS FOR CAPACITOR SWITCHING CONTACTORS LA3K
LSHD AUXILIARY CONTACTORS AC15 4POLE, SIZE 00
AUXILIARY CONTACTS AND CONTACT BLOCKS FOR LSDD OR LSSD, SIZE 00
AUXILIARY CONTACTS AND CONTACT BLOCKS FOR LSDD, LSSD OR LSHD,
SIZE 00
PARALLEL CONNECTORS (STAR JUMPER) AND FEED TERMINAL, SIZE 00
WIRING SETS, MECHANICAL INTERLOCK AND CONNECTION CLIPS, SIZE 00
WYE-DELTA TIMERS
CONNECTION LINKS FOR CONTACTORS AND MOTOR PROTECTION
SWITCHES, SIZE 00
SOLDER PIN ADAPTER, SIZE 00
SURGE SUPRESSORS (PLUG IN TYPE), SIZE 00
AUXILIARY CONTACTS (SNAP ON FRONT), SIZE 0-12
AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCKS (SNAP ON FRONT), SIZE 0-12
AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCKS (SIDE MOUNTED), SIZE 0-12
MECHANICAL INTERLOCKS, SIZE 0-12
WIRING SETS FOR REVERSING CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES, SIZE 0-12
WIRING SETS FOR YD-ASSEMBLIES AND YD-ACCESSORIES, SIZE 0-3
CONNECTION LINKS FOR CONTACTORS AND MOTOR PROTECTION
SWITCHES, SIZE 0-3
PARALLEL CONNECTORS (STAR JUMPER) AND FEED TERMINALS, SIZE 0-12
SURGE SUPRESSORS, SIZE 0-12
CONNECTION CLIPS FOR CONTACTORS, SIZE 0-3
MECHANICAL LATCHING BLOCK, SIZE 0-2
TERMINAL COVERS, SIZE 2-14
BZ MODULAR CONTACTORS FOR SWITCHING AC1 LOAD, AC OPERATED
AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCK FOR BZ MODULAR CONTACTORS
BZ MODULAR CONTACTOR 4-POLE, SOLENOID OPERATED, SEALABLE
LA1 MINIATUR POWER CONTACTORS FOR SWITCHING MOTORS AC3
3POLE
LA1 MINIATUR POWER CONTACTORS FOR SWITCHING MOTORS AC3
4POLE
AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCKS FOR MINIATUR POWER CONTACTORS
LA1 MINIATUR AUXILIARY CONTACTORS AC15 4POLE
AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCKS FOR MINIATUR AUXILIARY CONTACTORS
SURGE SUPPRESSOR FOR MINIATUR CONTACTORS
LST THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAY, SIZE 00
HOLDER FOR LST THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAY
LA1 THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS WITH HAND RESET
BES MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCH, SIZE 00
AUXILLIARY SWITCH FOR BES MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCH
SIGNALING SWITCH FOR BES MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCH
UNDERVOLTAGE RELEASE FOR BES MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCH
SHUNT TRIP FOR BES MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCH
HOUSINGS AND LOCKING PLATE FOR BES MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCH
BUSBARS FOR BES MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCH
COVERS FOR SPARE-PLACE FOR BES MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCH
ROTARY OPERATING MECHANISMS FOR BES MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCH
FEED TERMINALS FOR BES MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCH
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR:
LSD CONTACTORS, 3POLE, 3 ... 250 kW
LSS CONTACTORS, 3POLE, 3 ... 250 kW
LSDH VACUUM CONTACTORS, 3POLE, 335 ... 450 kW
LSR CONTACTORS FOR SWITCHING RESISTIVE LOADS
LSH AUXILIARY CONTACTORS, 4POLE
LSS CONTACTORS FOR PLC-USE
ACCESSORIES FOR LSD AND LSH AUXILIARY CONTACTORS
LA3K CAPACITOR SWITCHING CONTACTORS
LSW REVERSING CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES
WYE-DELTA CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES
LSY COMPLETE UNITS
MODULAR CONTACTOR TYPES R20.., R25.., R40.., R63.., K1R..
CONNECTION DIAGRAM FOR MODULAR CONTACTOR
TYPES R20.., R25.., R40.., R63.., K1R40
POSITION OF THE TERMINALS FOR MODULAR CONTACTOR
TYPES R.., K1R40 AND AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCK RH11
MINIATUR POWER CONTACTORS LA1009..
MINIATUR POWER AND AUXILIARY CONTACTORS LA1007..
MINIATUR POWER AND AUXILIARY CONTACTORS
ACCESSORY FOR MINIATUR POWER AND AUXILIARY CONTACTORS
THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS LSTD
THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS LST0
THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS SIZE 00
ACCESSORIES FOR THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS
THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS LA1003.. FOR MINIATUR POWER
CONTACTORS
TRIPPING CHARACTERISTICS FOR LA1003..
THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS LA1003.. FOR MINIATUR POWER
CONTACTORS
BES MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCHES SIZES 00 TO 3
ACCESSORIES FOR BES MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCHES
6
6
4
6
7
7
7
7
8
8
8
9
10
10
11
12
144
170
13
15
15
17
146
175
18
20
20
21
21
22
22
23
23
24
24
25
25
26
26
26
27
27
27
28
28
28
29
29
29
30
30
30
31
31
32
32
32
124
125
125
134
134
134
135
135
135
149
149
150
150
150
162
176
177
178
178
179
179
179
180
180
180
181
181
181
33
33
71
79
83
88
89
90
92
95
97
99
126
130
130
136
138
139
139
151
151
151
151
154
155
154
155
156
163
164
165
182
188
I NDEX
Page
197
DIMENSIONS FOR:
LSD CONTACTORS, 3-POLE
LSD2 CONTACTORS, SIZE 2
LSDE CONTACTORS, SIZE 10
LSDG CONTACTORS, SIZE 12
LSDH6 VACUUM CONTACTORS, SIZE 14
LSRD CONTACTORS, SIZE 00
LSR0 CONTACTORS, SIZE 0
LSHD AUXILIARY CONTACTORS, SIZE 00
LSHD...N, LSHD...G AUXILIARY CONTACTORS FOR PLC-USE, SIZE 00
LSKD CAPACITOR CONTACTORS, SIZE 00
LSK0 CAPACITOR CONTACTORS, SIZE 0
LSK3 CAPACITOR CONTACTORS, SIZE 3
LA3K18..
LA3K24.., LA3K32..
LA3K50.., LA3K62.., LA3K74..
LA3K90.., LA3K11..
LSZDD003 PARALLEL CONNECTOR, SIZE 00
LSZDD004 PARALLEL CONNECTOR, SIZE 00
LSZ0D003 PARALLEL CONNECTOR, SIZE 0
LSZ2D003 PARALLEL CONNECTOR, SIZE 0
LSZ00113 MECHANICAL LATCHING BLOCK
LSZ2D002 TERMINAL COVER FOR BOX TERMINALS, SIZE 2
LSZ3D002 TERMINAL COVER FOR BOX TERMINALS, SIZE 3
LSZDH5.., LSZDD2..*
AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCK, SIZE 00
LSZD0501, LSZD0510 AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCK, SIZE 00 AUXILIARY
CONTACT BLOCK, SIZE 00
LSZ0D0.., LSZ0D9.. AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCK, SIZES 0 TO 12
LSZ0D711, LSZ3D811* AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCK, SIZES 0 (*3) TO 12
ACCESSORIES FOR LSD CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES
LSWD, SIZE 00
LSW0, SIZE 0
LSW2, SIZE 2
LSW3, SIZE 3
LSYD, SIZES 00 00 00
LSY0, SIZES 0 0 0
LSY2, SIZES 2 2 0
SCREW CONNECTION LSTD SIZE 00
INTERNAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS FOR THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS
POSITION OF THE TERMINALS FOR LST THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS
PROTECTION OF DC MOTORS
THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS FOR MINIATUR POWER CONTACTORS
LA1003..
CONNECTION DIAGRAMS FOR THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS LA1 FOR
MINIATUR POWER CONTACTORS
POSITION OF THE TERMINALS FOR THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS LA1 FOR
MINIATUR POWER CONTACTORS
BES MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCHES SIZES 00 TO 3
BUSBARS FOR BES MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCHES
3-PHASE FEED TERMINALS FOR BES MOTOR PROTECTION SWITCHES
ROTARY OPERATING MECHANISMS (DOOR-COUPLING) FOR BES MOTOR
PROTECTION SWITCHES
MOLDED-PLASTIC ENCLOSURES FOR SURFACE MOUNTING FOR BES MOTOR
PROTECTION SWITCHES
CONNECTION DIAGRAMS FOR LS CONTACTORS AND ACCESSORIES:
LSDD CONTACTORS, SIZE 00
LSD0 CONTACTORS, SIZES 0 TO 12
LSDE CONTACTORS, SIZES 0 TO 13
LSDG CONTACTORS, SIZES 0 TO 13
LSRD CONTACTORS WITH 4 MAIN CONTACTS, SIZE 00
LSR2 CONTACTORS WITH 4 MAIN CONTACTS, SIZES 0 TO 3
LSHD AUXILIARY CONTACTORS, SIZE 00
LSHD AUXILIARY CONTACTORS FOR PLC-USE, SIZE 00
LSHD AUXILIARY CONTACTORS FOR PLC-USE, SIZE 00
ACCESSORIES FOR CONTACTORS LSDD, LSSD WITH 1 NO INCLUDED,
SIZE 00
ACCESSORIES FOR CONTACTORS AND AUXILIARY CONTACTORS LSDD,
LSSD WITH 1 NC INCLUDED
ACCESSORIES FOR CONTACTORS AUXILIARY CONTACTORS, SIZE 00
ACCESSORIES FOR CONTACTORS, SIZE 0 TO 12
AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCKS, 4POLE, FOR CONTACTORS SIZES 0 TO 12
AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCKS, 4POLE, FOR CONTACTORS SIZES 0 TO 12
FIRST LATERALLY MOUNTABLE AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCK, 2POLE,
FOR CONTACTORS SIZES 0 TO 12
SECOND LATERALLY MOUNTABLE AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCK, 2POLE
SURGE SUPPRESSORS FOR SIZES 00 TO 12 (CODED PLUG-IN DIRECTION)
POSITION OF THE TERMINALS FOR LS CONTACTORS AND ACCESSORIES
AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCKS FOR CONTACTORS LSDD, LSSD WITH 1 NO
CONTACT
POSITION OF THE TERMINALS FOR LS CONTACTORS AND ACCESSORIES
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS FOR LSW REVERSING CONTACTOR ASSEMBLIES
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS FOR LSY WYE-DELTA STARTING CONTACTOR
ASSEMBLIES
CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS FOR CAPACITOR SWITCHING CONTACTORS
CONNECTION DIAGRAMS FOR MINIATUR POWER CONTACTORS
POSITION OF THE TERMINALS FOR MINIATUR POWER CONTACTORS
POSITION OF THE TERMINALS FOR MINIATUR AUXILIARY CONTACTORS
POSITION OF THE TERMINALS FOR AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCKS FOR
MINIATUR POWER AND AUXILIARY CONTACTORS
100
101
101
102
102
103
103
103
104
104
104
104
105
105
106
106
106
107
107
107
107
108
108
108
108
108
108
108
108
109
109
109
109
109
110
110
110
110
111
111
111
158
158
158
158
159
159
159
166
167
167
191
192
193
193
194
112
112
112
112
112
112
112
112
112
112
112
112
112
112
113
113
113
113
113
113
114
114
114
114
114
114
115
117
118
119
120
121
140
141
142
142
LI ST OF ARTI CLES
Page
198
B
BES00016 177
BES00020 177
BES00025 177
BES00032 177
BES00040 177
BES00050 177
BES00063 177
BES00080 177
BES00100 177
BES00125 177
BES00160 177
BES00200 177
BES00250 177
BES00320 177
BES00400 177
BES00500 177
BES00630 177
BES00800 177
BES01000 177
BES01200 177
BES01600 177
BES02000 177
BES02200 177
BES02500 177
BES22500 178
BES23200 178
BES24000 178
BES24500 178
BES25000 178
BES36300 178
BES37500 178
BES39000 178
BES39999 178
BESD0016 176
BESD0020 176
BESD0025 176
BESD0032 176
BESD0040 176
BESD0050 176
BESD0063 176
BESD0080 176
BESD0100 176
BESD0125 176
BESD0160 176
BESD0200 176
BESD0250 176
BESD0320 176
BESD0400 176
BESD0500 176
BESD0630 176
BESD0800 176
BESD1000 176
BESD1200 176
BEZ00001 179
BEZ00002 179
BEZ00003 179
BEZ00004 179
BEZ00005 179
BEZ00006 179
BEZ00007 179
BEZ00008 180
BEZ00009 180
BEZ00010 172
BEZ00011 172
BEZ00011 181
BEZ00012 180
BEZ00013 180
BEZ00014 180
BEZ00016 181
BEZ00017 180
BEZ00018 180
BEZ00019 181
BEZ00020 180
BEZ00021 180
BEZ00112 180
BEZ00113 180
BEZ00116 181
BEZ00212 180
BEZ00213 180
BEZ00216 181
BEZ00217 180
BEZ00218 180
BEZ00219 181
BZ326421 124
BZ326437 124
BZ326438 124
BZ326439 124
BZ326441 125
BZ326442 124
BZ326443 124
BZ326444 124
BZ326445 124
BZ326452 124
BZ326453 124
BZ326460 124
BZ326461 124
BZ326462 124
BZ326463 124
BZ326464 124
BZ326465 124
BZ326466 124
BZ326467 124
BZ326468 124
BZ326469 124
BZ326470 125
BZ326471 124
BZ326474 124
BZ326475 124
BZ326476 124
BZ326479 124
BZ326480 124
BZ326481 124
L
LA100301 162
LA100302 162
LA100303 162
LA100304 162
LA100305 162
LA100306 162
LA100307 162
LA100308 162
LA100309 162
LA100310 162
LA100311 162
LA100312 162
LA100770 135
LA100773 135
LA100774 135
LA100780 135
LA100783 135
LA100790 135
LA100793 135
LA100795 135
LA100910 134
LA100913 134
LA100915 134
LA10091B 134
LA100920 134
LA100923 134
LA100925 134
LA100943 134
LA10094B 134
LA190100 25
LA190101 25
LA190134 25
LA190135 25
LA190150 134
LA190151 134
LA190153 135
LA190154 135
LA190155 135
LA190156 135
LA190194 135
LA3K1133 24
LA3K1813 24
LA3K1823 24
LA3K2433 24
LA3K3233 24
LA3K5033 24
LA3K6233 24
LA3K7433 24
LA3K9033 24
LSD00930 19
LSD00932 19
LSD00933 19
LSD00935 19
LSD01230 19
LSD01232 19
LSD01233 19
LSD01235 19
LSD01730 19
LSD01732 19
LSD01733 19
LSD01734 19
LSD01735 19
LSD02530 19
LSD02532 19
LSD02533 19
LSD02535 19
LSD23230 20
LSD23232 20
LSD23233 20
LSD23235 20
LSD24030 20
LSD24032 20
LSD24033 20
LSD24035 20
LSD25030 20
LSD25032 20
LSD25033 20
LSD25035 20
LSD36530 20
LSD36532 20
LSD36533 20
LSD36535 20
LSD36553 20
LSD38030 20
LSD38032 20
LSD38033 20
LSD38035 20
LSD38050 20
LSD38052 20
LSD39530 20
LSD39533 20
LSD39535 20
LSD39553 20
LSD6115F 21
LSD6155F 21
LSD6195F 21
LSDD0710 18
LSDD0712 18
LSDD0713 18
LSDD0715 18
LSDD0720 18
LSDD0722 18
LSDD0723 18
LSDD0725 18
LSDD0910 18
LSDD0912 18
LSDD0913 18
LSDD0915 18
LSDD0920 18
LSDD0922 18
LSDD0923 18
LSDD0925 18
LSDD1210 18
LSDD1212 18
LSDD1213 18
LSDD1215 18
LSDD1220 18
LSDD1222 18
LSDD1223 18
LSDD1225 18
LSDE225F 21
LSDE265F 21
LSDE305F 21
LSDG415F 21
LSDG515F 21
LSDH63G3 21
LSDH64G3 21
LSDH82G3 21
LSDH83G3 21
LSHD0670 25
LSHD0673 25
LSHD0675 25
LSHD067G 25
LSHD067N 25
LSHD0680 25
LSHD0683 25
LSHD0685 25
LSHD068G 25
LSHD068N 25
LSHD0690 25
LSHD0693 25
LSHD0695 25
LSHD069G 25
LSHD069N 25
LSK03213 24
LSK36213 24
LSKD17B3 24
LSR03540 23
LSR03543 23
LSR03545 23
LSR04040 23
LSR04043 23
LSR04045 23
LSR26040 23
LSR26043 23
LSR26045 23
LSR31140 23
LSR31143 23
LSR31145 23
LSR31440 23
LSR31443 23
LSR31445 23
ORDER NO. PAGE ORDER NO. PAGE ORDER NO. PAGE ORDER NO. PAGE ORDER NO. PAGE ORDER NO. PAGE
LI ST OF ARTI CLES
Page
199
LSRD1840 23
LSRD1843 23
LSRD1845 23
LSRD2240 23
LSRD2243 23
LSRD2245 23
LSS0123H 19
LSS0173H 19
LSS0253H 19
LSSD071G 18
LSSD072G 18
LSSD091G 18
LSSD092G 18
LSSD121G 18
LSSD122G 18
LST00250 149
LST00320 149
LST00400 149
LST00500 149
LST00630 149
LST00800 149
LST01000 149
LST01250 149
LST01600 149
LST02000 149
LST02200 149
LST02500 149
LST20800 150
LST21000 150
LST21250 150
LST21600 150
LST22000 150
LST22500 150
LST23200 150
LST24000 150
LST24500 150
LST25000 150
LST32500 150
LST33200 150
LST34000 150
LST35000 150
LST36300 150
LST37500 150
LST39000 150
LST39999 150
LSTD0016 149
LSTD0020 149
LSTD0025 149
LSTD0032 149
LSTD0040 149
LSTD0050 149
LSTD0063 149
LSTD0080 149
LSTD0100 149
LSTD0125 149
LSTD0160 149
LSTD0200 149
LSTD0250 149
LSTD0320 149
LSTD0400 149
LSTD0500 149
LSTD0630 149
LSTD0800 149
LSTD1000 149
LSTD1200 149
LSW01233 22
LSW01733 22
LSW02533 22
LSW23233 22
LSW24033 22
LSW25033 22
LSW36533 22
LSW38033 22
LSW39533 22
LSWD0733 22
LSWD0933 22
LSWD1233 22
LSY03233 22
LSY25033 22
LSYD1733 22
LSZ00001 31
LSZ00002 31
LSZ00003 31
LSZ00113 32
LSZ0D001 28
LSZ0D002 30
LSZ0D003 31
LSZ0D004 30
LSZ0D010 28
LSZ0D104F 29
LSZ0D113 29
LSZ0D122 29
LSZ0D122F 29
LSZ0D131 29
LSZ0D131F 29
LSZ0D140F 29
LSZ0D711 29
LSZ0D901 28
LSZ0D910 28
LSZ0TE01 150
LSZ0W001 30
LSZ0W002 29
LSZ0W003 32
LSZ0W004 32
LSZ0Y001 30
LSZ0Y002 31
LSZ20001 31
LSZ2D001 32
LSZ2D002 32
LSZ2D003 31
LSZ2D004 30
LSZ2D005 30
LSZ2TE01 150
LSZ2W001 30
LSZ2W002 32
LSZ2W003 32
LSZ2Y001 30
LSZ2Y002 30
LSZ2Y003 30
LSZ2Y004 30
LSZ2Y005 31
LSZ3D001 31
LSZ3D002 32
LSZ3D003 30
LSZ3D004 30
LSZ3D811 29
LSZ3TE01 150
LSZ3W001 30
LSZ3W002 32
LSZ3Y004 31
LSZ60001 31
LSZ6D001 32
LSZ6D002 32
LSZ6W001 29
LSZ6W002 30
LSZ6Y003 31
LSZD0001 28
LSZD0002 28
LSZD0003 28
LSZD0004 28
LSZD0005 31
LSZD0006 31
LSZD0101 27
LSZD0102 27
LSZD0501 26
LSZD0501 26
LSZD0510 26
LSZD0510 26
LSZDD001 26
LSZDD002 28
LSZDD003 26
LSZDD004 26
LSZDD005 27
LSZDD006 27
LSZDD201 26
LSZDD212 26
LSZDD213 26
LSZDD222 26
LSZDH522 26
LSZDH531 26
LSZDH540 26
LSZDW001 27
LSZDW002 27
LSZDY001 27
LSZDY002 26
LSZED001 32
LSZED002 32
LSZEW001 30
LSZEY003 31
LSZGW001 30
LSZHD001 32
ORDER NO. PAGE ORDER NO. PAGE ORDER NO. PAGE ORDER NO. PAGE ORDER NO. PAGE ORDER NO. PAGE
GENERAL TERMS OF DELI VERY
Page
200
1. Scope
1.1 These General Terms shall govern legal transactions between business en-
terprises, namely the delivery of commodities and, mutatis mutandis, the
rendering of services. Software transactions are with precedence governed
by the Software Conditions issued by the Austrian Electrical and Electron-
ics Industry Association, assembly work by the Terms and Conditions for
Assembly Work issued by the Austrian Power Current and Light Current
Engineering Industry and/or (where applicable) the Terms and Conditions
for the Assembly of Electrical Equipment used in Medicine issued by the
Austrian Electrical and Electronics Industry (the current versions are avail-
able at www.feei.at).
1.2 Any departure from the terms and conditions mentioned in 1.1 above shall
be valid only if expressly accepted in writing by Seller.
2. Submission of offers
2.1 Sellers offers shall be deemed offers without engagement.
2.2 Tender documents and project documentation must not be duplicated nor
made available to third parties without the permission of Seller. They may
be claimed back at any time and shall be returned to Seller immediately if
the order is placed elsewhere.
3. Conclusion of contract
31 The contract shall be deemed concluded upon written connrmation by Seller
of an order received or upon dispatch of a delivery.
3.2 Particulars appearing in catalog, folders etc. as well as any oral or written
statements shall only be binding if Seller makes express reference to them
in the connrmation of the order
3.3 Subsequent amendments of or additions to the contract shalI be subject to
written connrmation
4. Prices
4.1 Prices shall be quoted ex works or ex Sellers warehouse without VAT, pack-
ing and packaging, loading, disassembly, take-back and proper recycling
and disposal of waste electrical and electronic equipment for commercial
purposes as denned by the Ordinance Regulating the Handling of Waste
Electrical Equipment. Buyer shall be liable for any and all charges, taxes
or other duties levied in respect of delivery. If the terms of delivery include
transport to a destination designated by Buyer, transport costs as weIl as the
cost of any transport insurance desired by Buyer shall be borne by the latter.
Delivery does not, however, include unloading and subsequent handling.
Packaging materials will be taken back only by express agreement.
4.2 Seller reserves the right to modify prices if the order placed is not in accord-
ance with the offer submitted.
43 Irices are based on costs obtaining at the time of the nrst quotation In the
event that the costs have increased by the time of delivery, Seller shall have
the right to adjust prices accordingly.
4.4 In carrying out repair orders, Seller shall provide all services deemed ex-
pedient and shall charge Buyer for the same on the basis of the work input
and/or expenditures required. The same holds for any services or additional
services the expediency of which becomes apparent only as the repair order
is executed ln such an event special notincation of Buyer shall not be re-
quired.
4.5 Expenses for estimates of costs of repair and maintenance or for expert
valuations shall be invoiced to Buyer.
5. Delivery
5.1 The period allowed for delivery shall commence at the latest of the follow-
ing dates:
a) the date of order connrmation by Seller,
b) the date of fulnllment by Buyer of all the conditions technical commer-
cial and other for which he is responsible,
c) the date of receipt by Seller of a deposit or security due before delivery of
the goods in question.
5.2 Buyer shall obtain whatever licences or approvals may be required from
authorities or third parties for the construction of plant and equipment. If the
granting of such licences or approvals is delayed for any reason the delivery
period shall be extended accordingly.
5.3 Seller may carry out, and charge Buyer for, partial or advance deliveries. If
delivery on call is agreed upon, the commodity shall be deemed called off at
the Iatest one year after the order was placed.
5.4 In case of unforeseeable circumstances or circumstances beyond the parties
control, such as all cases of force majeure, which impede compliance with
the agreed period of delivery, the latter shall be extended in any case for the
duration of such circumstances, these include in particular armed conicts
ofncial interventions and prohibitions delays in transport or customs clear-
ance, damages in transit, energy shortage and raw materials scarcity, labor
disputes, and default on performance by a major component supplier who is
difncult to replace The aforesaid circumstances shall be deemed to prevail
irrespective of whether they affect Seller or his subcontractor(s).
5.5 If a contractual penalty for default of delivery was agreed upon by contract-
ing parties when the contract was concluded, it shall be executed as follows,
and any deviations concerning individual items shall not affect the remain-
ing provisions: Where delay in performance can be shown to have occurred
solely through the fault of Seller, Buyer may claim for each completed week
of delay an indemnity of at most one half of one per cent, a total of no more
than 5 %, however, of the value of that part of the goods to be delivered
which cannot be used on account of Sellers failure to deliver an essential
part thereof, provided the Buyer has suffered a damage to the aforesaid
extent. Assertion of rights of damages exceeding this extent is precluded.
6. Passage of risk and Place of performance
6.1 Enjoyment and risk shall pass to Buyer at the time of departure of the goods ex
works or ex warehouse regardless of the terms of quotation (such as carriage
paid, C.I.F. etc.) agreed upon. This provision also includes the case of shipment
being effected, organised and supervised by Seller and the case of delivery be-
ing made in connection with assembly work to be undertaken by Seller.
6.2 For services the place of performance shall be the place at which the service
is rendered, the risk in respect of such services or any part thereof that may
have been agreed upon shall pass to Buyer at the time the services have been
rendered.
7. Payment
7.1 Unless otherwise agreed, one third of the purchase price shall fall due at the
time of receipt by Buyer of the order connrmation of Seller one third after
half the delivery period has elapsed and the balance at the time of delivery.
Irrespective thereof the turnover tax comprised in the amount of the invoice
shall be paid within 30 days of the invoice date.
7.2 In the case of part settlements the individual part payments shall fall due
upon receipt of the respective invoices. The same shall apply to amounts
invoiced for additional deliveries or resulting from additional agreements
beyond the scope of the original contract, irrespective of the terms of pay-
ment agreed upon for the principal delivery.
7.3 Payment shall be made without any discount free Sellers domicile in the
agreed currency. Drafts and checks shaII be accepted on account of payment
only, with all interest, fees and charges in connection therewith (such as col-
lection and discounting charges) to be borne by Buyer.
7.4 Buyer shall not be entitled to withhold or offset payment on the grounds of
any warranty claims or other counterclaims.
7.5 Payment shall be deemed to have been effected on the date at which the
amount in question is at Sellers disposal.
7.6 If Buyer fails to meet the terms of payment or any other obligation arising
from this or other transactions, Seller may without prejudice to his other
rights
a) suspend performance of his own obligations until payments have been
made or other obligations fulnlled and exercise his right to extend the
period of delivery to a reasonable extent,
b) call in debts arisen from this or any other transactions and charge default
interest amounting to 1.25 % per month plus turnover tax for these amounts
beginning with the due dates, unless Seller proves costs exceeding this.
In any case Seller has the right to invoice all expenses arising prior to a
lawsuit, especially reminder charges and lawyers fees.
7.7 Discounts or bonuses are subject to complete payment in due time.
7.8 Seller retains title to all goods delivered by him until receipt of all amounts
invoiced including interests and charges.
Buyer herewith assigns his claim out of a resale of conditional commodi-
ties, even if they are processed, transformed or combined with other com-
modities, to Seller to secure the latters purchase money claim. In the case
of resale granting respite Buyer shall have the power of disposal of the prod-
uct under retention of ownership only with the proviso that upon reselling
Buyer notines the secondary buyer of the assignment for security or enters
the assignment in his account books. Upon request Buyer has to notify the
assigned claim and the debtor thereof to Seller, and to make all information
and material required for his debt collection available and to notify the as-
signment to the third-party debtor. If the goods are attached or otherwise
levied upon, Buyer shalI draw attention to Sellers title and immediately
inform Seller of the attachment or levy.
General Terms of Delivery
issued by the Austrian Electrical and Electronics Industry Association
GENERAL TERMS OF DELI VERY
8. Warranty and acceptance of obligation to repair defects
81 Once the agreed terms of payment have been complied with Seller shall
subject to the conditions hereunder, remedy any defect existing at the time
of acceptance of the article in question whether due to faulty design, mate-
rial or manufacture, that impairs the functioning of said article. From par-
ticulars appearing in catalogues, folders, promotional literature as well as
written or oral statements which have not been included in the agreement no
warranty obligations may be deduced.
8.2 Unless special warranty periods operate for individual items the warranty
period shall be 12 months. These conditions shall also apply to any goods
supplied or services rendered in respect of goods supplied that are nrmly
attached to buildings or the ground. The warranty period begins at the point
of passage of risk acc. to paragraph 6.
8.3 The foregoing warranty obligations are conditional upon the Buyer giving
immediate notice in writing of any defects that have occurred and such no-
tice reaching the Seller. Buyer shall prove immediately the presence of a de-
fect, in particular he shall make available immediately to Seller all material
and data in his possession. Non-observance of Buyers obligation to give
immediate notice of the defect invalidates the right of claiming consequen-
tial harm caused by a defect. Upon receipt of such notice Seller shall, in the
case of a defect covered by the warranty under 8.1 above, have the option to
replace the defective goods or defective parts thereof or else to repair them
on Buyers premises or have them returned for repair, or to grant a fair and
reasonable price reduction.
8.4 Any expenses incurred in connection with rectifying defects (e. g. expenses
for assembly and disassembly, transport, waste disposal, travel and site-
to-quarters time) shall be borne by Buyer. For warranty work on Buyers
premises Buyer shall make available free of charge any assistance, hoisting
gear, scaffolding and sundry supplies and incidentals that may he required.
Replaced parts shall become the property of Seller
8.5 If an article is manufactured by Seller on the basis of design data, design
drawings models or other specincations supplied by Buyer Seller`s war-
ranty shall be restricted to non-compliance with Buyers specincations
8.6 Sellers warranty obligation shall not extend to any defects due to assembly
and installation work not undertaken by Seller, inadequate equipment, or
due to non-compliance with installation requirements and operating con-
ditions, overloading of parts in excess of the design values stipulated by
Seller, negligent or faulty handling or the use of inappropriate materials, nor
for defects attributable to material supplied by Buyer. Nor shall Seller be li-
able for damage due to acts of third parties, atmospheric discharges. Excess
voltage and chemical inuences The warranty does not cover the replace-
ment of parts subject to natural wear and tear. Seller accepts no warranty for
the sale of used goods.
8.7 The warranty shall lapse immediately if, without written consent of Seller,
Buyer himself or a third party not expressly authorised undertakes modinca-
tions or repairs on any items delivered.
8.8 Claims acc. to 933b ABGB are struck by the statute of limitation with
lapse of the period mentioned under point 8.2.
8.9 The provisions of sub-paragraphs 8.1 to 8.7 shall apply, mutatis mutandis, to
all cases where the obligation to repair defects has to be accepted for other
reasons laid down by law.
9. Withdrawal from contract
9.1 Buyer may withdraw from the contract only in the event of delays caused by
gross negligence on the part of Seller and only after a reasonable period of
grace has elapsed Withdrawal from contract shall be notined in writing by
registered mail.
9.2 Irrespective of his other rights Seller shall be entitled to withdraw from the
contract
a) if the execution of delivery or the inception or continuation of services to
be rendered under the contract is made impossible for reasons within the
responsibility of Buyer and if the delay is extended beyond a reasonable
period of grace allowed,
b) if doubts have arisen as to Buyers creditworthiness and if same fails,
on Sellers request, to make an advance payment or to provide adequate
security prior to delivery, or
c) if, for reasons mentioned in 5.4, the period allowed for delivery is ex-
tended by more than half of the period originally agreed or by at least 6
months.
9.3 For the reasons given above withdrawal from the contract shall also be possi-
ble in respect of any outstanding part of the delivery or service contracted for.
9.4 If bankruptcy proceedings are instituted against any contracting party or
an application for bankruptcy proceedings against that party is not granted
for insufnciency of assets the other party may withdraw from the contract
without allowing a period of grace.
9.5 Without prejudice to Sellers claim for damages including expenses aris-
ing prior to a lawsuit, upon withdrawal from contract any open accounts in
respect of deliveries made or services rendered in whole or in part shall be
settled according to contract This provision also covers deliveries or serv-
ices not yet accepted by Buyer as weIl as any preparatory acts performed
by Seller. Seller shall, however, have the option alternatively to require the
restitution of articles already delivered.
9.6 Withdrawal from contract shall have no consequences other than those stip-
ulated above.
9.7 The assertion of claims on the ground of laesio enormis, error, or lapse of
purpose by the Buyer is excluded.
10. Disposal of waste electrical and electronic equipment
10.1 The Buyer of electrical/electronic equipment for commercial purposes, in-
corporated in Austria is responsible for the nnancing of the collection and
treatment of waste electrical and electronic equipment as denned by the
Ordinance Regulating the Handling of Waste Electrical Equipment if he is
himself the user of the electrical/electronic equipment. If the Buyer is not
the end user he shall transfer the full nnancial commitment to his customer
by agreement and furnish proof thereof to the Seller.
10.2 The Buyer incorporated in Austria shall ensure that the Seller is provided
with all information necessary to meet the Sellers obligations as manu-
facturerimporter particularly according to 11 and 24 of the Ordinance
Regulating the Handling of Waste Electrical Equipment and the Waste Man-
agement Act.
10.3 The Buyer incorporated in Austria is liable vis--vis the Seller for any dam-
age and other nnancial disadvantages incurred by Seller due to Buyer`s
failure to meet or fully meet his nnancing commitment or any other obliga-
tions according to Article 10. The Buyer shall bear the burden of proof of
performance of this obligation.
11. Sellers liability
111 Outside the scope of the Iroduct Iiability Act Seller shall be liable only if
the damage in question is proved to be due to intentional acts or acts of gross
negligence, within the limits of statutory provisions. Seller shall not be li-
able for damage due to acts of ordinary negligence nor for consequential
damages or damages for pure economic loss loss of pronts loss of savings
or interest or damage resulting from third-party claims against buyer.
11.2 Seller shall not be liable for damages in case of non-compliance with in-
structions for assembly, commissioning and operation (such as are contained
in instructions for use) or non-compliance with licensing requirements.
11.3 Claims that exceed the contractual penalties that were agreed on are ex-
cluded from the respective title.
12. Industrial property rights and copyrights
12.1 Buyer shall indemnify Seller and hold him harmless against any claims for
any infringement of industrial property rights raised against him if Seller
manufactures an article pursuant to any design data, design drawings, mod-
els or other specincations made available to him by Buyer
122 Design documents such as plans and drawings and other technical specin-
cations as well as samples, catalogues, prospectuses, pictures and the like
shall remain the intellectual property of Seller and are subject to the relevant
statutory provisions governing reproduction, imitation, competition etc. The
provisions of 22 above shall also cover design documents.
13. General
Should individual provisions of the contract or of these provisions be invalid
the validity of the other provisions shall not be affected. The invalid provi-
sion shall be replaced by a valid one, which comes as close to the target goal
as possible.
14. Jurisdiction and applicable law
Any litigations arising under the contract including litigations over the ex-
istence or non-existence thereof shall fall within the exclusive jurisdiction
of the competent court at Sellers domicile, the competent court of the Bez-
irksgericht Innere Stadt, Vienna, shall have exclusive jurisdiction if Seller
is domiciled in Vienna. The contract is subject to Austrian law excluding
the referral rules. Application of the UN Convention on Contracts for the
lnternational Sale of Goods is renounced.

Last revised in May 2007
HEADQUARTERS
SCHRACK TECHNI K GMBH
Seybelgasse 13, A-1230 Vienna
PHONE +43(0)1/866 85-5900
FAX +43(0)1/866 85-98804
E-MAIL export@schrack.com
THE COMPANY
CONNECTING COMPETENCE.
WWW.SCHRACK.COM
BELGI UM
SCHRACK TECHNI K B.V.B.A
Twaalfapostelenstraat 14
BE-9051 St-Denijs-Westrem
PHONE +32 9/384 79 92
FAX +32 9/384 87 69
E-MAIL info@schrack.be
CROATI A
SCHRACK TECHNI K D.O.O.
Zavrtnica 17
HR-10000 Zagreb
PHONE +385 1/605 55 00
FAX +385 1/605 55 66
E-MAIL schrack@schrack.hr
POLAND
SCHRACK TECHNI K
POLSKA SP.Z.O.O.
ul. Staniewicka 5
PL-03-310 Warszawa
PHONE +48 22/331 48 31
FAX +48 22/331 48 33
E-MAIL se@schrack.pl
ROMANI A
SCHRACK TECHNI K SRL
Str. Simion Barnutiu nr. 15
RO-410204 Oradea
PHONE +40 259/435 887
FAX +40 259/412 892
E-MAIL schrack@schrack.ro
SERBI A
Kumodraska 260
RS-11000 Beograd
PHONE +38 1/11 309 2600
FAX +38 1/11 309 2620
E-MAIL office@schrack.co.yu
SLOVAKI A
SCHRACK TECHNIK SPOL. SR.O.
Langsfeldova 2
SK-03601 Martin
PHONE +42 1/43 422 16 41
FAX +42 1/43 423 95 56
E-MAIL martin@schrack.sk
SLOVENI A
Pamee 175
SLO-2380 Slovenj Gradec
PHONE +38 6/2 883 92 00
FAX +38 6/2 884 34 71
E-MAIL schrack.sg@schrack.si
CZECH REPUBLI C
SCHRACK TECHNIK SPOL. SR.O.
Dolnomecholupska 2
CZ-10200 Praha 10 Hostivar
PHONE +42(0)2/810 08 264
FAX +42(0)2/810 08 462
E-MAIL praha@schrack.cz
HUNGARY
SCHRACK TECHNI K KFT.
Vidor u. 5
H-1172 Budapest
PHONE +36 1/253 14 01
FAX +36 1/253 14 91
E-MAIL schrack@schrack.hu
SCHRACK COMPANI ES
K-ALEA-EN9

Catalog Contactoare

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Исходное описание:

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Catalog Contactoare

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

W POWER AND AUXILIARY CONTACTORS

W LSDD, LSSD CONTACTORS, SI ZE 00

- finely stranded with end sleeve mm

- AWG cables, solid or stranded AWG 2 (20 ... 14)

Вам также может понравиться